I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations,
ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical
problems and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Expresses one value as a fraction of another given ratio and vice
versa. (M6NS-IIa-129)
1. Express one value as a fraction of another given their ratio and
vice versa.
2. Write ratio in three different ways.
II. CONTENT Expressing one’s value as a fraction of another given ratio and
vice versa.
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide
Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190
2. Learner’s
Materials Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87
3. Textbook Pages Mathematics for Everyday Use 6 p. 128 - 129
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 5 - Rational
Numbers: Ratio and Proportion p. 1-5
B. Other Learning
Resources
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 p. 289 - 293
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson.
Mental Computation:
1. 3÷
3
7
= N 2.
3
4
÷
1
2
= N
3.
1
5
÷ 6 = N 4. 8 ÷
1
2
= N
5. 1
1
3
÷ 4
Possible answer.
1. 7
2.
3
2
or 1
1
2
3.
1
30
4. 10
5.
1
23
School:
Grade
Level: VI
Teacher:
Learning
Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching Date
and Time: Week 1, Day 1 Quarter: SECOND
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson.
Ask the pupils to compare the
things in the classroom
according to their number or
quantity.
For example, the number of
chairs compare to the number
of tables, the number of shoes
to the number of slippers and
so, on. Have them write the
ratios of these sets of objects
on the board.
Pupils answer may vary.
C. Presenting
examples/
instances of the
new lesson
In Mr. Cambangay’s class,
there are 12 boys and 10 girls.
Compare the number of girls to
the number of boys and vice
versa.
Guide the pupils to show the
relationship of the number of
boys to the number of girls.
Ask: How will you write the
comparison of the number of
boys to the number of girls
using fraction? Is there another
way of writing it? How?
Possible answer.
12
10
Yes in colon (:) and in words.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
To compare, let us use the
concept of ratio. Ratio is a
comparison of two quantities.
If there are 12 boys and 10
girls, we can say that 12 is to
10. Other ways to express
such comparison is by writing
them using a colon, 12:10 or
writing them in fraction from,
12/10. Therefore, comparing
the number of boys to the
number of girls can be
expressed as: 12 is to 10,
12:10, or
12
10
. Even if the ratio is
in fractional form, we say
twelve is to ten.
Possible answer.
12:10
Twelve is to ten
12
10
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
Ratio is the spoken language of
arithmetic. It is a way of
comparing two or more
quantities having the same
units – the quantities may be
Possible answer.
separate entities or they may
be different parts of a whole.
We can write ratio of a and b in
three ways:
Word form  a is to b
Colon form  a:b
Fraction form  a/b
The order of which ratio is
expressed is important.
Therefore, the order of the
terms in a ratio must
correspond to the order of the
objects being compared.
Ivy has some yellow and red
beads. (Present this using
blocks)
Yellow Beads:
Read Beads:
Ask: The ratio of the number of
read beads to the number of
yellow beads is ___:___
Two is to five,
2:5
2
5
F. Developing
mastery (Leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
Compare the number of
vowels to consonants and vice
versa in the word
MATHEMATICS, in word,
colon and fraction forms.
Vowels: A, E, and I  3
Consonants: M.T,H, C and S 
5
Ratio of vowels to consonants:
Word form: 3 is to 5
Colon form: 3:5
Fraction form:
3
5
Ratio of consonants to vowels:
Word form: 5 is to 3
Colon form: 5:3
Fraction form:
5
3
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living
There are 10 buses in a station
and each bus has 6 wheels,
what is the ratio of buses to
wheels?
Word form: 10 is to 6
Colon form: 10:6
Fraction form:
10
6
Write your answer in three
ways.
H. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
What is ratio?
What are the three ways of
writing ratio?
Ratio - is a way of comparing two
or more quantities having the
same units – the quantities may
be separate entities or they may
be different parts of a whole.
The three ways of writing ratio
are:
Word form, colon form and
fraction form.
I. Evaluating
Learning
Write a ratio for each of the
following using the three ways
of writing ratio.
1. 4 apples compared to 5
guavas.
2. Eight compared to 28.
3. There are five kites to
seven boys.
4. Four squares
compared to 3 circles.
5. 2 flowers compared to
3 leaves.
Answer for number 1
a) Word form: 4 is to 5
b) Colon form: 4:5
c) Fraction form:
4
5
Answer for number 2
a. Word form: 8 is to 28
b. Colon form: 8:28
c. Fraction form: 8/28
Answer for number 3
a. Word form: 5 is to 7
b. Colon form: 5:7
c. Fraction form: 5/7
Answer for number 4
a. Word form: 4 is to 3
b. Colon form: 4:3
c. Fraction form: 4/3
Answer for number 5
a. Word form: 2 is to 3
b. Colon form: 2:3
c. Fraction form: 2/3
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
1.
2.
3. 4 wins to 2 losses in
basketball
4. 10 decimeters to 10
centimeters
5. 6 weeks to 12 days
Possible answer.
1. 8:6, 8/6, 8 is to 6
2. 10:8, 10/8, 10 is to 8
3. 4:2, 4/2, 4 is to 2
4. 100:10, 100/10, 100 is to 10
5. 42:12, 42/12, 42 is to 12
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of learners
who require
additional activities
for remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work? No.
of learners who
have caught up
with the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require remediation
E. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
F. What difficulties
did I encounter
which my principal
or supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover which
I wish to share with
other teachers?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical
problems and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC Code
Finds how many times one value is as large as another given their
ratio and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-130)
1. Find how many times one value is as large as another given their
ratio and vice versa.
2. Write ratio in simplest form.
II. CONTENT Finding how many times one value is as large as another given their
ratio and vice versa.
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide
Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190
2. Learner’s
Materials Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87
3. Textbook Pages Mathematics for Everyday Use 6 p. 130 - 132
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR) Portal
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 5 - Rational
Numbers: Ratio and Proportion p. 5-9
B. Other Learning
Resources
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 p. 293 - 297
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson.
Teacher conducts a review in
finding the GCF. Let the pupils do
this mentally.
Give the GCF using drill board.
1. 15 and 60
2. 24 and 18
3. 16 and 40
4. 49 and 28
5. 35 and 50
Possible answer.
1. 15
2. 6
3. 4
4. 7
5. 7
School: Grade Level: VI
Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching
Date and
Time: Week 1, Day 2 Quarter: SECOND
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson.
Ask the pupils about their favorite
drink for snacks, like calamansi
juice, tea, etc. Tell them that
Calamansi Juice is good because of
its nutritious value.
Pupils will share what their
favorite drink for snack is.
(Answers may vary.)
C. Presenting
examples/ instances
of the new lesson
Teacher presents this problem
situation.
Mother is preparing Calamansi
Juice:
a) For each glass of Calamansi
Juice, 5 pieces of Calamansi are
needed.
b) If she makes 2 glasses, how many
pieces of calamansi are needed?
c) If she makes 3 glasses, how many
pieces of calamansi are needed?
Analyze the problem by asking the
following questions:
a) What is asked?
b) What are the given facts?
What strategies may be used to
answer the problem?
Possible answer.
a. The number of calamansi
needed in making 2 glasses
of calamansi juice.
b. The number of calamansi
needed in making 3 glasses
of calamansi juice.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new skills
#1
Illustrate the problem using blocks.
a)
Glass:
Calamansi:
b)
Glass:
Calamansi:
c)
Glass:
Calamansi:
E. Discussing new
concepts and
Ask: Possible answer.
practicing new skills
#2
1. How many pieces of Calamansi
are there in a glass of Water in a? In
b? In c?
2. Which of these ratios is expressed
in lowest term/simplest form? Why?
Pupils write the ratios for
question number 1.
a. (
1
5
or 1:5)
b. (
2
10
or 2:10)
c. (
3
15
or 3:15)
2. (1:5)
F. Developing
mastery (Leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
Reduce the following ratios in
lowest term. Choose the letter that
corresponds to the ratio in simplest
form.
E = 3:4 I = 1:2 R = 2:9
T = 15:4 G = 1:6 N = 5:6
S = 1:4
4:8 15:18 30:8 18:24
6:27 15:20 8:32 60:16
7:14 25:30 4:24
What is the hidden word?
____________________________
Possible answer.
I = 1:1
N = 5:6
T = 15:4
E = 3:4
R = 2:9
E = 3:4
S = 1:4
T = 15”4
I = 1:2
N = 5:6
G = 1:6
G. Finding
practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living
Study the table below and answer
the question after it.
Things Quantity Costs
Stamps 10 Php50
Patches 15 Php180
Bookmark 20 Php300
Diary 12 Php300
In simplest form, express the
following ratio of:
a) stamps to patches
b) bookmark to patches
c) diary to patches
d) bookmark to stamps
e) diary and stamps
Possible answer.
a. 10:15 = 2:3
b. 20:15 = 4:3
c. 12:15 = 4:5
d. 20:10 = 2:1
e. 12:10 = 6:5
H. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
The teacher will ask the pupils the
following question:
Can a ratio be expressed in lowest
terms? How?
Possible answer.
Yes. By dividing the ratio by its
common factor.
I. Evaluating
Learning
Reduce these ratios in simplest
form.
1) 10:12
2) 9:15
3) 18:24
4) 21:27
5) 40:50
Possible answer.
1. 5:6
2. 3:5
3. 3:4
4. 7:9
5. 4:5
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Express the given ratio to simplest
or lowest terms.
a. 8 hours to 10 hours
b. 40 minutes to 1 hours
c. 25 centavos to 1 peso
d. 2 dozen to 18 things
e. 18 boys to 16 girls
Possible answer.
a. 8:10 = 4:5
b. 40:60 = 4:6
c. 25:100 = 1:4
d. 24:18 = 4:3
e. 18:16 = 9:8
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of learners
who require
additional activities
for remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work? No. of
learners who have
caught up with the
lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require remediation
E. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
F. What difficulties
did I encounter
which my principal or
supervisor can help
me solve?
G. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover which I
wish to share with
other teachers?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical
problems and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Finds how many times on value is as large as another given their ratio
and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-130)
1. Find how many times one value is as large as another given their
ratio and vice versa.
2. Write ratio in simplest form.
II. CONTENT Writing ratio to lowest term.
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s
Guide Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190
2. Learner’s
Materials Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87
3. Textbook
Pages
Mathematics for Everyday Use 6 p. 130 - 132
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 5 - Rational
Numbers: Ratio and Proportion p. 5-9
B. Other
Learning
Resources
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 p. 293 - 297
IV.
PROCEDURES
Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson
or presenting
the new lesson.
Teacher conducts a review on
reducing fractions to lowest
terms. Let the pupils do this
mentally.
Reduce these fractions to
lowest terms.
8/10, 12/15, 18/30, 3/9, 6/20
Possible answer.
a. 8/10 = 4/5
b. 12/15 = 4/5
c. 18/30 = 3/5
d. 3/9 = 1/3
e. 6/20 = 3/10
School:
Grade
Level: VI
Teacher:
Learning
Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching Date
and Time: Week 1, Day 3 Quarter: SECOND
B. Establishing
a purpose for
the lesson.
Present the picture on the
board:
Ask: What is the ratio of the
number of blue cubes to the
number of red cubes?
Possible answer.
6:12 or 1:2
C. Presenting
examples/
instances of the
new lesson
Let us now place the cubes in
groups of 2.
What is the ratio?
Place the cubes in groups of 3
What is the ratio?
Finally, group them into 6s.
What is the ratio?
Say: 6:12, 3:6, 2:4 and 1:2 are
called Equivalent Ratios. 1:2 is
the ratio in the Simplest Form
Possible answer.
3:6
2:4
1:2
D. Discussing
new concepts
and practicing
new skills #1
Take a look at the ratio 12:8.
How do we write it in simplest
form?
Step 1: Divide 12: 8 by the
common factor 2 to get 6:4
Step 2: Divide 6:4 by the
common factor 2 to get 3:2
12:8
÷ 2 ÷ 2
6:4
÷ 2 ÷ 2
3:2
Possible answer.
Divide 12 and 8 by common factor
which is 4 to get 3:2.
3:2 cannot be divided exactly by a
common factor thus 3:2 is the ratio in
simplest form.
The ratio 3:2 cannot be divided
exactly by a common factor to
get another equivalent ratio.
Thus, 3:2 is the ratio in
Simplest Form
E. Discussing
new concepts
and practicing
new skills #2
Present this example:
There are 9 papayas and 15
pineapples. What is the ratio in
simplest form?
9:15
÷3 ÷3
3:5
The ratio of papaya to
pineapple is 3:5
F. Developing
mastery (Leads
to Formative
Assessment )
A Volleyball Team won 8
games out of 12 games it
played.
a) Write the ratio of wins to
games played.
b) Write the ratio of wins to
losses.
c) Write the ratio of losses to
games played.
Possible answer.
a. 8:12 = 2:3
b. 8:4 = 2:1
c. 4:12 = 1:3
G. Finding
practical
applications of
concepts and
skills in daily
living
In a Grade VI Mathematics
class, there are 27 boys and 21
girls.
a) Write the ratio of boys to
girls.
b) Write the ratio of girls to
boys.
c) Write the ratio of girls to the
whole class.
d) The ratio of boys to the whole
class.
Possible answer.
a. 27:21 = 9:7
b. 21:27 = 7:9
c. 21:48 = 7:16
d. 27:48 = 9:16
H. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
The teacher will ask the pupils
the following question:
How do we express ratio in
simplest form?
Possible answer.
We express ratio in simplest form by
dividing it to its common factor.
I. Evaluating
Learning
Write each of the following
ratios in simplest form:
Possible answer.
1) 12:18
2) 25:10
3) 21:56
4) 20:25
5) 30: 54
1. 2:3
2. 5:2
3. 3:8
4. 4:5
5. 5:9
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Express each rate in lowest
terms.
1. 36:18
2. 48:6
3. 5760:12
4. 468:9
5. 504:14
Possible answer.
1. 2:1
2. 8:1
3. 480:1
4. 52:1
5. 36:1
V. REMARKS
VI.
REFLECTION
A. No. of
learners who
earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the
remedial
lessons work?
No. of learners
who have
caught up with
the lesson
D. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did these
work?
F. What
difficulties did I
encounter which
my principal or
supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems
and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Finds how many times one value is as large as another given their ratio
and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-130)
1. Express ratio in lowest term.
2. Find the rate.
II. CONTENT Expressing ratio in lowest term.
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide
Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190
2. Learner’s
Materials Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87
3. Textbook Pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics 6 p. 293 - 297
B. Other Learning
Resources
Mathematics for Everyday Use 6 p. 130 – 132.
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson.
Ask: What is a ratio?
Give example of ratio.
Possible answer.
Ratio is a comparison of two qualities
which can be written in colon, word or
fraction form.
(answers may vary)
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson.
A motorist traveled 240 km in 3
hours. What is the speed of the
motorist?
Solution:
Possible answer.
School:
Grade
Level: VI
Teacher:
Learning
Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching Date
and Time: Week 1, Day 4 Quarter: SECOND
240 𝑘𝑚
3 ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠
= N
240km
3 hours
The motorist has a constant
speed of 80 km/hour.
What do you call the
comparison of the distance and
the time travelled by the
motorist?
80 km/hr
C. Presenting
examples/
instances of the
new lesson
There are instances when the
terms of the ratio do not have
the same units or
classifications.
For example, 60 kilometers to
an hour of 60 kilometers per
hour. This special ratio is called
rate.
Rate is the comparison of two
quantities but may have
different units of measures and
their ratio has a unit of
measure.
Pupils will listen to the discussion.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
Present this example:
Joshua scored 168 points in 7
basketball games. Express in
lowest terms, the average rate
of the number of points that
Joshua scored in every game.
Rate =
168 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑠
7 𝑔𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑠
=
24 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑠
1 𝑔𝑎𝑚𝑒
= 24 points per game.
Notice that in the above
example, the two terms do not
have the same classification;
that is, points and games. In
this instance, we have to use
rate.
Pupils will listen and participate in the
discussion by solving on their seat the
problem presented.
Possible answer.
24 points per game
= 80 km/hr
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
Joana can type 288 words in 8
minutes. How many words can
she type per minute?
Rate =
288 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑠
8 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠
=
36 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑠
1 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒
= 36 words/minute
Possible answer.
36 words/minute
F. Developing
mastery (Leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
Ask the pupils to find the rate
and express it to lowest term if
possible.
a) If Luisa can type 440 words
in 8 minutes, what is her rate of
typing?
b) If 30 green oranges cost
Php100, at what rate are the
oranges sold?
Possible answer.
55 words per minute
Php10 for 3 oranges
G. Finding
practical
applications of
concepts and
skills in daily
living
Answer the following:
a) A Mitsubishi Montero vehicle
can travel 900 km on 75 liters of
diesel. Write the rate of liters of
diesel used to kilometers
traveled.
b) A machine can produce 156
items in 12 minutes. Write the
rate of the number of items
produced to the number of
minutes.
Possible answer:
a.
900 𝑘𝑚
75 𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑠
= 12km/liters
b.
156 𝑖𝑡𝑒𝑚𝑠
12 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠
=13 items/min
H. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
Teacher will ask:
What is rate?
Possible answer.
Rate is the comparison of two quantities
but may have different units of measures
and their ratio has a unit of measure.
I. Evaluating
Learning
Express each rate in lowest
term.
1. The ratio of 112 persons to
16 tables.
2. the ratio of Php306.00 to 9 m
cloth
3. The ratio of 312 m to 13
seconds
4. The ratio of Php6,480.00 to
12 families.
Possible answer:
1. 7 person/table
2. Php34/m
3. 1,140
4. Php540.00/family
5. 46 students/bus
5. The ratio of 368 students to 8
buses.
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Find the unit rate and express
the answer to lowest term if
possible.
a) 700 kilometers in 5 hours
b) 150 stools in 2 weeks
c) 300 words in 5 minutes
d) Php48 for 8 ball pens
e) Php275 for 2
3
4
𝑘𝑔 of
chicken.
Possible answer.
a. 140km/hr
b. 75 stools/week
c. 60 words/minute
d. Php6/ball pen
e. Php100/kg.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of learners
who require
additional activities
for remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work? No.
of learners who
have caught up
with the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require remediation
E. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
F. What difficulties
did I encounter
which my principal
or supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover which
I wish to share with
other teachers?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and
real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Expresses one value as a fraction of another given ratio and vice versa.
(M6NS-IIa-129)
Finds how many times on value is as large as another given their ratio and
vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-130)
Answer weekly test.
II. CONTENT Expressing one value as a fraction of another given their ratio and vice
versa and finding how many times one value is as large as another given
their ratio and vice versa.
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s
Guide Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190
2. Learner’s
Materials Pages
21st
Century Mathletes p. 82-91
3. Textbook
Pages
21st
Century Mathletes p. 82-91
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics 6 p. 293 - 297
B. Other Learning
Resources
IV.
PROCEDURES
Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson
or presenting the
new lesson.
Have a quick review on writing
ratio in three ways, that is;
Word form, Colon form, fraction
form, writing ratio in lowest term
and expressing ratio in lowest
term
Pupils answer may vary.
School:
Grade
Level: VI
Teacher:
Learning
Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching Date
and Time: Week 1, Day 5 Quarter: SECOND
B. Setting of
Standards.
Ask. What are the things that
you need to do in answering
the test?
Possible answers.
1. Read and follow the directions.
2. Answer silently.
3. Cover your paper.
4. Don’t talk with your seatmates.
5. Don’t cheat.
6. If you’re done, review your answer.
C. Giving of
instruction and
distribution of test
papers.
Read the instruction in
answering the test.
Distribute the test papers.
D. Test Proper Supervise the pupils in
answering the test.
A. Write a ratio for each of the
following in three ways.
1. 4 wins to 2 losses in
basketball
2. 3 months to 8 weeks
3. 24 girls to 18 boys
4. 8 melons to 36 fruits
5. 6 weeks to 12 days
B. Express ratios in lowest
terms.
1. 5:15
b. 21:27
3. 2:14
4. 25:100
5. 60:16
C. Find the rate.
Jay can type 324 words in 9
minutes. How many words can
he type per minute?
Possible answer.
A.
1. 4 is to 2, 4:2, 4/2
2. 3 is to 8, 3:8, 3/8
3. 24 is to 18, 24:18, 24/18
4. 8 is to 36, 8:38, 8/36
5. 6 is to 12, 6:12, 6/12
B.
1. 1:3
2. 7:9
3. 1:7
4. 1:4
5. 15:4
C.
Rate =
324 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑠
9 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠
=
36 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑠
1 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒
= 36 words/minute
E. Checking of
Test paper and
recording of
scores.
The teacher will post the
answer on the board and record
pupils score.
Pupils will check the test papers.
F. Additional
activities for
Solve the following problems. Possible answer.
application or
remediation
1. The ratio of ducks to chicken
in the farm is 3:5. The total
number of chickens and ducks
together is 72. If 6 chickens
have shown symptoms of flu
and had to be removed from the
farm, what is the new ratio of
ducks to chickens?
Solution:
Ducks = 3
Chicken = 5
Total = 72
3:5 = 72
3n+5n = 72
8𝑛
8
=
72
8
N= 9
(Ducks) 9 x 3 = 27
(Chicken) 9 x 5 = 45
So, 45 – 6 = 39
The new ratio of ducks to chicken is
now 9:13.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80%
in the evaluation
B. No. of learners
who require
additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the
remedial lessons
work? No. of
learners who
have caught up
with the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies worked
well? Why did
these work?
F. What
difficulties did I
encounter which
my principal or
supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and
real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Defines and illustrates the meaning of ratio and proportion using concrete
or pictorial models. M6NS-IIb-131
Sets up proportions for groups of objects or numbers and given situations.
M6NS-IIb-132
1. Defines and illustrates the meaning of ratio and proportion using
concrete or pictorial models.
2. Sets up proportions for groups of objects or numbers and given
situations
3. Value carefulness in doing the activities
II. CONTENT Forming ratio and proportion
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide
Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190
2. Learner’s
Materials Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 88 - 91
3. Textbook Pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 88 - 91
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 p. 289 - 293
B. Other Learning
Resources
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
School:
Grade
Level: VI
Teacher:
Learning
Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching Date and
Time: WEEK 2, DAY 1 Quarter: SECOND
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson`.
Give the fractional part of the
shaded portion.
Possible answer.
a. 2/8 or ¼
b. 6/15 or 2/5
c. 1 ¼
d. 5/10 or ½
e. 8/16 or 1/2
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson.
Look around your room.
What are the things you find
inside?
Answers may vary.
C. Presenting
examples/
instances of the
new lesson
1. Let the pupils count the
number of boys and girls.
Guide the pupils to show the
relationship of the number of
boys to the number of girls.
Example: 25/28 25 is the first
term boy, 28 is the second term
girls
Possible answer.
25:28
Ask: Is there another way of
writing it? How?
2. Let the pupils count other
objects/things.
Let them give/write the ration in
2 ways (colon and fraction
form)
Ask: Did you count the
objects/things correctly? Why?
What will you do if you are
given objects to use/
manipulate? How will you
handle them?
Yes. 25/28
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
The teacher will show a
problem.
Ronald bought 3 pencils for 10
pesos at Elen’s School Supply
Store. Ruby bought 6 pencils
for 20 pesos. Give the ration of
the pencils to the amount of
money of each child.
1. What did Ronald and Ruby
buy? How many pencils did
each of them buy? How
much did each of them
pay?
2. What are being compared
in the problem? Write the
ratios in 2 ways
3. How many ratios did you
write?
4. What can you say about
the two ratios? Why?
5. How can we write the two
ratios to show the equality
in two ways?
6. What do you call two equal
ratios?
1. Ronald and Ruby buys pencil. Ronald
buys 3 pencils while Ruby buys 6
pencils. They pay P10.00 and P20.00
pesos each.
2. The number of pencils and its price.
3:10 and 6:20
3. There are two ratios.
4. The two ratios are equal.
5. 3:10::6:20
6. Two equal ratios are called proportion.
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
The ratio of chairs to tables is 8
to 2 or 4 to 1.
Let the pupils write in 2 ways.
Possible answer.
8:2::4:1
8
2
=
4
1
Let them identify the terms,
means and extremes.
F. Developing
mastery (Leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
Let the pupils answer it by pair.
Illustrate and give the ratio of
the following in two different
ways( colon and fraction):
1. 4 squares to 3 circles
2. 2 flowers to 3 leaves
3. 5 crayons to 4 books
4. 2 basketball to 8 tennis
balls
5. 6 apple to 7 guavas
1. 4:3, 4/3
2. 2:3, 2/3
3. 5:4, 5/4
4. 2:8, 2/8
5. 6:7, 6/7
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living
Find the ratio and proportion of
the following.
1. There are 10 busses at gas
station. If each bus has 6
wheels, what is the ratio of
busses to wheels?
2. Every quarter each student
submits 2 projects in EPP.
Give the ratio of projects to
quarters.
3. There are 3 caimito trees
and 4 mango trees in Mang
Tino’s orchard. While in Mr.
Trazona’s orchard, there
are 6 caimito trees and 8
mango trees. Give the ratio
of the mango to caimito
trees in each orchard then
write a proportion.
Possible answer.
1. 10/6, 10:6
2. 2/1, 2:1
3. 4:3, and 8:6
H. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
What is a ratio? Proportion?
What are the ways in writing
ratio/ proportion?
Possible answer.
Ratio is a way of comparing two or more
quantities having the same units.
The three ways in ratio are: word form,
colon and fraction form.
I. Evaluating
Learning
Write the ratio and proportion
for each of the following:
1. 6 apples to 18 children.
2. Eight compared to 28.
3. There are 5 kites to seven
boys.
4. In a t-shirt factory, each box
contains 3 t-shirts. Give the
ratio of boxes to t-shirts.
5. In a camping, each boy
scout was given 4 hotdogs.
If there are 5 boy scouts, 20
Possible answer.
1. 6:18, 6/18
2. 8:28, 8/28
3. 5:7, 5/7
4. 1:3, 1//3
5. 1:4=5:20
hotdogs were cooked. Write
the proportion.
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Form ratio/proportion for the
following using 2 different
ways.
1) 7 to 8
2) 3 to 5 is equivalent to 6 to
15
3) two barangays to 13 348
people
4) one boat to 3 people is
equal to 6 boats to 18 people
5) 45 members of Glee Club to
30 members of Dance Club
Possible answer.
1. 7:8, 7/8
2. 3:5 = 6:15
3. 2 : 13 348
4. 1 :3 = 6:18
5. 45:30
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of learners
who require
additional activities
for remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work? No.
of learners who
have caught up
with the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require remediation
E. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
F. What difficulties
did I encounter
which my principal
or supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover which
I wish to share with
other teachers?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical
problems and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive)
M6NS-IIb-133
4. Find a missing term in a direct proportion.
5. Solve for the missing term in a direct proportion.
II. CONTENT Finding a missing term in a direct proportion.
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide
Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 191
2. Learner’s
Materials Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 88 - 91
3. Textbook Pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 88 - 91
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics 6 p. 301 - 3014
B. Other Learning
Resources
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 – Ateneo de
Manila University, 2010
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson.
What is ratio? Give examples. Answers may vary.
School:
Grade
Level: VI
Teacher:
Learning
Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching Date and
Time: WEEK 2, DAY 2 Quarter: SECOND
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson.
The teacher will show an equation and ask
questions.
1 mango:12 pesos = 4 mangoes: 48 pesos
What have you observed from the given
equation?
Notice that as the number of mangoes
increases, the payment also increases.
Why do you think so?
Answers may vary.
C. Presenting
examples/
instances of the
new lesson
Mr. Cambangay bought 9 different kinds of
bread for Php324.00. At the same price,
how much will she pay for the 15 different
breads?
To solve this problem, write equal ratios.
Let n be the price of 15 different kinds of
bread
9
324
=
15
𝑛
To solve the problem of Mr. Cambangay:
9
324
=
15
𝑛
9 x n = 324 x 15
9n = 4860
9𝑛
9
=
4860
9
n = 540
Therefore, he has to pay Php540.00 for
15 different kinds of bread.
Possible answer.
N = 540
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
When two ratios are equal, a proportion is
formed.
A proportion is a statement of equality
between two ratios. Each part of a
proportion is a term. The first and the last
terms are called extremes while the
second and the third terms are called
means.
In the proportion
9
324
=
15
𝑛
or 9:324= 15: n,
9 and n are the extremes. While 324 and
15 are the means.
Pupils will listen
attentively to the
discussion.
In a proportion, the cross product of equal
ratios are equal.
If
𝑎
𝑏
=
𝑐
𝑑
, then ad = bc.
Thus, the product of the means is equal to
the product of the extremes.
a:b = c:d
If in a given proportion a term is missing, it
can be solved using cross multiplication.
Tell whether the ratios form a proportion.
a.
6
14
,
3
7
6
14
=?
3
7
Write the proportion
6 x 7 =? 14 x 3 Form cross products
42 =/ 42 Multiply.
Answer: The ratios form a proportion.
b. 6:9 = 8:n
6 x n = 9 x 8
6𝑛
6
=
72
6
n = 12
Answer: The ratios form a proportion.
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
The above problems are examples of
direct proportion. In direct proportion, as
one quantity increases, the other quantity
increases at the same rate and vice versa.
F. Developing
mastery (Leads to
Group Activity Possible answer:
Means
Extremes
Formative
Assessment)
The teacher will present a problem on the
board and let the group answer it.
Arlene and her mother also sells hotcakes
on weekends. Mother’s recipe need 3 eggs
to make 5 hotcakes. Arlene wants to make
25 hotcakes. How many eggs will she
need?
1. Let the group illustrate their solution
on the board.
2. Check if the groups wrote the
correct proportions for the
problems.
3. Again, guide the pupils in finding
the missing term or element.
4. Ask questions to elicit the rule for
finding the missing element in a
proportion.
Eggs Cakes
3 5
6 10
9 15
12 20
15 25
Another solution using
proportion.
3 = 5
n 25
3 x 25 = n x 5
75 = 5n
5 5
n = 15
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living
At the school canteen:
a. 3 pieces of pad paper cost 50
cents.
21 pieces of pad paper cost _____.
b. 4 colored pencils cost Php25.00.
12 colored pencils cost ________.
c. 2 boiled bananas cost Php3.50.
10 boiled bananas cost ________.
Possible answer:
a. 3 = 50
21 n
3 x n = 21 x 50
3n = 1050
3 3
n = 350
b. 4 = 25
12 n
4 x n = 12 x 25
4n = 300
4 4
n = 75
c. 2:10::3.50:n
2 x n = 10 x 3.5
2n = 35
2 2
n = 17.5
H. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
What is proportion?
Define direct proportion.
Possible answer.
A proportion is a
statement of equality
between two ratios.
Each part of a
proportion is a term.
The first and the last
terms are called
extremes while the
second and the third
terms are called
means. The product of
the means is equal to
the product of the
extremes.
Direct proportion on
the other hand is a
proportion that as one
quantity increases, the
other quantity increase
at the same rate and
vice versa.
I. Evaluating
Learning
A. Find the missing term and tell whether it
is a direct proportion or not.
1.
2
3
=
4
𝑛
2.
12
15
=
𝑛
5
3.
𝑛
7
=
24
28
4.
28
𝑛
=
2
3
B. Analyze the problem and write a
proportion to solve it.
1. A car travels 72 km on 8 liters of
gasoline. At the same rate, about how far
can it travel on 10 liters of gasoline?
Possible answer.
A.
1. 2 x n = 3 x 4
2n = 12
2 2
n = 6, direct
proportion
2. 12 x 5=15 x n
60 = 15n
15 15
n = 4, direct
proportion
3. n x 28=7 x 24
28n = 168
28 28
n = 6, direct
proportion
4. 28 x 3 = n x 2
84 = 2n
2 2
n = 42, direct
proportion
B.
72
𝑛
=
8
10
72 x 10 = n x 8
720 = 8n
8 8
n = 90
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Solve each proportion.
1.
5
12
=
35
𝑛
2.
39
2
=
𝑛
4
3.
27
𝑛
=
9
5
4.
𝑛
4
=
24
6
5.
3
𝑛
=
24
40
Possible answer.
1. 5 x n=12 x 35
5n = 420
5 5
n = 84
2. 39 x 4 = 2 x n
156 = 2n
2 2
n = 78
3. 27 x 5 = n x 9
135 = 9n
9 9
n = 15
4. n x 6 = 4 x 24
6n = 96
6 6
n = 16
5. 3 x 40=n x 24
120 = 24n
24 24
n = 5
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of learners
who require
additional activities
for remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work? No.
of learners who
have caught up
with the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require remediation
E. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
F. What difficulties
did I encounter
which my principal
or supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover which
I wish to share with
other teachers?
I.
OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems
and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive)
M6NS-IIb-133
1. Find a missing term in an inverse proportion.
2. Solve for the missing term in an inverse proportion.
3. Be generous enough to care for the less fortunate and the
needy.
II. CONTENT Finding a missing term in an inverse proportion.
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s
Guide Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 191
2. Learner’s
Materials
Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 92 - 95
3. Textbook
Pages
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
BEAM LG Grade 6 – Module 11, page 26.
School:
Grade
Level: VI
Teacher:
Learning
Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching Date
and Time: WEEK 2, DAY 3 Quarter: SECOND
B. Other
Learning
Resources
Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 – Ateneo de Manila
University, 2010
IV.
PROCEDURES
Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson
or presenting
the new
lesson`.
Review on direct proportion.
The teacher will show to the pupils the
following problem involving direct
proportion.
1.
𝑛
8
=
9
24
3.
9
4
=
𝑛
16
2.
6
𝑛
=
18
21
4.
5
3
=
25
𝑛
5.
𝑛
8
=
15
24
Possible answer.
1. 3
2. 7
3. 36
4. 15
5. 5
B. Establishing
a purpose for
the lesson.
Ask pupils if they have visited some
places that care for the physically
handicapped, aged or orphans. Discuss
the importance of these places, and the
value of helping our less fortunate
brothers.
Today, we’re going to learn a new type of
proportion; inverse proportion.
Answers may vary.
C. Presenting
examples/
instances of the
new lesson
An orphanage has enough bread to feed
30 orphans for 12 days. If 10 more
orphans are added, how many days will
the same amount of bread last?
Solution:
(Orphans) (Days)
𝑂𝑟𝑖𝑔 𝑛𝑜.
𝑁𝑒𝑤 𝑛𝑜.
=
𝑁𝑒𝑤 𝑛𝑜.
𝑂𝑟𝑖𝑔 𝑛𝑜.
(Orphans) (Days)
Therefore:
30
40
=
𝑛
12
40n = 30 x 12
40n = 360
n =
360
40
n = 9
Possible answer.
N = 9
Therefore, their supply of bread will only
last for 9 days if additional 10 orphans will
be admitted to the orphanage.
D. Discussing
new concepts
and practicing
new skills #1
In inverse proportion, when one quantity
increases, the other quantity decreases,
and vice versa. We can also say that in an
inverse proportion, the quantities change
in opposite directions, that is, as one
quantity increases, the other decreases.
It takes Kevin 20 minutes to ride his
bicycle at 20kph from home to the grocery
store. To shorten his travel time to 16
minutes for the same distance, how fast
should he cycle?
Solution:
Let the desired speed be x kph. Then we
have the following table.
Speed (kph) 20 X
Time (in minutes) 20 16
Hence,
𝑥
20
=
20
16
16 * x = 20 * 20 - Give the cross product
16x = 20*20 - Divide both sides by 16
16𝑥
16
=
400
16
Answer: Kevin should cycle at 25kph.
Notice that the faster the bike is driven,
the less time is required to reach the
destination.
Possible answer.
Kevin should cycle at
25kph.
E. Discussing
new concepts
and practicing
new skills #2
The above problems are examples of
inverse proportion. In an inverse
proportion, one quantity increases as the
other quantity decreases at the same rate
and vice versa.
Speed varies inversely with time of travel
because the faster we go, the shorter time
of travel.
F. Developing
mastery (Leads
to Formative
Assessment)
Group Activity
The teacher will present a problem on the
board and let the group answer it.
If 4 farmers can plow a 3-hectare land in
6 days, how long will 8 farmers do it?
Possible answer.
Solution:
4
8
=
𝑛
6
4 x 6 = 8 x n
24
8
=
8𝑛
8
n = 3
G. Finding
practical
applications of
concepts and
skills in daily
living
Solve the following problem in inverse
proportion.
1. A house contractor has enough money
to pay 8 workers for 15 days. If he adds 4
more workers, for how many days can he
pay them at the same rate?
2. Five people can finish painting a wall in
5 hours. If only 2 people are available,
how many hours do they have to work to
finish the same job?
Possible answer.
1.
8
12
=
𝑛
15
8 x 15 = 12 x n
120 = 12n
12 12
n = 10
2.
5:2::n:5
2 x n = 5 x 5
2n = 25
2 2
n = 12.5 hours
H. Making
generalizations
and
abstractions
about the
lesson
What is an inverse proportion? Possible answer.
An inverse proportion is a
proportion that when one
quantity increases, the
other quantity decreases,
and vice versa. We can also
say that in an inverse
proportion, the quantities
change in opposite
directions, that is, as one
quantity increases, the
other decreases.
I. Evaluating
Learning
A. Find the missing term in the following
inverse proportion.
1.
40𝑘𝑝ℎ
𝑛
=
50 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠
60𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠
Possible answer:
A.
1.
2.
𝑛
90
=
8
20
3.
24
28
=
𝑛
7
4.
12
𝑛
=
6
10
B. Analyze the problem and solve for the
missing term.
1. A house contractor has enough money
to pay 16 workers for 30 days. If he adds
8 more workers, for how many days can
he pay them at the same rate?
40 x 60 =n x 50
2400 = 50n
50 50
n = 48
2.
20 x n = 90 x 8
20n = 720
20 20
n = 36
3.
n x 28 = 7 x 24
28n = 168
28 28
n = 6
4.
12 x 10 = n x 6
120 = 6n
6 6
n = 20
B.
16:24::n:30
16 x 30 = 24 x n
480 = 24n
24 24
n = 20
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Solve for the value of n.
1.
16
𝑛
=
4
3
2.
𝑛
20
=
2
5
3. 15:30 = 12: n 4. n:125 = 3:5
5. n:16 = 5:4
Possible answer:
1. 16 x 3 = n x 4
48 = 4n
4 4
n = 12
2. n x 5 = 20 x 2
5n = 40
5 5
n = 8
3. 15:30::12:n
15 x n = 30 x 12
15n = 360
15 15
n = 24
4. n:125 = 3:5
n x 5 = 125 x 3
5n = 375
5 5
n = 75
5. n:16 = 5:4
n x 4 = 16 x 5
4n = 80
4 4
n = 20
V. REMARKS
VI.
REFLECTION
A. No. of
learners who
earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the
remedial
lessons work?
No. of learners
who have
caught up with
the lesson
D. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did these
work?
F. What
difficulties did I
encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish to
share with
other teachers?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical
problems and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive)
M6NS-IIb-133
1. Find a missing term in a partitive proportion.
2. Solve for the missing term in a partitive proportion.
3. Accept things given with an open heart.
II. CONTENT Finding a missing term in a partitive division.
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide
Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 191
2. Learner’s
Materials Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 92 - 95
3. Textbook Pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 92 - 95
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
BEAM LG Grade VI Module 11
B. Other Learning
Resources
https://bit.ly/30yipsn
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson
(5 minutes)
What is a direct proportion?
How would you set up the
proportion?
A direct proportion state as
one quantity increases the
other quantity increases at
the same rate and vice
versa.
School: Grade Level: VI
Teacher: Learning Area: Mathematics
Teaching Date
and Time: Week 2, Day 4 Quarter: 2nd
Quarter
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
(10 minutes)
The teacher will show 21 popsicle
sticks.
Ask: How are we going to divide it in
to 3 groups if the popsicle sticks are
not even?
The teacher will show how and
explain further as they go on to
another examples.
Answers may vary.
C. Presenting
examples/
instances of the
new lesson
(10 minutes)
The teacher will example of partitive
proportion.
A class has 56 students. The ratio of
girls to boys is 4:3. How many are
girls? boys?
What is asked in the problem?
What are the given facts?
What type of proportion is this?
-The number of boys and
girls in a class.
- 56 students
- Students will be
divided in the ratio 4:3
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
PARTITIVE PROPORTION
The word "part" (noun) may be
defined as a division or portion of a
whole. As a verb it means to divide
into parts. The word "partitive" is an
adjective derived of the word "part"
and it means restricted to a part of a
whole.
Partitive Proportion is a proportion
applied to dividing a given quantity
into two or more parts, which shall be
in a given ratio, one to another. The
terms of the given ratio or ratios, may
be called the proportional terms.
In a partitive proportion, a whole is
divided into parts that are
proportional to the given ratio.
Possible answer.
Steps in solving partitive proportions:
• Add together all the given
proportional terms. 4 + 3 = 7
• Multiply the total number of students
by each proportional term. Divide the
product by the sum of the
proportional terms. (56 x 4) ÷ 7 = 32
(56 x 3) ÷ 7 = 24
Therefore, there are 32 girls and 24
boys in a class
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
What number we can multiply to 4
and 5 to get 72?
4:5 = 72
4n + 5n = 72
9n = 72
n = 72 ÷9
n = 8
4(8) + 5(8) = 72
32 + 40 = 72
Try to answer this! (By Pair)
Find the missing terms in the partitive
proportion
1. 5:3 = 56
2. 1:2:3 = 48
3. 3:4 = 3500
1. 5n = 35
3n = 21
2. n = 8
2n = 16
3n = 24
3. 3n = 1500
4n = 2000
F. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living
The teacher will group the pupils and
let them answer the following.
1. Two numbers are in the ratio of
3:4. Their sum is 105. Find the two
numbers.
2. The sum of two numbers is 430. If
the ratio is 4:6, find the smaller
number.
3. The ratio of yellow flowers to white
flowers is 5:6. If there were 88
flowers in all. How many are yellow/
white?
Possible answer.
1. 3n = 45
4n = 60
2. 4n = 172
3. 5n = 40
6n = 48
G. Making
generalizations
What is partitive proportion?
How do we find the missing terms?
What are the steps?
Possible answer.
and abstractions
about the lesson
Partitive Proportion is a
proportion applied to dividing
a given quantity into two or
more parts, which shall be in
a given ratio, one to another.
The terms of the given ratio
or ratios, may be called the
proportional terms
Steps in solving partitive
proportions: • Add together
all the given proportional
terms.
• Multiply the total number of
students by each
proportional term. Divide the
product by the sum of the
proportional terms.
H. Evaluating
Learning
(15 minutes)
Solve and find the missing terms
involving partitive proportion.
1. The ratio of the three sides of a
triangle is 1:2:3. What are the
measurements of each sides if the
perimeter of the triangle is 120 cm?
2. Ronald draws three lines in
different colors, red, yellow and
green. Their lengths are in the ratio of
1:3:5. The yellow line is 18. How long
is the green line? The red line?
3. The total weight of Maria, Juan
and Jose is 112 kg. Their weight are
in the ratio of of 3:1:4. What is
Maria’s weight? How much heavier is
Jose than Juan?
Possible answer.
1. n= 20 2n = 40 3n =
60
2. red = 6 green = 30
3. Maria = 42 kg
Jose = 56 kg
Juan = 14 kg
- 42kg
I. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
1. Ruby, Diana and Jane are
business partners. They agreed to
divide their profits in the ratio of 1:2:3.
How much should each receive if the
total profit is 6000 pesos?
2. Divide a 72m rope into 3 with the
ratio 1:2:5, What is the measure of
each rope?
Possible answer.
1. Ruby = Php1000
Diana = Php2000
Jane = Php3000
2. 9m, 18m, 45m
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of learners
who require
additional activities
for remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work? No.
of learners who
have caught up
with the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
F. What difficulties
did I encounter
which my principal
or supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover which
I wish to share with
other teachers?
I.
OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems
and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies/
Objectives/ LC
Code
Defines and illustrates the meaning of ratio and proportion using
concrete or pictorial models. M6NS-IIb-131
Sets up proportions for groups of objects or numbers and given
situations. M6NS-IIb-132
Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive)
M6NS-IIb-133
II. CONTENT Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive)
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s
Guide Pages
Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 191
2. Learner’s
Materials
Pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6 TX p. 92 - 97
3. Textbook
Pages
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning (LR)
Portal
Lesson Guide in Mathematics 6 p. 3012 - 307
B. Other
Learning
Resources
IV.
PROCEDURES
Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson
or presenting
the new lesson.
Have a quick review on
defining and illustrating the
meaning of ratio and
proportion, setting up
proportions for groups of
objects or numbers and given
situations and finding the
Pupils answer may vary.
School:
Grade
Level: VI
Teacher:
Learning
Area: MATHEMATICS
Teaching Date
and Time: Week 2 Day 5 Quarter: SECOND
missing term in a direct,
inverse and partitive
proportion.
B. Setting of
Standards.
Ask. What are the things that
you need to do in answering
the test?
Possible answers.
1. Read and follow the directions.
2. Answer silently.
3. Cover your paper.
4. Don’t talk with your seatmates.
5. Don’t cheat.
6. If you’re done, review your answer.
C. Giving of
instruction and
distribution of
test papers.
Read the instruction in
answering the test.
Distribute the test papers.
D. Test Proper Supervise the pupils in
answering the test.
A. Find the missing term in a
proportion.
1.
3
𝑛
=
9
15
2.
𝑛
6
=
6
4
3.
5
11
=
35
𝑛
4. 3:x = 6:10
5. 3:4 = 27:x
B. Find the missing term in
the following proportion
(direct, inverse and partitive)
1. The ratio of the areas of 2
squares is 1:4. The area of
smaller square is 36 cm
square. How long is each
side of the bigger square?
2. The ratio of 2 numbers is
3:5. The larger number is 30.
What is the smaller number?
3. The ratio of cats to dogs is
6:5. There are 495 dogs and
cats in a certain barangay.
a. How many cats are there?
b. How many dogs are there?
Possible answer.
A.
1. n = 5
2. n = 9
3. n = 77
4. x = 5
5. x = 36
B.
1. The area of the bigger square is 144
cm square.
2. The smaller number is 18.
3.
a. There are 270 cats
b. There are 225 dogs
4.
a. 72
4. Three numbers are in the
ratio 2:5:7. If their sum is 504,
what are the three numbers?
a. First number
b. Second number
c. Third number
b. 180
c. 252
E. Checking of
Test paper and
recording of
scores.
The teacher will post the
answer on the board and
record pupils score.
Pupils will check the test papers.
F. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
V. REMARKS
VI.
REFLECTION
A. No. of
learners who
earned 80% in
the evaluation
B. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the
remedial
lessons work?
No. of learners
who have
caught up with
the lesson
D. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did these
work?
F. What
difficulties did I
encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish to
share with
other teachers?
School Grade Level SIX
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching
Dates Time Week 3 day 1
Quarter 2nd
QUARTER
1.OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards :
The learners demonstrate understanding of order of operations , ratio and proportion ,
percent, exponent and integers .
M6NS-IIc-134
B. Performance Standards :
The learner is able to apply knowledge
of order of operations , ratio and proportion , percent,
exponent and integers in mathematical problems
and real life situations
C. Learning Competencies / Objectives
 Solve word problems involving direct proportion
 Write proportions correctly
 Practice diligence and industry 134
M6NS – IIc – 134
II. CONTENT : Solving Word Problem Involving Direct Proportion
III. LEARNING RESOURCES
A. References
1. CG in Mathematics 6 pp 190-191
2. Learners Material 21st
Century Mathletes TB
Job Cards, puzzle pieces
3. Additional Materials from Learning Resource portal
Lesson Guide in Mathematics 6 ( ATENEO ) pp284-287
(uploaded at http://lrmds.deped.gov.ph)
B. Other Learning Resources Activity cards, video presentation, slide deck
presentation on direct proportion
IV. PROCEDURES Teachers Activity Pupils Activity
A. Reviewing
previous
lessons
 Conduct a drill on
finding the missing
term in a proportion
 One contestant will
represent each group
 (group contest)
 Prepare set of
flashcards written
with
3: n = 6 :10
3 :4 = 27: N
N:9 = 12;18
 Set a standard
 Answer orally and make
one step forward if first to
answer.
B. Establishing
a purpose
for
the lesson
 Introduce the lesson
and set classroom
rules.
 Motivate the children
by guessing what do
the children doing in
the picture (slide
show)
 Ask: which of the
pictures can you do by
yourself?
 Listen to the teacher
 Watch the video
 Call some pupils to
answer
C. Presenting
Examples/
Instances of
new lessons
Present this problem:
Ben and Roy sell newspapers
on weekends to earn extra
money. For every 3
newspapers that Ben sells, Al
sells 5. If Roy sold 15
newspapers, how many did Al
sell?
Analyze the problem:
a) What is being asked?
b) What are given?
c) Illustrate the problem ?
 Watch the video
D. Discussing
new
concepts
and
Practicing
new
skills # 1
 Illustrate the problem
using blocks
 Explain the illustration
 Set up a proportion
BEN 3 15
ROY 5 N
BEN : ROY = BEN : ROY
3 : 5 = 15 : N
 the teacher will
explain that the
proportion is called a
direct proportion as
the number of
newspaper that Ben
sells increases, the
number of
 Listen to the teacher
newspapers that Roy
sells also increases.
E. Discussing
new
concepts
and
Practicing
new
skills #2
 Present another
problem and let each
group work for the
answer.
 Give directions on
what to do.
 The sign on the store
window says
“magazine for sale,
buy 3 take 2” How
many magazines will I
buy if I want to take 10
magazines for free?
 Check if they were
able to write the
proportion correctly.
 Work in group
 Listen to the teacher
.
 Have them show their
solution on their white
board.
F. Developing
Mastery
Leads to
Formative
Assessment
# 3
 Present another word
problem and let them
work by pair:
 At the school canteen:
a) 3 pcs of pad paper
cost 45 cents, 21
pieces of pad
paper cost
_______
b) 4 colored pencil
costs 25.
c) 12 colored pencils
cost _______
d) 2 boiled bananas
cost 3.50
e) 10 boiled
bananas cost
____
 Let them show their
solution on their tag
board and be check
by the teacher
 Work by pair
 Let them show their
solution
G. Finding
practical
applications of
concepts and skills in
Daily living
 This is for an
individual output. Let
them read and solve
the problem on their
tag board.
 Reporting method.
Each group should
have a representative
to do the reporting of
his /her output
 Read and solve the word
problem given
 Reporting of his/ her
output
 The pupils are encourage
to interact
 A) a motorist travels
275 km in 5 hours.
How far can he travel
in 9 hours at the same
speed?
Proportion _________
Answer
____________
B) Two buses can
transport 130 people.
how many buses are
needed to transport
780?
Proportion ________
Answer ___________
H. Making
generalizations
and
abstractions
about the lesson
 The teacher will ask
the following
questions:
 What are the
steps in
solving
problems
involving
Direct
Proportions?
 What must you
remember
when setting a
direct
Proportion?
Answer the teacher’s question
I. Evaluating
Learning
The teacher will give 5 item
test. Read and solve. Write
your answer on the blank.
1.At the rate of 3 items per
100 how much will 12 items
costs?
Proportion ______
Answer _________
2) A car travels 72 km on 8
liters of gasoline. At the same
rate, about how far can it
travel on 11 liters of gasoline?
Proportion ________
Answer ____________
3) The ratio of duck eggs to
chicken eggs in an egg store
is 2 : 7 . If there are 312 duck
eggs in a store, how many
chicken eggs are there?
Answer the activity in
1
2 sheet of
paper
Proportion ______________
Answer _________________
4 ) The Ratio of men to
women working for a
construction company is 10 :
3 if there are 21 women in
the construction company,
how many men are there ?
Proportion ________
Answer ___________
5 ) The ratio of the Areas of
2 squares is 1 : 4 The area of
the smaller square is 36 𝑐𝑚2
.
How long is each side of the
bigger square?
Proportion _____________
Answer _______________
J. Additional
activities for
applications
and
remediation
 Teacher prepares
another set of activity.
 Write a proportion for
each problem, Then
find the missing term:
1. The ratio of 2
numbers is 3 ; 5 . The
larger number is 30.
What is the smaller
number?
2. There are 3 teachers
to 125 pupils during
the school program.
How many teachers
were there if there are
2500 pupils? The ratio
of male teachers to
female teachers in our
school is 2 :9. If there
are108 female
teachers, how many
teachers are male?
 Answer the activity at
home .
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of
learners who
earned
80% in the
evaluation
B. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
the
remediation
C. Did the
remedial
lessons
work?
No. of
learners who
have
caught up
with the lesson
D. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did this
work?
F. What
difficulties
did I
encounter
which My
principal
or supervisor
can help me
solve?
G. What
innovation or
localized
materials did
I used /
discover
which I wish
to share with
other
Teachers
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Form 4 teams of equal number of members. With
the use of a flash cards, the 4 teams will play the
game, the members will have to write their answers
on the board, the first to write the correct answer will
have a corresponding point for their team
Do: What is Asked for
What is 25% of 30?
Forty is what percent of 200?
18 is 30% of what number?
300 is 20% of what number?
What is 52% of 250?
Actively participates in the
activity
7.5
0.20
60
1500
130
School Grade Level SIX
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching
Dates Time Week 3 day 1
Quarter 2nd
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner is able to demonstrate understanding of solving
word problems on percent of increase and decrease
B. Performance Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge in solving word
problems on percent of increase and decrease
C. Learning Competencies/
Objectives
Write the LC code for each
Solves Percent problems such as percent of
Increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of
discount, sale price, marked-up price) commission, sales
tax, and simple interests.
M6NS-IIe-144
Cognitive: Solve word problems involving finding the
percent of increase/decrease on discounts
Affective: Use Money Wisely
Psychomotor: Write the solutions of word problems on
percent of increase/decrease on discounts
II. CONTENT
Solving Word Problems Involving Increase and
Decrease of Discounts
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics
2. Learner’s Materials pages
3. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes pp. 122-129
4Additional Materials from
Learning Resource
(LR) portal
B. Other Learning
Resources
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
The table shows the population of the two largest
cities in the Philippines. By about what percent did
the population in each city increase from 2000 to
2010? Which city had the greater percent of change
in population?
City 2000 2010
Manila 1 581 082 1 652 171
Quezon 2 173 831 2 761 720
(Guide the pupils to come up with a solution for the
problem.)
Unsatisfactory response
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Bar Graph:
Reads and analysis the bar
graph, takes down notes on
the important data presented
in the graph…
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Form 4 group, with equal number of members, each
group will answer questions on how to find the
percent of increase in the population of Manila and
Quezon City for ten years.
Guide the pupils to
Present the questions:
1. Which City do you think have the highest increase
of population for ten years?
2. What operation are you going to use to solve for
the answer?
3. How are we going to solve for the increase in
population of Manila City? Quezon City?
Actively participates in the
activity
0
500000
1000000
1500000
2000000
2500000
3000000
2000 2010
Manila and Quezon City Population
Manila Quezon City
Explain:
To determine which City had the greater percent of
change in its population, find the increase in
population of each city in percent for us to compare
them.
Guide the pupils to perform the step by step
procedure in solving the problem:
Step 1:
Subtract the total population of Manila City in 2000
from 2010
1 652 171 – 1 581 082 = 71 089
Step 2:
Divide the difference with the total population of
Manila City in year 2000
71 089 ÷ 1 581 082 = 0.045
(Rounded to the nearest thousandths)
Step 3:
Multiply the quotient by 100%
0.045 x 100% = 4.5%
Manila’s percent of increase is about 4.5%
Instruct the pupils to do the same steps in order for
them to solve for the percent of change in population
in Quezon City.
Explain:
A percent of change indicates how much a quantity
increases or decreases with respect to the original
amount. Whenever there is a change (increase or
decrease), it can be expressed as a percent of
increase or of a decrease. If the new amount or
value is greater than the original amount or value,
the percent of change is called percent of
increase. If the new amount or value is less than
the original amount or value, the percent of change
is called percent of decrease.
To find the percent of change, use the following
formula:
Percent of change=
Amount of Increase or decrease
Original Amount
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Present the problem:
At a local bookstore, Jane makes ₱500.00 a week
working part-time. Last week, she received
₱550.00. what was the percent of increase in
Jane’s salary last week?
Ask the group to answer the following questions:
1. what is asked?
2. what are the given facts?
Guide the pupils to find the answer, allow them to
solve for the answer with the help of their
groupmates. Each group will be given time to show
their solution on the blackboard, they will have to
explain their answers in front of the class.
3. what is the percent of change in Jane’s salary?
The percent of change in
Jane’s salary
She earns ₱500.00 per week.
Her salary is raised to ₱550.00
last week
10%
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Complete the table. For percent of change, indicate
whether the change is an increase or a decrease.
Round your answer to the nearest hundredths (if
rounding is needed)
Original
Quantity
New
Quantity
Difference
Percent
of
Change
1. 10 20
2. 25 75
3. 42 24
4. 100 300
5. 89 33
6. 256 500
7. 667 243.25
8. 999 673.50
9. 1,245.50 900
10. 2,456.30 15,000
Pupils actively participates in
the activity. Take turns in
finding the answers on the
presented table
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Solve Each problem:
1. Due to typhoon, the harvest of cabbage in
Baguio this month decreased from 125 tons to 80
tons, what is the percent of decrease?
2. the price of a kilo of galunggong increased from
73.00 to 85.00 per kilo. Find the percent of increase
3. there were 12 pupils in a Grade 6 class who
failed in the first quarterly exam. In the last
quarterly test, only 5 failed. What is the decrease in
failure?
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How do you solve for percent of increase and
decrease?
Use the formula:
Percent of change=
Amount of Increase or decrease
Original Amount
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Analyze and solve the problem:
1 following the raise in cost of health insurance by
Philhealth, 250 out of 3000 employees of a
company dropped their health coverage. What
percent of the employees cancelled in their
insurance?
2. A man invested an amount of money in a fund
that earns 5% interest in a year. After how many
years will his money be doubled?
3. A manager of a bank has an annual salary of
₱430,200.00. He also receives 8% raise in his
annual salary. How much will be his new monthly
salary next year?
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher? ___
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding in
solving word problems involving
increase/decrease on discounts, original price,
rate of discount, sale price, marked up price.
B. Performance Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of in
solving word problems involving
increase/decrease on discounts, original price,
rate of discount, sale price, marked up price
C. Learning Competencies/
Objectives
Write the LC code for each
Solves percent problems such as percent of
increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate
of discount, sale price, marked up price)
commission, sales tax, and simple interests.
M6NS-IIe-144
Cognitive: solve word problems involving finding
the increase/decrease on discounts, original price,
rate of discount, sale price and marked up price
Affective: Use money wisely
Psychomotor: write the solution of word
problems on percent of increase/decrease on
discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale
price and marked up price
II. CONTENT
Solving Word problems involving Percent of
Increase/Decrease in discounts, original price,
rate of discount, sale price and Mark up Price
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
IV.
PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
The pupils of Lundagin Elementary School had an
educational trip. One of the places they visited
was Lukban, Quezon. While the group was going
around the place the attention of some pupils was
caught by the signs in one of the stalls. 15% off,
10% off, and 12% off. Can you tell what the signs
mean?
Unsatisfactory Response
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the problem:
Allow the pupils to read the problem aloud. Then
give them time to read it silently.
Fritz is selling ethnic sandals from his father’s
factory. One day, he decided to rent a stall in a
market to sell his products. A costumer can get a
10% discount for each pair of ethnic sandals if he
buys 3 pairs. Each cost ₱1,000.00, each exclusive
of the 12% VAT (Value Added Tax). For every pair
of sandals that Fritz can sell, he gets 40% of the
profit and the rest will be used for the payment of
other expenses. If he gets his sandals from his
father’s factory at 650.00 each, how much is Fritz’s
total gain amount if he sells 120 ethnic sandals?
How much will be remitted to BIR for the 12% vat?
Reads and analyze the
problem
Unsatisfactory response
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Let the pupils discuss the presented problem
among their groupmates, guide them in finding the
answer.
1. Teacher’s Guide pages
Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp., 332-
336
2. Learner’s Materials pages
3. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes, pp. 130-144
4Additional Materials from
Learning Resource
(LR) portal
B. Other Learning
Resources
Ask:
1. What is asked in the problem?
2. What are the given data?
3. how are you going to solve the problem?
Present the table:
Selling
price
Rate of
discoun
t
Discou
nt
Sale
Price
Total
sales
amount
₱1,000.
00
10% ₱100.0
0
₱900.0
0
₱108,0
00
Allow the pupils to analyze the table presented.
Ask:
1. what is 10% of ₱1,000.00?
2. What is the formula in finding the 10% of
₱1000.00?
3. What is the formula in finding the sale price?
If he gets his sandals from his
father’s factory at 650.00
each, how much is Fritz’s total
gain amount if he sells 120
ethnic sandals? How much will
be remitted to BIR for the 12%
vat?
costumer can get a 10%
discount for each pair of ethnic
sandals if he buys 3 pairs.
Each cost ₱1,000.00, each
exclusive of the 12% VAT
(Value Added Tax). For every
pair of sandals that Fritz can
sell,
Unsatisfactory response
₱100.00
Multiply ₱1000.00 by 10%
Subtract the amount of
discount form the original price
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the problem:
Lyka waited until after summer to buy a dress. She
found one amounting to ₱2,500.00 and selling at a
discount of 40%. How much did she save by
waiting? How much did she pay for the dress?
Ask:
1. what is asked in the problem?
2. what are the given data?
3. How are you going to solve the problem?
Allow the pupils to solve the problem on the board
Present the formulas in solving discount problems:
a. discount (D) = Discount Rate x Original Price
Reads the problem aloud then
read it silently to analyze on
how to solve the problem
How much did Lyka save by
waiting? How much did she
pay for the dress?
₱2,500.00 original price of the
dress and 40% discount
Multiply 2,500 by 40% then
subtract the answer form the
original price
Take down notes on their
notebooks
b. Original Price = Discount
Discount Rate
c. Discount Rate = Discount x 100%
Original Price
d. Sale Price = Original Price – Discount
e. Sale Price = Original Price x (100% - Discount
Price)
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Pair/Share Activity:
Find the missing entries:
Original
Price
Rate of
Discount
Discount Sale Price
₱220.00 10%
₱235.00 ₱47.00
₱930.00 ₱874.20
Original
Price
Rate of
Profit
Profit
Mark up
Price
₱1,050.00 ₱1,470.00
₱6,500.00 25%
₱9,000.00 ₱2,700.00
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
Nancy was offered a house and lot with an original
price of ₱3,500,000.00. the owner of the property
wanted to sell it to raise funds for her daughter’s
education. The data below was the basis for her
decision to buy.
Complete the data on the table to find out how
much discount Nancy will get if the owner of the
offers her 15% discount if he buys the property
Original
Price
Rate of
Discount
Discount
Sale
Price
₱3,500,000 15%
When Nancy reached home, she made a plan to
have a marked-up price attracted to her costumers
as shown below. Complete the table
Original
Price
Rate of
Profit
Profit
Mark up
Price
₱3,500,000 25%
Ask:
1. Who was offered a house and lot?
2. what was the original price of the property?
3. why did the owner of the property want to sell it?
4. how are you going to solve for the discount and
the sale price?
5. how are you going to solve for the profit and the
mark-up price?
Nancy
₱3,500,000.00
To raise funds for her
daughter’s education
Multiply ₱3,500,000.00 by
15% then subtract the product
from the original price to get
the amount of the sale price
Multiply ₱3,500,000.00 by
25% the add the product to the
original price
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How to you solve for percent problems involving
increase/decrease? Discounts? Original price?
Rate of discount? Sale price? Mark up price?
Use the formula
a. discount (D) = Discount
Rate x Original Price
b. Original Price = Discount
Discount
Rate
c. Discount Rate =
Discount x 100%
Original Price
d. Sale Price = Original Price –
Discount
e. Sale Price = Original Price x
(100% - Discount Price)
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Complete the following table:
Selling
Price
Rate of
Discount
Discount Sale Price
₱500.00 20%
₱950.00 35%
25% ₱250.00
12% ₱574.20
₱9,455.00 ₱3,782.00
Original
Price
Mark Up
rate
Mark Up
Price
Selling
Price
300.00 10%
1,055.00 12%
25% ₱275.00
18% ₱1,712.60
11,563.00 ₱1,734.45
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner is able to demonstrate understanding in solving
word problems involving commission.
B. Performance Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge in solving word
problems involving commission.
C. Learning Competencies/
Objectives
Write the LC code for each
Solves Percent problems such as percent of
Increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of discount,
sale price, marked-up price) commission, sales tax, and
simple interests.
M6NS-IIe-144
Cognitive: Solve word problems involving commission, Rate
of Commission, total sales and total Income
Affective: be financially sufficient to meet one’s needs, show
industry
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Drill on finding the rate, base or percentage
Solve the following:
1. 3% of 600 = N
2. 50% of ___ is 45
3. What is 40% of 5?
4. 7% of 400 = N
5. 45 is N% of 50
18
90
2
28
90%
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Ask:
What do you call the amount given to the sales
agent after selling an item of the company aside
from having a basic monthly salary? What does
commission mean?
Commission is the money you receive
in selling something
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
Mr. Baclaya, a real estate agent, receives a 5%
commission on a property he sells. What is his
commission if he sold a lot at ₱1,040,000.00?
Ask:
How are you going to solve for Mr. Baclaya’s
commission?
Unsatisfactory response
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Pair-Share Activity:
Psychomotor: Write the solutions of word problems on
involving commission, Rate of Commission, total sales and
total Income
II. CONTENT Solving Word Problems Involving commission
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics 6, pp 336-339
2. Learner’s Materials pages
3. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes pp. 134-140
4Additional Materials from
Learning Resource
(LR) portal
B. Other Learning
Resources
Present the problem:
Bing, a teacher, is also a sales agent of her friend
who owns an appliance store. She sells appliances
with 5% commission. She asked herself the
following questions:
1. if she sells a stand fan at ₱800.00, how much is
her commission?
2. if she sells 5 stand fans, how much is her total
sales and total income?
3. if she sells a tv set at ₱32,000.00 and receives a
commission of ₱3,200, what is the rate of her
commission?
Ask:
1.How are you going to solve for Bing’s
commission in if she were able to sell a stand fan
for ₱800.00?
2. How are you going to solve for Bing’s total sales
and total income if she were able to sell 5 stand
fans?
3. How are you going to solve for Bing’s rate of
commission if she were able to sell a tv set worth
32,000.00 with a commission of 3,200.00?
Guide the pupils on how to solve the problem.
Discuss:
To answer the question on how much is Bing’s
commission in selling a stand fan at ₱800.00 with
5% commission, use the formula:
Total sale x commission rate
Ask:
1. What is Bing’s total sales in selling a stand fan?
2. what is her commission rate?
3. how are we going to find the amount of
commission?
4. How much is Bing’s commission?
Discuss:
To find Bing’s total sales and total income in selling
5 stand fans use the formula:
Commission ÷ commission rate
Ask:
1. How many stand fans did Bing sold?
2. How are you going to solve for Bing’s total sales?
3. How much is her total sales?
4. How are you going to solve for Bing’s total
income?
Reads the problem aloud and
read it silently for the second
time for them to analyze.
Works in pair, discusses
among themselves how to
solve the problem.
Unsatisfactory response
Unsatisfactory response
Unsatisfactory response
₱800.00
5%
Multiply ₱800.00 by 5%
₱40.00
5
₱800.00 x 5
₱800.00 x 5 = ₱4,000.00
Bing’s commission in selling a
stand fan for ₱800.00 with a
Discuss:
In finding Bing’s commission rate in selling a tv set
for ₱32,000.00 with a ₱3,200.00 commission, use
the formula:
Commission x 100%
Total sales
Ask:
1. How are you going to solve for Bing’s rate of
commission in selling a tv set?
2. What is Bing’s rate of commission in selling the
tv set?
5% is ₱40.00. Since Bing was
able to sell 5 stand fans, she
would have ₱200.00 income
Divide 3,200 by 32,000 then
multiply the quotient by 100%
10%
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Form 5 groups, each group will have to complete the activity
presented below. Give them time to discuss their answers in
front of the class
Present the Problem:
Sixto works as a sales agent in an appliance center with a
basic monthly salary of 12,000.00. he is given 8% commission
on all items he sells above 50,000.00. At the end of the month,
he needs to know how much money he has. He prepares a
table and solves.
Complete the table:
Total sales
Above
50,000
Rate of
commission
Commission
Total
Income
275,000.00 8%
275,000.00 20,250.00
Actively participates in the
activity
Discusses among their group
mates on how to solve for
Sixto’s rate of commission,
commission and total sales
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Complete the table:
Total Sales Rate of
Commission
Commission
₱5,000.00 5%
₱12,500.00 8%
14% ₱2,864.12
15% ₱8,350.50
₱112,545.00 ₱28,136.25
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Solve the Problem:
1. Mr. Gomez sells used cellphones. His
commission for every cellphone sold is 20%. If his
total sale is ₱33,850.00, how much is his total
commission?
Solves the problem among
their groupmates
2. Mrs. Vargas is a car sales agent who earns
5,850.00 monthly plus 4% commission on all her
sales. During a month, she sold a car worth
₱740,000.00. how much is her total earnings?
3. Jim, a sales agent, has an income of
₱30,000.00 and receives a commission of 5% on
all sales above ₱75,000.00. If his basic salary is
₱13,500.00, what is his total sales?
4. Manuel, a sales agent, has a basic salary of
₱18,000.00 and a commission of 20% on all sales
above
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How to you solve for commission? Rate of
commission? Total sales and total income?
Use the formula:
Total sale x commission rate
Commission ÷ commission
rate
Commission x 100%
Total sales
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Complete the Table:
Total Sales
Rate of
Commission
Commission
₱5,000.00 5%
₱12,560.00 8%
14% ₱2,864.12
15% ₱8,350.50
₱112,545.00 ₱28,136.25
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner is able to demonstrate understanding in
solving word problems involving simple interests.
B. Performance Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge in solving word
problems involving simple interests.
C. Learning Competencies/
Objectives
Write the LC code for each
Solves Percent problems such as percent of
Increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of
discount, sale price, marked-up price) commission, sales
tax, and simple interests.
M6NS-IIe-144
Cognitive: Solve word problems involving sales tax and
simple interests.
Affective: be tax conscious, being punctual in paying
one’s tax, be truthful in paying one’s tax
Psychomotor: Write the solutions of word problems on
involving simple interest.
II. CONTENT Solving Word Problems Involving Simple Interests
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics 6, pp 344-347
2. Learner’s Materials pages
3. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes pp. 134-140
4. Additional Materials from
Learning Resource
(LR) portal
B. Other Learning
Resources
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Who has seen a bank book? What can you see in
it? Does it have an interest? What about the
principal?
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
Rhoda has a deposit of ₱5,000.00 in a savings
account for 2 years. If the bank pays a simple
interest at the rate of 6%, how much interest will she
receive?
Ask:
1. Who has a savings account in a bank?
2. How much is he deposit?
3. If you were Rhoda will you open a savings
account in the bank? Why?
How will you solve for the interest Rhoda will
receive?
Rhoda
₱5,000.00
Yes, to save money
Unsatisfactory response
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the problem:
Jaypee opens a savings account in National
Commercial Bank where the money earns 1.5%
interest per year. If he has ₱7,500.00 in his account,
how much interest will the money earn in one year?
Ask:
1. How much money does Jaypee have in his
savings account?
2. How much is the interest offered by the bank?
3. How will you solve for the interest of Jaypee’s
money in one year?
Discuss:
To find the answer for the problem, present the
formula:
Interest = Principal Amount x Rate x Time
(I = P x R x T)
Ask:
1. How much money does Jaypee have in his
savings account?
Reads the problem aloud
and read it silently to analyze
₱7,500.00
1.5%
Unsatisfactory response
₱7,500.00
Say:
₱7, 500.00 is the principal amount, the principal
amount is the money deposited, invested or
borrowed
Ask:
2. How much is the interest offered by the bank?
Say:
1.5% is the rate, rate is the percent added to the
principal amount invested or borrowed, and 1 year
is the length of time the money has been deposited
in the bank.
Present the solution:
I = ₱7,500.00 x 1.5 x 1
I = ₱7,500 x 0.015 x 1
I = ₱112.05
Say:
So Jaypee’s ₱7,500.00 will earn ₱112.50 in one
year
1.5%
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
Coach Bernard borrowed money from his friend at
8% simple interest. If he paid an interest of ₱480.00
after 18 months, how much money did he borrow?
Ask:
1. How much interest did Coach Bernard paid for
the money he borrowed from his friend?
2. How much was the rate of interest?
3. How will you solve for the principal amount?
Discuss:
To solve for the principal amount, use the formula:
Principal amount = Interest ÷ Rate x Time
Ask:
1. How much interest did Coach Bernard paid for
the money he borrowed from his friend?
Say:
₱480.00 is the interest, it is the amount of money
earned/paid for using another’s money over a
period of time
2. How much was the rate of interest?
Present the Solution:
Reads the problem aloud and read it
silently to analyze
₱480.00
8%
Unsatisfactory response
₱480.00
8%
P = ₱480.00 ÷ 8% x 1.5
P = ₱480.00 ÷ 0.12
P = ₱4,000.00
Coach Bernard borrowed ₱4,000.00 from his friend
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group activity:
Give each group strips of paper with a problem,
they have to solve the problems for themselves,
then they will have to present their answers in front
of the class:
1. Nena borrowed ₱75,000.00 from a credit union.
At the end of 2 years she has to pay back 8%
interest. How much is the interest?
2. Ricardo’s father borrows ₱90,000.00 from a
financial institution. At the end of 2 ¾ years he has
to pay an interest rate of 20%. How much will he
pay back the financial institution?
3. Rolando has ₱20,000.00 in his savings account.
If the rate of interest is 4 ½% a year. How much
interest does his money earn? How much money
will he have in all?
4. Yoly paid back the credit union ₱21,000.00. if
she was given 10% interest 4 years ago, how much
did she borrowed?
Actively participates in the activity
Group reporting
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Solve the Problem:
1. Sally deposits ₱22,000.00 in her savings
account. If the bank pays 1.5% interest per year,
how much will she receive at the end of the year?
2. Shuyen wanted to save some money. She
deposited ₱300.00 in a bank which pays 0.5%
interest per annum. After nine months, she needed
the money to buy some gifts. How much will she be
able to get if she widraws all her money from the
bank?
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How do you solve for the simple interest? Rate of
interest and time?
Use the formula
Interest = Principal Amount x
Rate x Time
(I = P x R x T)
Principal amount = Interest
÷ Rate x Time
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Complete the Table:
Principal
Amount
Rate Time
Simple
Interest
₱8,000.00 1% 1 year
₱12,000.00 2% 2 years
₱15,500.00 5% 18 months
₱21,680.00 0.5% 5 years
₱24,742.00 1.25% 9 months
₱4,200.00 4 years ₱252.00
₱6,700.00 6 months ₱73.70
0.25 years ₱120.00
3.5 years ₱15,000.00
₱49,900.00 ₱3,742.50
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
(require pupils to bring a sample of sales invoice
from a store e.g. official receipt from Gaisano)
Ask:
Have you been able to buy goods in a store?
What do you receive after buying goods from a
store aside from your change?
Examine the receipt you are holding. What can you
see?
Is there any amount you paid for tax? How much
did you pay for tax?
Yes
Receipt
The amount paid and the individual
amount of each good bought
Yes (the amount of tax paid depends on
how much
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner is able to demonstrate understanding in solving word
problems involving sales tax.
B. Performance Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge in solving word problems
involving sales tax.
C. Learning Competencies/
Objectives
Write the LC code for each
Solves Percent problems such as percent of Increase/decrease
(discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked-up
price) commission, sales tax, and simple interests.
M6NS-IIe-144
Cognitive: Solve word problems involving sales tax and simple
interests.
Affective: be tax conscious, being punctual in paying one’s tax,
be truthful in paying one’s tax
Psychomotor: Write the solutions of word problems on involving
sales tax
II. CONTENT Solving Word problems involving sales tax
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics 6, pp 336-339
2. Learner’s Materials pages
3. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes pp. 134-140
4. Additional Materials from
Learning Resource
(LR) portal
B. Other Learning
Resources
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the problem:
A group of Grade 6 pupils ate in a fast food
restaurant. If their orders totaled ₱750.00 plus a
12% VAT, how much is the total amount they paid
to the cashier?
Unsatisfactory response
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
Nena intends to buy a car. She thinks of the tax the
government imposes. She made a table showing
the rate of sales tax imposed as shown:
Item
Selling
Price
Rate
of
Sales
Tax
Sales
tax
Total cost
of the
item
Brand
new car
₱2,500,000 6%
Slightly
Used car
₱1,900,000 ₱2,090,00
Second
hand car
4% ₱20,000
Guide the pupils to solve for the missing entry in
the table shown.
Ask:
1. How are you going to solve for the rate of sales
tax and the total cost of the brand-new car?
Discuss:
In finding the sales tax and the total cost of a brand-
new car, use the formula:
Total amount of product x rate of sales tax
Ask:
1. How much is the cost of a brand-new car?
2. What is the rate of sales tax?
Discuss:
To find the sales tax of the brand-new car, multiply
₱2,500,000.00 by 6%, so you get ₱150,000.00.
Ask:
How much is the sales tax?
To find the total cost of the brand-new car, add the
sales tax to the selling price.
₱2,500,000.00 + ₱150,000.00 = ₱2,650,000.00
Ask:
Unsatisfactory response
₱2,500,000.00
6%
₱150,000.00
How much is the total cost of the item?
Ask:
How are you going to solve for the rate of sales tax
and sales tax of a slightly used car?
Discuss:
To find the rate of sales tax and the sales tax use
the formula:
Total cost of the item – Selling price = sales
tax
Sales tax ÷ selling price = rate of sales tax
Ask:
1. how much is the total cost of a slightly used car?
2. how much is the selling price?
3. if we are going to subtract the total cost and the
selling price of the slightly used car? How much is
the sales tax?
4. if we are going to divide the sales tax and the
selling price of the slightly used car, what is the rate
of sales tax?
Ask:
How are you going to solve for the selling price and
total cost of the second hand car?
Discuss:
To find the selling price and the total cost of the
second hand car, use the formula:
Sales tax ÷ rate of sales tax = selling price
Selling price + sales tax = total cost of the item
Ask:
1. How much is the selling price of the second hand
car? If we are going to divide ₱20,000.00 by 4%
what is the answer?
2. how much is the total cost of a second hand car?
₱2,650,000.00
Unsatisfactory response
₱2,090,000.00
₱1,900,000.00
₱190,000.00
0.1 or 10%
Unsatisfactory response
₱500,000.00
₱520,000.00
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Guide the pupils in completing the table, ask them
to follow the steps discussed on how to solve for
the selling price, sales tax, rate of sales tax and the
total cost of the item. Have each group discuss
their answers in front of the class.
Selling
price
Rate of
sales tax
Sales tax Total cost
₱200.00 3%
₱680.00 ₱34.00 ₱795.00
Actively participates in the activity.
Group reporting
₱750.00 ₱795.00
₱2,500.00 8%
6% ₱300.00
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Solve the problem:
1. Mr. Foronda bought a picture frame for ₱510.00
inclusive for 6% tax. How much is the tax? What is
the selling price of the picture frame?
2. A sales tax for an item is ₱420.00 or 6%. How
much is the total cost and the selling price of the
item?
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Solve the problem:
1. A lady’s bag worth ₱1,500.00 has a sales tax of
6%. How much will the buyer pay for the bag?
2. a food item has a sales tax of ₱22.40 or 4%. How
much is the selling price of the item? How much is
the total cost paid by the costumer?
3. The sales tax of an item is ₱125.00. The cost is
₱3,125.00. What is the rate of sales tax? How
much is the selling price?
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How do you solve for the sales tax? Rate of sales
tax? And selling price?
Use the formula:
Total amount of product x rate of sales
tax
Total cost of the item – Selling price =
sales tax
Sales tax ÷ selling price = rate of sales
tax
Sales tax ÷ rate of sales tax = selling
price
Selling price + sales tax = total cost of
the item
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Fill the data to complete the table:
Selling
Price
Rate of
sales
tax
Sales tax Total Costs
₱1,500.00 3% ₱48.00
₱4,500.00 6% ₱4,770.00
₱900.00 4%
₱9,000.00 ₱720.00
₱600.00 ₱10,600.00
₱18,000.00 ₱540.00
₱80,500.00 2%
4% ₱826.80
₱35,000.00 8%
₱45.00 ₱795.00
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
IV.PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
The pupils of Lundagin Elementary School had an
educational trip. One of the places they visited
was Lukban, Quezon. While the group was going
around the place the attention of some pupils was
caught by the signs in one of the stalls. 15% off,
Unsatisfactory Response
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding in
solving word problems involving
increase/decrease on discounts, original price,
rate of discount, sale price, marked up price.
B. Performance Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of in
solving word problems involving
increase/decrease on discounts, original price,
rate of discount, sale price, marked up price
C. Learning Competencies/
Objectives
Write the LC code for each
Solves percent problems such as percent of
increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate
of discount, sale price, marked up price)
commission, sales tax, and simple interests.
M6NS-IIe-144
Cognitive: solve word problems involving finding
the increase/decrease on discounts, original price,
rate of discount, sale price and marked up price
Affective: Use money wisely
Psychomotor: write the solution of word
problems on percent of increase/decrease on
discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale
price and marked up price
II. CONTENT
Solving Word problems involving Percent of
Increase/Decrease in discounts, original price,
rate of discount, sale price and Mark up Price
III. LEARNING RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages
Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp.,
332-336
2. Learner’s Materials pages
3. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes, pp. 130-144
4. Additional Materials from Learning
Resource
(LR) portal
B. Other Learning Resources
10% off, and 12% off. Can you tell what the signs
mean?
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the problem:
Allow the pupils to read the problem aloud. Then
give them time to read it silently.
Fritz is selling ethnic sandals from his father’s
factory. One day, he decided to rent a stall in a
market to sell his products. A costumer can get a
10% discount for each pair of ethnic sandals if he
buys 3 pairs. Each cost ₱1,000.00, each exclusive
of the 12% VAT (Value Added Tax). For every pair
of sandals that Fritz can sell, he gets 40% of the
profit and the rest will be used for the payment of
other expenses. If he gets his sandals from his
father’s factory at 650.00 each, how much is Fritz’s
total gain amount if he sells 120 ethnic sandals?
How much will be remitted to BIR for the 12% vat?
Reads and analyze the
problem
Unsatisfactory response
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Let the pupils discuss the presented problem among their
groupmates, guide them in finding the answer.
Ask:
1. What is asked in the problem?
2. What are the given data?
3. how are you going to solve the problem?
Present the table:
If he gets his sandals from his
father’s factory at 650.00 each,
how much is Fritz’s total gain
amount if he sells 120 ethnic
sandals? How much will be
remitted to BIR for the 12% vat?
costumer can get a 10% discount
for each pair of ethnic sandals if
he buys 3 pairs. Each cost
₱1,000.00, each exclusive of the
12% VAT (Value Added Tax). For
every pair of sandals that Fritz
can sell,
Unsatisfactory response
Selling
price
Rate of
discount
Discount
Sale
Price
Total
sales
amount
₱1,000.00 10% ₱100.00 ₱900.00 ₱108,000
Allow the pupils to analyze the table presented.
Ask:
1. what is 10% of ₱1,000.00?
2. What is the formula in finding the 10% of ₱1000.00?
3. What is the formula in finding the sale price?
₱100.00
Multiply ₱1000.00 by 10%
Subtract the amount of discount
form the original price
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the problem:
Lyka waited until after summer to buy a dress. She
found one amounting to ₱2,500.00 and selling at a
discount of 40%. How much did she save by
waiting? How much did she pay for the dress?
Ask:
1. what is asked in the problem?
2. what are the given data?
3. How are you going to solve the problem?
Allow the pupils to solve the problem on the board
Present the formulas in solving discount problems:
a. discount (D) = Discount Rate x Original Price
b. Original Price = Discount
Discount Rate
c. Discount Rate = Discount x 100%
Original Price
d. Sale Price = Original Price – Discount
e. Sale Price = Original Price x (100% - Discount
Price)
Reads the problem aloud then
read it silently to analyze on
how to solve the problem
How much did Lyka save by
waiting? How much did she
pay for the dress?
₱2,500.00 original price of the
dress and 40% discount
Multiply 2,500 by 40% then
subtract the answer form the
original price
Take down notes on their
notebooks
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Pair/Share Activity:
Find the missing entries:
Original
Price
Rate of
Discount
Discount Sale Price
₱220.00 10%
₱235.00 ₱47.00
₱930.00 ₱874.20
Original
Price
Rate of
Profit
Profit
Mark up
Price
₱1,050.00 ₱1,470.00
₱6,500.00 25%
₱9,000.00 ₱2,700.00
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
Nancy was offered a house and lot with an original
price of ₱3,500,000.00. the owner of the property
wanted to sell it to raise funds for her daughter’s
education. The data below was the basis for her
decision to buy.
Complete the data on the table to find out how
much discount Nancy will get if the owner of the
offers her 15% discount if he buys the property
Original
Price
Rate of
Discount
Discount
Sale
Price
₱3,500,000 15%
When Nancy reached home, she made a plan to
have a marked-up price attracted to her costumers
as shown below. Complete the table
Original
Price
Rate of
Profit
Profit
Mark up
Price
₱3,500,000 25%
Ask:
1. Who was offered a house and lot?
2. what was the original price of the property?
3. why did the owner of the property want to sell it?
4. how are you going to solve for the discount and
the sale price?
5. how are you going to solve for the profit and the
mark-up price?
Nancy
₱3,500,000.00
To raise funds for her
daughter’s education
Multiply ₱3,500,000.00 by
15% then subtract the product
from the original price to get
the amount of the sale price
Multiply ₱3,500,000.00 by
25% the add the product to the
original price
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How to you solve for percent problems involving
increase/decrease? Discounts? Original price?
Rate of discount? Sale price? Mark up price?
Use the formula
a. discount (D) = Discount Rate x
Original Price
b. Original Price = Discount
Discount Rate
c. Discount Rate = Discount x
100%
Original Price
d. Sale Price = Original Price – Discount
e. Sale Price = Original Price x (100% -
Discount Price)
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Complete the following table:
Selling
Price
Rate of
Discount
Discount Sale Price
₱500.00 20%
₱950.00 35%
25% ₱250.00
12% ₱574.20
₱9,455.00 ₱3,782.00
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards:
The learner is able to demonstrate understanding in creating problems involving percentage with
reasonable answers.
B. Performance Standards:
The learner is able to apply knowledge creating problems involving percentage with reasonable
answers.
C. Learning Competencies/Objectives:
Creates problems involving percent with reasonable answers
M6NS-II-e-144
Cognitive: create word problems involving percent with reasonable answers.
Affective: Use Money Wisely
Psychomotor: solve created word problems involving percent with reasonable answers.
II. CONTENT:
Creating Word Problems (with reasonable answers) involving percent
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References:
1. Teacher’s Guide Pages:
Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics
2. Leaner’s Materials Pages:
3. Textbook pages:
21st
Century Mathletes pp. 122-129
4. Materials:
Powerpoint Presentation
Manila Paper
Pentel pen
5. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal:
B. Other Learning Resources
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
What is your plan/ dream in the future? How do
you plan to achieve it?
Ask: Is it important to make plan before doing any
activity?
Ask: Does making a plan contribute in achieving
one’s goal? Why? Why not?
Lead the pupils to appreciate planning ahead of time
in any activity.
Yes
yes
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present this problem to the class:
Ms. Losinio have 40 pupils. She decided to have a
general cleaning of her room. She assigned 25%
to sweep the floor, 20% to wipe the tables and
blackboards, 40% to fix the books in the cabinet
and 15% to arrange the chairs. How many pupils
were assigned to arrange the chairs?
Guide the pupils in solving the problem. Ask:
1. What is asked in the problem?
2. What are given?
3. What is the operation to be used?
4. What is the number sentence?
5. What is the answer? Does it make sense?
How many pupils were assigned to
arrange the chairs?
40 pupils
25% to sweep the floor
20% to wipe the tables
40% to fix the books
15% to arrange the chairs
Multiplication
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Divide the class into 5 groups. The task of the
pupils is to help each other solve the problem.
Give them enough time to perform the task.
After all the groups have finished, ask them to
post their output on the board and let them
discuss their solutions.
Actively participates in the activity
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Divide the class into four groups. Encourage the
groups to create a problem similar to the one
given.
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Create a problem using the given data:
1. 1.5 % interest, ₱4,000.00 money saved
2. a pair of jeans at ₱550.00 with 35% discount
3. 2 books for ₱350.00 each with a sales tax of 6%
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Create a problem using the given data:
1. A second hand bag sold for ₱1,500.00 with a
total cost of ₱1,700.00
2. A house and lot with an original price of
₱1,500,000.00 with a 15% discount.
3. A brand-new car with a ₱200,000.00 discount
and a sale price of ₱2,300,000.00
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How do you create problems involving percentage
with reasonable answers?
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Directions: Create a problem using the given
information.
1. 50 – numbers of pupils in Grade 5 – Jose Rizal
12% - failed in the quarter examination in
Mathematics
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Let the pupils describe the pattern shown.
Let them draw the next picture in the pattern
Ask:
Two
Eight
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of exponent and base
in exponential notations
B. Performance Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of exponent and base in
exponential notations
C. Learning Competencies/
Objectives
Write the LC code for each
Describes the exponent and the base in a number expressed in
exponential notation.
M6NS-IIf-146
Cognitive: Give the meaning of exponent and base
Affective: Appreciate beauty
Be clean and orderly
Psychomotor: Evaluate an expression in solving exponent and
base
II. CONTENT
Identify the exponent and base in a number expressed in
exponential notation
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Mathematics Grade 6, pp. 6
2. Learner’s Materials pages
3. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes, pp. 174-179
4. Additional Materials from
Learning Resource
(LR) portal
B. Other Learning
Resources
How many squares are there in the 2nd
figure?
How may squares are there in the 3rd
figure?
What is the rule in finding the number of squares in
the next figure?
How many squares will be in the fifth figure?
Unsatisfactory response
Unsatisfactory response
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Teacher will write 4 x 4 x 4 on the blackboard
Ask:
1. how many times did we multiply 4 by itself?
2. what is the answer if we multiply 4 3 times by
itself?
The teacher will further discuss that this way of
multiplying number by itself is known as
exponential notation.
The teacher will write the equation on the board
4 x 4 x 4 =43
The teacher will further explain that 4 x 4 x 4 can
be written as 43
where 4 is the base and 3 is the
exponent.
3 times
64
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the problem:
Cindy saved ₱2.00 on Monday, ₱4.00 on Tuesday,
₱8.00 on Wednesday, ₱16.00 on Thursday and so
on. If the pattern continues, how much will she save
on Sunday? How much will her total savings be in
a week?
Ask: what do you observe in the pattern?
Pupils will have to read the problem
aloud, and read it silently for the second
time so that they can analyze the
presented problem
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Further discuss the problem by asking the following
questions:
a. what is asked in the problem?
b. how will you solve for question number 1?
c. how will you solve for question number 2?
Explain: the pattern shows that Cindy was able to
save twice as much as she saved the previous day.
In this case she will be able to save ₱32.00 on
Friday, ₱64.00 on Saturday, therefore Cindy will
save ₱128.00 on Sunday.
Show the pattern on the board:
Monday: 21
= 2
Tuesday: 22
= 4
How much will Cindy save on Sunday
How much will her total savings be in a
week?
Unsatisfactory response
Unsatisfactory response
Pupils will have to take down notes
Wednesday: 23
= 8
Thursday: 24
= 16
Friday: 25
= 32
Saturday: 26
= 64
Sunday: 27
= 128
Explain the pattern on how to get the total money
saved on Friday, Saturday, and Sunday. Ask the
pupils how many times did they have to multiply 2
by itself to get the total amount of money saved by
Cindy. Let them identify the exponent and the base
form the equation presented.
Ask the pupils to add up all Cindy’s savings from
Monday to Sunday,
To get the total amount saved on Friday,
we have to multiply 2 by itself 5 times…
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Pair-share Activity:
Present the Problem:
The side of a small cutout square is 7cm. What is
its area?
Ask:
1.Write an expression about the problem.
2. What is the equation?
3. Can you write 7 x 7 in another way? How?
4.What do you call 7 in 72
? 2 in 72
?
Explain:
The Exponent tells how many times the base is
used as a factor to form a product.
The Base is the factor which is to be multiplied by
itself the number of times indicated in the
exponent to obtain the product.
Present the Table:
Exponential
Expression
Read
Meaning &
Value
42
Four to the
second power,
four squared
4 x 4 = 16
23 Two to the third
power, two cubed
2 x 2 x 2 = 8
74 Seven to the
fourth power
7 x 7 x 7 x 7
= 2401
Pupils will analyze the presented
problem…
Exponential notation
Yes… 7 x 7 can also be written as 72
7 is the base, 2 is the exponent
Pupils will have to take down notes
Explain that the table shows some example of
exponential expression, how to read it and its
value
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
The pupils will have to complete the table by writing
the base, exponent, meaning, value and the
equation of the given exponential expression.
Expres
sion
Bas
e
Expon
ent
Mean
ing
Value Equation
53
34
63
25
105
93
82
Actively participates in the activity
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Board Work:
Select pupils to solve and answer the equations
on the board
A. Rewrite each of the following using exponents.
Determine the numerical value.
1. second power of seven
2. fourth power of 5
3. 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 =
4. 8 x 8 x 8 =
5. 15 x 15 =
Actively participates in the activity
72
54
26
83
152
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
What is an exponent? base?
The exponent tells how many times the
base is taken as a factor.
The base is the bottom part of anything.
It is the number used as the factor.
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
A. Evaluate
1.) 6 x 22
+ 7
2.) 3 x 72
+ 5 x 52
3.) 92
- 72
+ 10
4.) 25
x 52
- 32
x 43
5.) (10 + 2)2
- 102
J. Additional activities for applications or remediations
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Solve the following problems:
1. Jordan is enlarging a photo on his computer
screen. The photo starts at 4 cm wide. Each time
he enlarges the photo, the width is doubled. Jordan
enlarged the photo 4 times. What is the final width
of the photo on his computer screen?
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards:
The learner demonstrates understanding in giving the value of numbers expressed in exponential
notation
B. Performance Standards:
The learner is able to apply knowledge in giving the value of numbers expressed in exponential
notation
C. Learning Competencies/Objectives:
Gives the value of numbers expressed in exponential notation
M6NS-IIf-147
Cognitive: Evaluate an expression involving exponents
Affective: Show love, care, concern for people with terminal illness
Psychomotor: Write numbers in exponent forms/solve for the value of numbers expressed in
exponential notation
II. CONTENT:
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References:
1. Teacher’s Guide Pages:
Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6
2. Leaner’s Materials Pages:
3. Textbook pages
21st
Century Mathematics, pp 174-179
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal:
B. Other Learning Resources
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Game:
Can you find a pair of numbers whose sum is equal
to their product?
Example:
2 + 2 = 2 x 2 = 4
Expected answer:
3 + 1.5 = 3 x 1.5 = 4.5
5 + 1.25 = 5 x 1.25 = 6.25
11 + 1.1 = 11 x 1.1 = 12.1
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Let us see how well you remember your
multiplication table? Pair the pupils to do the
activity.
Actively participates in finding
the product of the given
equations.
Find the products of the following. See if you can
get them all correctly.
1) 121 x 121
2) 89 x 89
3) 50 x 50 x 50
4) 20 x 20 x 20 x 20
5) 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Presents the following equations:
Find the product of each of the following.
1) 100 x 100
2) 35 x 35
3) 9 x 9 x 9
4) 4 x 4 x 4 x 4
5) 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2
Actively participates in finding
the product of the given
equations.
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Asks the pupils to look closely at the numbers
used in each expression. Let the pupils answer
the questions orally
.
A. 100 x 100 Are the factors identical?
What are the factors used?
How many times is the number
used as a factor?
What operation is used
repeatedly?
B. 35 x 35: Are the factors identical?
What are the factors used?
How many times is the number
used as a factor?
Are the operations the same?
What operation is used
repeatedly?
C. 9 x 9 x 9: Use the same questions above
to answer letters C to J.
D. 4 x 4 x 4 x 4:
E. 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2:
F. 121 x 121
G. 89 x 89
H. 50 x 50 x 50
I. 20 x 20 x 20 x 20
J. 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
Yes
100
2 times
Multiplication
Yes
35
2 times
Yes
multiplication
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How many times is the number used as a factor?
Are your answers to each of the three questions the
same from Example A to E?
Since all the answers are the same, then we can
rewrite the five examples as equations.
1) 100 x 100 = 1002
We can write the first expression by using
2) 35 x 35 = 352
3) 9 x 9 x 9 = 93
4) 4 x 4 x 4 x 4 = 44
of
5) 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 = 25
We can write the first expression by using the factor
100 as the base and the exponent (2) which
indicates the number of times the base is used as
a factor.
Are 1002
, 352
, 93
, 44
, and 25
expressions?
What do you observe with these new expressions?
In 1002
, both 100 and 2 are numbers.
How is each one written?
This is known as superscript
Yes, they are expressions
since each one represents a
number.
The number 100 is written in
normal font size, but the
number 2 is written in a smaller
font size and placed above the
right side of 100
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
You sent an email to 3 of your friends, each of your
3 friends sent the email to 3 more friends. And each
of those friends sent it to 3 other friends, and so on.
Complete the table:
Stage
Email sent as
a power
Value of
power
1 31 3
2 32 9
3 ? ?
4 ? ?
5 ? ?
Guide the pupils in completing the table by asking
the following questions:
1. What is asked?
2. What are the given facts?
Actively participates in the
activity
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the problem:
Last Monday, Jenny invited 2 friends to her
birthday party. The next day, Tuesday, each of her
2 friends invited 2 other friends. This pattern
continued until Friday. How many friends were
invited on Friday? How many friends were invited
all in all?
Ask:
1. What is asked?
2. what are the given facts?
3. how are you going to solve the problem?
Guide the pupils in solving the problem.
The total number of friends
invited
Jenny invited 2 friends to her
birthday party. The next day,
Tuesday, each of her 2 friends
invited 2 other friends. This
pattern continued until Friday.
Use multiplication, multiply 2
by itself 5 times
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How do we find the value of numbers in an
exponential notation?
Multiply the base by itself the
number of times indicated by
the exponent
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
A. Complete the following sentences:
1) In 53
, _____ is the base and ______ is the
exponent.
2) 62
is the exponential form of 6 x _____.
3) 144 is the ___ power of 12.
4) 22
means 2 multiplied by _.
5)74
means _____ is multiplied by itself four times.
B. Give the value of the ff:
1)63
=
2)45
=
3)27
=
4)92 =
5)74 =
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards:
The learner demonstrates understanding evaluating expression with two different operations with
or without exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols
B. Performance Standards:
The learner is able to apply knowledge evaluating expression with two different operations with
or without exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols
C. Learning Competencies/Objectives:
Interprets and explains the grouping, exponent, multiplication, division, addition, subtraction
(GEMDAS) rule
M6NS-IIf-148
Cognitive: Evaluate an expression with two different operations with or without exponents and
parenthesis/grouping symbols
Affective: be helpful, clean and orderly
Psychomotor: write the solution in evaluating the expression
II. CONTENT:
Order of Operations Involving Integers
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References:
1. Teacher’s Guide Pages:
Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp.
2. Leaner’s Materials Pages:
3. Textbook pages
21st
Century Mathletes, pp.180-185
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal:
B. Other Learning Resources
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
A. Drill
Evaluating the expression
Mechanics:
Form 4 groups of pupils. The teacher flashes the
cards with expressions.
The groups are given 60 seconds to evaluate the
expression. One member of each group
simultaneously goes to the board and writes the
answer. The teacher checks the answer. The group
with the most number of correct answer wins
Sample item:
a.3×4+1 = b.62+3 =
c. (6+3) + 2 = e. (15 + 3) × 2 =
Actively participates in the
activity
d. (16 ÷ 4) × 3 =
B. Have a review on the divisibility rules. Provide
exercises written on the flash cards.
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
Richard and Robert are both working on the value
of the expression: 2 + 4 x 3 – 6 ÷ 2. However, they
have different answers. Richard and answered 6
while Robert answered 11. Of the two students,
who answered correctly?
Ask:
If we are going to follow the order of operation in
the expression, what do you think is the answer?
Is there any other way to solve for the answer?
Say:
Today we are going to learn about the order of
operations involving integers.
-Unsatisfactory response
-Analyze the problem and tries
to sole for the correct answer.
Unsatisfactory response
Unsatisfactory response
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Ask:
From the expression presented, what operation
comes first?
Second?
What are we going to do in order to solve for the
right answer for the expression?
What number are we going to multiply?
What operation are we going to perform next after
multiplying 4 and 3?
What number are we going to divide?
Are we going to divide 6 and 2? Yes or no?
Explain:
In a series of operations without grouping symbols,
multiplication ang division are performed first from
left to right, followed by addition and subtraction,
whichever comes first from left to right.
Show the solution on the board:
To solve 2 + 4 x 3 – 6 ÷ 2
Multiplication: 2 + (4 x 3) – 6 ÷ 2
Division: 2 + 12 – (6 ÷ 2)
Addition: (2 + 12) – 3
Subtraction: 14 – 3
Answer: 11
Ask: Who got the correct answer?
What do you observed about the order of operation
that we performed in finding the correct answer for
the expression?
Are you familiar with the GEMDAS rule?
Addition
Multiplication
Perform multiplication first
4 and 3
Division
Yes
Shall take down note in their
notebooks
Robert
We use the MDAS rule
Unsatisfactory response
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Divide the class into 6 groups with equal number of
members. Give instructions to the pupils on what
they are going to do to complete the activity
Give the following expression for pupils to read and
analyze. With the use of their paper and pen, they
will have to simplify the different expression, thus
answers the questions corresponding the
expression given. Each group is given time to
discuss their answers in front of the whole class
1. Simplify: 2 + (7 x 3) – 5
What is the grouping symbol in the expression?
How many operations do you have to perform to
get the answer?
What operation are you going to perform first?
How are you able to get the correct answer?
What is the answer?
2. Simplify: 3 x 4 ÷ (7 - 5) – 12 ÷ 4
What is the grouping symbol in the expression?
How many operations do you have to perform to
get the answer?
What operation are you going to perform first?
How are you able to get the correct answer?
What is the answer?
3. Simplify: 7 + [ 2 (12 – 5) + 32] – 18 ÷ 3
What is the grouping symbol in the expression?
How many operations do you have to perform to
get the answer?
What operation are you going to perform first?
How are you able to get the correct answer?
What is the answer?
4. Simplify: 4 + [ -1 (-2 – 1)]
What is the grouping symbol in the expression?
How many operations do you have to perform to
get the answer?
What operation are you going to perform first?
How are you able to get the correct answer?
What is the answer?
5. Simplify: 5 – [4 + 2 x 23
) ÷ 10]
What is the grouping symbol in the expression?
How many operations do you have to perform to
get the answer?
What operation are you going to perform first?
How are you able to get the correct answer?
What is the answer?
6. Simplify: 42 – 4 x 32
+ 2(5 − 2)3
What is the grouping symbol in the expression?
Performs the activity with their group mates,
discusses among themselves what is the
correct answer…
How many operations do you have to perform to
get the answer?
What operation are you going to perform first?
How are you able to get the correct answer?
What is the answer?
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Each group of pupils will be given time to
report/discuss their answers in front of the whole
class. The teacher guides each group. The teacher
helps the pupils on how to simplify the equation. Let
them know what to do in order to arrive for the
correct answer.
Explain about:
How to apply the GEMDAS RULE (grouping
symbols, exponents, multiplication, Division,
addition and subtraction)
group reporting
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Perform the Indicated operations.
1. 2 ( -5) + (-3) (-7)
2. 27 ÷ (-9) – (3) (-2)
3. 16 + (42 – 2 x 3) – 34
4. 42 ÷ 7 x [37 ÷ 3 – 8]
5. 32 + 2 [5 x (24 – 6)] – 48 ÷ 24
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Solve each Problem:
Klein has 42,500.00 in his bank account. Over the
summer period, he made 3 withdrawals of 8,500.00
each and a deposit of 13,250.00 write an order of
operations to represent this situation
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Guide the pupils to give the following
generalizations by asking: What rule would you
follow in order to perform the order of operation?
What does GEMDAS rule mean?
-simplify the operations in grouping
symbols. Start from the innermost
grouping symbol.
-evaluate exponential expressions
-multiply and divide in order they appear
from left to right
Add and subtract in order they appear
from left to right.
Means grouping symbols, exponents,
multiplication, division, addition, and
subtraction.
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Using the following values, a = 5, b = 10, and c =
15, perform the indicated operations
1. (a + b) – 5 (c ÷ a)
2. (b x c) ÷ 10 (a x 2)
3. (a – b) + (b ÷ a)
4. (2ab – 45) ÷ a
5. (2bc -5ab) ÷ ab
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards:
The learner demonstrates understanding in performing two or more different operations on whole
numbers with exponents and grouping symbols
B. Performance Standards:
The learner is able to apply knowledge in performing two or more different operations on whole
numbers with exponents and grouping symbols
C. Learning Competencies/Objectives:
Performs two or more different operations on whole numbers with or without exponents and
grouping symbols
M6NS-IIf-149
Cognitive: Evaluate an expression with two different operations with exponents and
parenthesis/grouping symbols
Affective: be helpful, be honest
Psychomotor: write the solution in evaluating an expression
II. CONTENT:
Performs two or more different operations on whole numbers with Exponents and
grouping symbols
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References:
1. Teacher’s Guide Pages:
Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp. 17-21
2. Leaner’s Materials Pages:
3. Textbook pages
21st
Century Mathletes,
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal:
B. Other Learning Resources
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Game
The teacher flashes flash cards with expressions,
the pupils will have to solve for the problem
1. 3 x 4 + 1 =
2. 62 + 3 =
3. (6 + 3) + 2 =
4. (16 ÷ 4) x 3
5. (15 + 3) x 2 =
Actively participates in the
activity
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Ask:
What do you observe when somebody in your
home is sick? Does he take medicine? Is it liquid or
tablets? How are the tablets kept?
Give him/her medicines
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Present the Problem:
In a drugstore, the pharmacist daughter of the
owner helps her mother account the medicines for
fever. She finds specialized squares holders of
tablets. She recorded 4 groups of 10 layers of 10
tablets on each side of the holders and 6 sets of 10
tablets, is she right in reporting that there are
40,060 tablets? Why?
Group Activity: (divides the class into 5 groups with
equal number of members.
Ask:
a. what is the profession of the daughter of the
drugstore owner?
b. what does the pharmacist do?
c. what does she find in the drugstore?
d. if you were the pharmacist? Will you also have a
systematic arrangement of your medicines? Why?
Reads the problem aloud and
read it silently for the second
time to analyze.
Pharmacist
Tablets/medicines
Yes, to easily find the
medicine
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Let each group use flats and longs to visualize the
problem
Let them answer the questions:
a. what will you find in the problem?
b. what are the given data?
c. what operations to be used?
Lead the groups to think aloud of a numerical
expression about the problem
(4 x 103
) + (6 x 10)
The total number of tablets
4 groups of 10 layers of 10
tablets and 6 sets of 10 tablets
Multiplication and addition
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity:
Present the problem:
Emma helps her mother arrange the items in their
store. Her mother has specialized square tray for
quail eggs. She finds 4 groups of 5 rows with 5 quail
eggs placed in trays and 3 groups with 10 quail
Actively participates in the
activity
eggs. She informs her mother that they have 1030
quail eggs. Is she right? Why?
Ask each group to answer the following questions:
1. Who helps her mother in the store?
2. What does Emma do to help her mother?
3. What facts are given?
4. how are you going to solve for the answer?
5. ask them to evaluate the numerical expression:
(4 x 52
) + (3 x 10)
(4 x 25) + (3 + 10)
100 + 30
130
Have the pupils analyze which operation should be
performed first, second, next to arrive at the answer
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Activity 3: Group Activity
Bing asks her son to do his homework and looks
at his notebook. She finds the following:
Evaluate the expressions:
1) 6 + (2 x 7 + 52
)
2) 3 x (4 x 82) – 8
3) 5 x [24  2 x (10 – 8)2  10]
4) (15 – 6) + (4 – 1) x 23
5) 3 x [3 + 2 x (10 – 32)]
Ask each pair of pupils to answer the questions
below, let each group solve the given equations
on the board, allow them to explain their answers
in front of the class.
1) What are the facts given?
2) Which operation should be done first? second?
third? last? Why?
b) Have each pair of pupils evaluate the
expressions.
Actively participates in the
activity
Group reporting
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Think-Pair-Share Activity:
Pupils are given the freedom to choose their
partners for the activity:
Evaluate the ff. expressions:
a) (114 – 4) x (12 ÷ 4)2 + 3
b) 16 + 82 ÷ (4 + 4)
c) (36 – 6) x (3 x 4)2 + 7
d) 122 x 30 + (890 ÷ 2)
e) 62 x 23 + (400 ÷ 2)
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How do we evaluate an expression with more
than two operations with exponents and
parenthesis/grouping symbols?
Apply the GEMDAS RULE
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
1.Evaluate the following expressions:
a) (9 – 2) + (32 x 21)
b) (18 + 14) ÷ (6 + 2)
c) 36 ÷ 22 + 4 x (4 – 2)
d) (36 – 6) + [(3 x 42) + 7]
e) (72 + 15) x 4 –
f) 4 x (15 – 32) + 16
g) (93 + 7) x 6 + 10
h) 12 x 30 + (890 ÷ 10)
i) [(144 ÷ 12)2 x 3] ÷ 3 x 6
j) (16 + 82) ÷ (4 + 4)
2.Evaluate the expression if: a) R = 2
1.[(6R + R x 8) ÷ 13] – 5 + R
2. S = 3 [(7S – S) x 6] + 6S – S x 5
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards:
The learner demonstrates understanding in performing two or more different operations on whole
numbers without exponents and grouping symbols
B. Performance Standards:
The learner is able to apply knowledge in performing two or more different operations on whole
numbers without exponents and grouping symbols
C. Learning Competencies/Objectives:
Performs two or more different operations on whole numbers with or without exponents and
grouping symbols
M6NS-IIf-149
Cognitive: Evaluate an expression with two different operations without exponents and
parenthesis/grouping symbols
Affective: be helpful, be honest
Psychomotor: write the solution in evaluating an expression
II. CONTENT:
Order of Operations Involving Integers
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References:
1. Teacher’s Guide Pages:
Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp. 13-16
2. Leaner’s Materials Pages:
3. Textbook pages
21st
Century Mathletes,
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal:
B. Other Learning Resources
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Form 4 groups:
The teacher flashes numerical expression in a flash
card
One member of the group simultaneously goes to
the board and writes the answer
The teacher checks the answer
The group with the highest number of correct
answer wins
Actively participates in the
activity
B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Ask the pupils about the occupation of their
parents. Let them tell how they help their parents
earn a living.
C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Activity 1 – Use of Role Play in a Sari-Sari Store
Jethro was helping his mother in their store when a
delivery man delivered 20 dozen of eggs at 42 a
dozen. If the delivery man gave him 160, how
much was his money? Was he right in asking for a
change of 260, if his money was 1,000? Why?
Ask the following questions:
Who helped mother in the store?
Who delivered dozens of eggs?
How many dozens of eggs were delivered to them?
If you were Jethro:
will you help your family earn a living? Why?
will you keep the change given by the delivery
man? Why?
Have each pair of pupils act it out using play money
and ask them to answer the following:
What are the given data?
What are the operations to be used?
Jethro
Delivery man
20 dozens
Yes,
No, it’s not good to tell lies
Pupils actively participates in
the role play
D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Lead each pair of pupils to think of an expression
related to the problem.
Let them evaluate the expression they have
formulated.
160 + (20 x P42)
160 + P840
1,000 money of Jethro
Require them to analyze the operations they used
in arriving at the exact change
Actively participates in the
activity
E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity– Learning Stations
Have 3 learning stations. Let the pupils do the
activity in each learning station by group. Once
they have finished an activity, they need to go to
the next station and do the activity indicated there.
Pupils need to do the activity as fast as they can.
Present the Problem first:
Pupils actively participates in
the group activity
Tita was absent for a week because she was sick.
When she went to school, she had to take a test.
Few of the items given are shown below.
Ask each group of pupils to answer the following
questions:
What facts are given?
What operations are in each problem? Which
operations come first? Which operation will you
do first?
Guide each pair of pupils to evaluate the
expressions
F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3)
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group Activity: Evaluate the expression.
a) 8 + 4  2
b) 5 x 8  4
c) 65 – 91  7
d) 72  3 x 8
e) 67 + 33  25
Evaluates the expression
using paper and pen
G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Group activity:
Write an expression about the problems. Then
evaluate the expression.
1)In a certain eatery, there are 5 glass racks
having 24 glasses and 8 left over. The answer
says there are 130 glasses in all. Is it right?
Why?
2)Use numbers less than 7 once to make the
expression right.
Actively participates in the
activity
H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
How do we evaluate an expression with two
different operations without exponents and
parenthesis/grouping symbols?
Answers:
Evaluate exponential
expressions
Learning Station 1:
Evaluate:
a) 2 x 3 + 4
b) 7 x 9 – 3
Learning Station 2:
Evaluate:
c) 18 – 12  2
d) 35 – 6 x 3
Learning Station 2:
Evaluate:
e) 3 x 2 + 4
f) 48  12 + 8
Follow the MDAS Rule
I. Evaluating Learning
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Evaluate the following expressions.
1) 4 x 3 + 8
2) 84 ÷ 3 x 4
3) 76 – 8 + 5
4) 53 + 7 – 20
5) 3 x 5 ÷ 25
J. Additional activities for applications or remediations
Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
Assignment:
Write an expression for the problem then, evaluate:
Tickets for children in the carnival cost ₱150.00. A
teacher of a class of 48 pupils gets for the whole
class but only 43 bought tickets. Is it right for the
teacher to say that she ha ₱6,350.00 for the tickets
of the children? Why?
V. Remarks:
VI. Reflection:
A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____
B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___
C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___
D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___
E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___
G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve?
H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other
teacher?
DETAILED LESSON PLAN
School Grade level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time Week 7 Day 1 & 2
Quarter SECOND
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
 Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integer.
B. Performance Standards
 Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in
mathematical problems and real-life situations.
C. Learning Competencies: Identifies real-life situations that make use
of integers. (M6NS-IIg-150)
Objectives:
Cognitive:
 Identifies real-life situations that make use of integers.
Psychomotor:
 Write an integer to represent each real life situation.
Affective:
 Show teamwork within a group
II. CONTENT: Identifying real-life situations that make use
of integers.
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-356
21st
Century Mathletes: p 47-59
2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
3. Textbook pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none
B. Other Learning Resources:
 Activity cards, pictures, room thermometer, Video
presentation about integer.
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uopjGTZdj64) &
Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint)
IV. PROCEDURES
Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s
Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
 Call pupils
 do the following actions
walking forward,
 and
volunteers do
presenting the new
lesson
sit down, laugh,
shake head
the opposite
actions
 walking
backward,
stand up, cry,
nod
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Introduce the lesson & set classroom
rules
 present a picture of a child & a ladder/
stairs
 show to the class the movement of going
up and down of the child in the picture
 let the learners describe how many steps
did the child make both in going down and
up.
 Listen to the
teacher
 Listen to the
teacher
 Answers how
many steps
did a child
make in going
up and down.
C. Presenting
examples/instances
of the new lesson.
 Have the learners watch a video about
integers that represent a situation.
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uopjGTZdj64
 Present a number line.
 Describe a number line…
-Tell what is in the number line,
- the numbers in the number line are called
integers.
- define integers
- that a number line has two sides to the
right is the positive integers and to its left are
the negative integers.
 Go back to the picture of a child
 Discuss to the class that if the child made two
steps up that is +2 but if the child goes three
steps down that is -3.
 Watch the
video
 Listen to the
teacher
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new skills
#1
 Present another picture to the class of two
Room Thermometer and read the
temperature reflected on the thermometers.
 Compare the readings of the two
thermometers if the temperature reading is 35
degrees above zero we say its +35 and if it is
35 degrees below zero it can be read as -35.
 Listen to the
teacher
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new skills
#2
 Present the following situations to the class
a. gain of 5 points
b. 8 steps backward
c. a loss of 100 pesos
 Answers the
situation
given.
F. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
 Group the learners into 4 groups
 Present an activity
 Write the Integer represented by each
situation.
a. The temperature is 18℃ below 0.
b. The altitude is 75 m below sea level.
c. The corals are 15 m below sea level.
d. He has a weight loss of 5 kg.
e. She spent 375.00 pesos for a dress.
 Group
themselves
into 4 groups
 Answers the
activity given
in groups
using tag/
show me
boards.
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills in
daily living.
- Teacher will present a problem. Let the pupils
solve the problem.
-Yren Walked 7 steps forward, 5 steps backward,
10 steps forward, and 6 steps backward. How
many steps is Yren from where he started?
- Solve the
problem given
H. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
- Teacher will ask the following questions.
What are Integers?
What are its uses?
 Answers the
teachers
question.
I. Evaluating learning  Teacher present a situation.
 Write an Integer from the following situations.
1. loss of 15 kilograms
2. 10 degrees below zero
3. overtime pay of 85.00 pesos
4. 8 hours ago
5. 10 km north
6. gain of 345.00 pesos
7. 230 m below sea level
8. going 4 km downstream
9. 12 years from now
10. spending 50 pesos.
 Answer the
activity
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
 Teacher prepares another set of activity.
 Write an Integer from the following situations.
 1. Water freezes at temperature 0 degrees
centigrade. The temperature was at 20℃
above zero during the day.
 Answer the
activity at
home.
Day 2
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Teacher will prepare some words and class
gives the antonym
Love, good, patience, stubborn
 Teacher will relate the words to the lesson
and use the number line to illustrate.
 Present a number line on the board.
 Have a little review about the negative and
the positive integers.
 Give the
antonym of
the words.
C. Presenting
examples/instances
of the new lesson.
 Teacher prepares a situation card cards
before the lesson.
Let the pupils locate the numbers on the
number line. And give the integers.
a. 5 units to the left
b. 50 meters below the ground
c. 60 degrees above zero.
d. lost 30 points
e. 10 floors up
f. 15 % dropped
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new skills
#1
 Teacher discuss to the class the following
words below, above, gained, increased,
decreased, dropped & spent. Relate the
following words to the Number line.
 Example:
230 ft. below sea level,
50 m above the ground
Climb 5 steps up.
 Listen to the
teacher.
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new skills
#2
 Present another set of activity.
 Write the Integer represented by each
situation.
1. deposited 15,000.00 pesos
2. 47° above 0
3. gained 15 points
4. grades are increased to 15%
5. enrolment decreased to 115
6. the temperature dropped to 25° C
7. She spent 100.00 pesos from her money.
 Answer the
activity.
F. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
 Group the class into 3
 Present a situation to the class and each
group will illustrate by drawing, role playing or
acting out.
1. Mang Pepe bought a pair of Polo Shirt
worth 600.00
2. The temperature dropped to 38° C.
3. The highest elevation of the country is
8077 ft.
4. 12 ft. below the ground
5. Yhra makes 5 steps up and 2 steps down
 Perform the
activity
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills in
daily living.
 Prepares an activity (can be grouped or not)
Write an integer described in the situation.
You watched a rocket launching on TV. The
announcer said:
a. blast off 4 seconds
b. 4 seconds after blast off
c. 3 seconds before blast off
 Answer the
activity.
H. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
 How do we represent real life situations?
 Possible answer by using integers
I. Evaluating learning  Write an integer described in the situation.
1. 600 m above the ground
2. lost 15 points
3. gained 30.00 pesos
4. spent 150.00 pesos
5. 150 ft below the ground
6. his grade decreased to 80%
7. 60° above 0
8. dropped to 150
9. 12 steps forward
10. 15 floors up
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Use a number line to identify the points describe.
1. 6 units to the right
2. 12 units to the left
3. 16 units to -5
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned
80% on the
formative
assessment
B. No. of learners
who require
additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the
remedial
lessons work?
No. of learners
who have
caught up with
the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did these
work?
F. What difficulties
did I encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?
DETAILED LESSON PLAN
School Grade level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time Week 7 Day 3
Quarter SECOND
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
 Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integer.
B. Performance Standards
 Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent,
exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life
situations.
C. Learning Competencies: Describes the set of
integers. (M6NS-IIg-151)
Objectives:
Cognitive:
 Describes the set of integers. (M6NS-IIg-151)
Psychomotor:
 Write an integer from the given number line
Affective:
 Show teamwork within a group
II. CONTENT: Describing the set of integers.
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-356
21st
Century Mathletes: p 47-59
2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
3. Textbook pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none
B. Other Learning Resources:
 Activity cards, pictures, Number Line, & video
presentation
Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5oHJcmYbHvA)
IV. PROCEDURES
Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
 Present a puzzle to the class and
group the pupils into 4-5 let the pupils
assemble the puzzle
 Assemble the puzzle
 Listen to the teacher
presenting the new
lesson
 Teacher gives awards to the group
who first assemble the puzzle.
 present another number line
 ask the following questions
1. where they can locate the positive
and negative numbers on the number
line.
2. what are the examples of a negative
and positive integers?
 Learner will answer
the questions
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Introduce the lesson to the learners
 Set classroom rules
 Present a video about how to describe
an integer.
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5oH
JcmYbHvA)
 Have a little review on the video
presentation.
 Ask some questions about the video
 Listen to the teacher
 Watch the video
 Answer the questions
C. Presenting
examples/instance
s of the new
lesson.
 Present a picture of Mayon Volcano
(http://tiny.cc/rqiz6y)
 Ask the learners what is in the picture.
 Let the learner describe the picture
 Teacher then describe the picture
- Mayon Volcano is 2077 feet above
sea level3
- To write 2077 ft. above sea level as
+2007
 Answer the questions
 Describe the picture.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
 Present another problem to the class
(https://www.vigattintourism.com/touris
m/articles/TOP-10-Highest-Mountains-
in-the-Philippines)
Situation: The highest elevation in the
Philippines is Mount Apo between
Davao & Cotabato, is the tallest
mountain in the Philippines, having an
elevation of 2,956 meters. The lowest
elevation Galathea Depth 10,540
metres below sea level.
 Listen to the teacher
 above uses the notion of opposites:
Above sea level is the opposite of below
sea level. Here are some more examples
of opposites:
top, bottom | increase, decrease | forward,
backward | positive, negative.
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
 Teacher prepares another set of group
activity or a set of situation this allow
the pupils to find a stair case, prepare
realia like money. Let them present
their activity by group.
 Have them prepare also a number line
basis for their answer.
 Group 1
a. +5 c. 6 d. 15 e. 25
b. -2 f. -8 g. -10 h. -18
Group 2 (uses real objects describes
integers using increase and decrease)
a. +50 stones b. -15 stones c. +18
sticks d. -12 sticks e. +16 papers f. -8
papers.
Group 3 (Uses meter stick or steel
tape; describes integers using top and
bottom)
a. +160cm b. -20cm c. +5 cm
d. -25cm e. 3cm f. -50 cm
 Group themselves into
4 groups
 Answers the activity
given in groups.
(steps forward)
(steps backward)
F. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
 Prepares pupil activity
 Let each pupil’s answer the following
by describing the integers.
1. +200 m 2. – 500.00 pesos 3. +10
4. -6 5. -100cm
 Answers the activity.
G. Finding
practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living.
 Prepares a problem
Lillia bought 4 pairs of black jeans at
320.00 each. How much money did she
pay the clerk?
- Solve the problem given
H. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
 Ask some questions
 How do we describe the integers?
We can use the following words to
describe integers top, bottom | increase,
decrease | forward, backward | positive,
negative.
 Answers the teachers
question.
I. Evaluating
learning
 Prepares an individual activity.
Describe the following integers using
top, bottom | increase,
 Answer the activity
decrease | forward,
backward | positive, negative.
1. 8 2. 12 3. -17 4. 120 5. -23
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
 A tree post was situated 550 feet
below sea level. If it descends 100
feet, what is its new position?
 Answer the activity at
home.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
H. No. of
learners who
earned 80%
on the
formative
assessment
I. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
J. Did the
remedial
lessons
work? No. of
learners who
have caught
up with the
lesson
K. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
L. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did
these work?
M. What
difficulties did
I encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor
can help me
solve?
N. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish
to share with
other
teachers?
DETAILED LESSON PLAN
School Grade level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time Week 7 Day 4
Quarter SECOND
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
 Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integer.
B. Performance Standards
 Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent,
exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life
situations.
C. Learning Competencies: Compares integers with other numbers such as whole
numbers, fractions, and decimals. (M6NS-IIg-151)
Objectives:
Cognitive:
 Compares integers with other numbers such as whole numbers,
fractions, and decimals. (M6NS-IIg-151)
Psychomotor:
 Write <, >, or = in comparing integers
Affective:
 Show teamwork within a group
II. CONTENT: Comparing integers with other numbers such as whole numbers,
fractions, and decimals.
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-358
21st
Century Mathletes: p 47-59
2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
3. Textbook pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none
B. Other Learning Resources:
 Activity cards, pictures, Number Line, & video presentation
Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oq2KoAGrY64)
IV. PROCEDURES
Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
 Present a game named Number Line
Assemble to the class and group the
pupils into 2 groups.
 Assemble the puzzle
 Listen to the teacher
presenting the new
lesson
 Teacher distributes number cards from
0 to 9 and a card with a negative sign,
to each group. One pupil one card.
 Teacher gives awards to the group
who first assemble the numbers
 The group who assembles first wins
the game
 Discuss the value of teamwork
 Learner will answer
the questions
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Introduce the lesson to the learners
 Set classroom rules
 Present a video about how to compare
an integer.
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oq2
KoAGrY64)
 Have a little review on the video
presentation.
 Ask some questions about the video
 Listen to the teacher
 Watch the video
 Answer the questions
C. Presenting
examples/instance
s of the new
lesson.
 Teacher discuss how to compare
integers using the symbols <, >, or =
 Teacher explains using the number line
- Zero is greater than all negative
integers but smaller than all
positive integers.
- All positive integers are greater
than all negative integers; all
negative integers are less than all
positive integers
- When comparing 2 integers with
the same signs, that one that is
farther to the right on the number
line is the greater integer.
Example:
 Listen to the teacher
-4 -8
-8 is greater than - 4 since it is
farther to the right. Use the sign <.
8 -
8
8 is greater than - 8 since it is a
positive number. Use the sign >.
8 >
-8
-4 < -8
13
+13
13 =
+13
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
 Present another individual activity to
the class.
Let the pupils compare integers using
<, >, or =.
a. -4 -8 e. -12 12
b. -10 0 f. -150 -149
c. 8 9
d. -9 -9
 Pupils will answer the
activity
E. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment
 Teacher prepares another set of group
activity. This time prepare a number
cards with the following integers.
 Let each group assign a member to
hold the >, <, or =.
 Let them present their activity by
group.
 The group who got the most correct
numbered of pairs win.
-Group 1
a. +5 & 6 b. 15 & 25. 45
c. -2 & -8 d. -10 & -18
-Group 2
a. +50 & -15 b. +18 & -12 .50
c. +16 & -8 d. -28 & -29
Group 3
a. +160 & -20. 75 c. +5 & -25
d. 3 & -50 e. -1 & 1 1/4
 Group themselves into
4 groups
 Answers the activity
given in groups.
F. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living.
 Prepares a problem
Yren was asked by his teacher to
compare two integers, he chose -5 and
+4. From the two numbers which is
greater and which is lesser?
- Solve the problem given
G. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
 Ask some questions
 How do we compare integers?
We can use the following symbols to
compare integers using the symbols <, >,
or =.
 Answers the teachers
question.
13 and +13 are the same. Use
= sign.
H. Evaluating
learning
 Prepares an individual activity.
Compare the following integers using
the following symbols <, >, or =. And fill
in the box.
1. 25 -25 2. -16 - 16.45
3. -15 -14 4. 9 - 9
5. 150 149 1/2
 Answer the activity
I. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
 Answer page 150 on the 21st
Century
Mathletes.
 Answer the activity at
home.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
O. No. of
learners who
earned 80%
on the
formative
assessment
P. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
Q. Did the
remedial
lessons
work? No. of
learners who
have caught
up with the
lesson
R. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
S. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did
these work?
T. What
difficulties did
I encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor
can help me
solve?
U. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish
to share with
other
teachers?
School Grade level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time Week 8 Day 1
Quarter SECOND
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
 Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integer.
B. Performance Standards
 Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent,
exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life
situations.
C. Learning Competencies: Represents integers on the number line. (M6NS-IIh-153)
Objectives:
Cognitive:
 Represents integers on the number line. (M6NS-IIh-153)
Psychomotor:
 Write integers correctly
Affective:
 Appreciate the use of number line.
II. CONTENT: Representing integers on the number line.
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-358
21st
Century Mathletes: p 47-59
2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
3. Textbook pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none
B. Other Learning Resources:
 Activity cards
(https://www.pinterest.ph/pin/573294227556015390/?lp=true),
Number Line, & video presentation
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o3kIi8g3mwI) or
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vTfqgqkBges)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=A186iWp5vKQ)
Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint)
IV. PROCEDURES
Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s
Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
 Show a number Line to the class  Listen to the teacher
presenting the new
lesson
 Review on the different parts of the
Number Line
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Introduce the lesson to the learners
and your objectives.
 Set classroom rules
 Present a video about the number line
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o3kIi
8g3mwI) or
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vTfq
gqkBges)
 Have a little review on the video
presentation.
 Ask some questions about the video
 Listen to the teacher
 Watch the video
 Answer the questions
C. Presenting
examples/instance
s of the new
lesson.
 Teacher discuss how represent
integers in the number line
 Teacher explains using the number line
- A whole number is any counting
number. Numbers, like 1/2 or .75,
that you use to describe a part of
something are not whole numbers.
- A positive number is a number
greater than zero. It can be written
with or without a + symbol in front
of it. A gain in something is written
with a positive number. Profit,
increase, and income are all
examples of words that mean
positive.
- A negative number is a number
that is less than zero. It is always
written with a - symbol in front of it.
A loss is written with a negative
number. Decrease, spend, and
decline are examples of words that
mean negative.
- An integer is any positive whole
number or its negative. Zero is also
considered an integer.
-
- Give examples
1. 2 units right of 4
 Listen to the teacher
2. 4 units of -2
3. 5 units to the left 0f 1
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
 Present a group activity to the class.
Let the pupils locate the integers using
the Activity card on number line.
1. 3 units to the right of 5
2. 9 units to the right of 0
3. 7 units to the left of -2
4. 6 units to the right of zero
5. 5 units to the left of -5
 Pupils will answer the
activity
E. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment
 Teacher prepares another set of
individual activity. Use the Number line
activity card.
1. 8 to the right of -8.
2. 2 to the right of 7
3. 5 to the left of -5
4. 6 to the left of -2
5. 8 to the right of -10
 Answers the activity
given in groups.
F. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living.
 Prepares a problem
Kris like to take a walk every day. She
started with a 25 steps forward and add
another 15 steps forward and 16 steps
backward. How many steps did she
make in all?
- Solve the problem given
G. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
 Ask some questions
 How do we represent integers?
 Answers the teachers
question.
H. Evaluating
learning
 Prepares an individual activity. Use the
number line activity card.
Represent the following integers using
the number line.
1. 3 units to the right of -1
2. 5 units to the right 1
3. 7 units to the left of 2
4. 12 units to the left of 7
5. 8 units to the right of 2
 Answer the activity
I. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Represent the following integers using
the number line.
1. 10 units to the right -8
2. 6 units to the right of -10
3. 13 units to right of -6
4. 2 units to the right of 0
5. 11 units to the right of 5
 Answer the activity at
home.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
V. No. of
learners who
earned 80%
on the
formative
assessment
W. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
X. Did the
remedial
lessons
work? No. of
learners who
have caught
up with the
lesson
Y. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
Z. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did
these work?
AA.What
difficulties did
I encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor
can help me
solve?
BB.What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish
to share with
other
teachers?
Activity Cards on Number Line.
DETAILED LESSON PLAN
School Grade level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time Week 8 Day 2
Quarter SECOND
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
 Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integer.
B. Performance Standards
 Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent,
exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life
situations.
C. Learning Competencies: Compares and arranges integers. (M6NS-IIh-154)
Objectives:
Cognitive:
 Compares and arranges integers. (M6NS-IIh-154)
Psychomotor:
 Write integers from greatest to least and vice versa
Affective:
 Appreciate the importance of having order in everyday life.
II. CONTENT: Comparing and arranging integers.
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-358
21st
Century Mathletes: p 47-59
2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
3. Textbook pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none
B. Other Learning Resources:
 Activity cards, pictures, Number Line, & video presentation
Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oq2KoAGrY64)
IV. PROCEDURES
Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson
 Present a game named Arrange Me
game to the class an group the pupils
into 2 groups.
 Teacher distributes number cards from
0 to 20 make sure to include also the
 Assemble the puzzle
 Listen to the teacher
 Learner will answer
the questions
negative integers, to each group. One
pupil one card.
 Teacher gives awards to the group
who first assemble the numbers
 The group who assembles first wins
the game
 Discuss the value of teamwork
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Introduce the lesson to the learners
and the objectives/ target for learning
 Set classroom rules
 Present a video about how to compare
an integer.
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oq2
KoAGrY64)
 Have a little review on the video
presentation.
 Ask some questions about the video
 Teacher will review the previous
concepts about comparing numbers
- Zero is greater than all negative
integers but smaller than all
positive integers.
- All positive integers are greater
than all negative integers; all
negative integers are less than all
positive integers
- When comparing 2 integers with
the same signs, that one that is
farther to the right on the number
line is the greater integer.
 Listen to the teacher
 Watch the video
 Answer the questions
C. Presenting
examples/instance
s of the new
lesson.
 Teacher discuss how to arrange the
integers correctly. From greatest to
least and vice versa.
 Listen to the teacher
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
 Present another individual activity to
the class.
Let the pupils arrange the integers from
least to greatest & from greatest to
least.
a. -4, -8, -12 , 12, -10
b. -10, 0, -150, -149, 18
c. 8, 9, 15, -18, 20
 Pupils will answer the
activity
-4
15
-10
-8
-
13
0
6
9
E. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment
 Teacher prepares another set of group
activity. This time prepare a number
cards with the following integers.
 Let each group assign a member to
hold.
-Group 1
+5, 6, 15, 25, 45, -2, -8, -10, -18
-Group 2
+50, -15, +18, -12, 50, 16, -8, 28, -29
Group 3
+160, -20, 75, +5, -25, 3, -50, -1
 Group themselves into
3 groups
 Answers the activity
given in groups.
F. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living.
 Prepares a problem
Rica was asked by his teacher to
arrange the number blocks on the
shelves she was determined to arrange
the numbers from least to greatest. The
numbers on the blocks are 37, -73, 83,
31, 13, -25, -17, -3, -1.
- Solve the problem given
G. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
 Ask some questions
 How do we arrange integers?
- By basing it first on the number
line.
- Zero is greater than all negative
integers but smaller than all
positive integers.
- All positive integers are greater
than all negative integers; all
negative integers are less than all
positive integers
- When comparing 2 integers with
the same signs, that one that is
farther to the right on the number
line is the greater integer.
 Answers the teachers
question.
H. Evaluating
learning
 Prepares an individual activity.
Arrange the following integers from
least to greatest & greatest to least.
- Arrange the following Integers from
least to greatest.
1.) 25, -25, -16, 45, -15
2.) -14 4, 9, - 9, 150
3.) 49, 6, -5, 0, 17
4.) 9 -8 8, -32, -24
5.). 89, 73 17 23
 Answer the activity
- Arrange the integers from greatest
to least
1.) -3, -6, -4, -1, 5, 12, 10, -18, -45, 31
2. -60, 505, 13, -13, 18, 91, 3, -8, 6, -25
I. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
 Answer page 150 letter B on the 21st
Century Mathletes.
 Answer the activity at
home.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
CC. No. of
learners who
earned 80%
on the
formative
assessment
DD. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
EE.Did the
remedial
lessons
work? No. of
learners who
have caught
up with the
lesson
FF.No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
GG. Which of
my teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did
these work?
HH. What
difficulties did
I encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor
can help me
solve?
II. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish
to share with
other
teachers?
School Grade level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time Week 8 Day 3
Quarter SECOND
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
 Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integer.
B. Performance Standards
 Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent,
exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life
situations.
C. Learning Competencies: Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers
using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-155)
Objectives:
Cognitive:
 Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using
materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-
155)
Psychomotor:
 Add integers using algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards.
Affective:
 Appreciate the importance of having order in everyday life.
II. CONTENT: Describing and interprets the basic operations on integers using
materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards.
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 359-360
21st
Century Mathletes: p 47-59
2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
3. Textbook pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none
B. Other Learning Resources:
 Activity cards, algebra tiles counters, chips, and cards., Number
Line, & video presentation
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eS3_xTshl-4)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pU2zPf846L4)
Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint)
IV. PROCEDURES
Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson
 Prepare some activity cards on
addition of numbers and subtraction of
numbers. (http://www.math-
aids.com/Mixed_Problems/)
 Set classroom rules
 Learner will answer
the activity
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Introduce the lesson to the learners
and the objectives/ target for learning
 Set classroom rules
 Present a Present a video about how
to add and subtract an integer.
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pU2
zPf846L4
 Listen to the teacher
 Watch the video
 Answer the questions
C. Presenting
examples/instance
s of the new
lesson.
 Teacher discuss how add integers
using counters
- Discuss to the class on how to get
the sum of the two positive integers
and thus by putting together the
counters with the same colors.
- It produces two negative red tiles.
 Listen to the teacher
1+ 1=
2
-1 - (-1) = -
1
+2 + (+4) = 6
- Discuss to the class the zero pair
- Zero pair is a process which is to
eliminate the tiles with pair so the
answer is 3 since we pair the 2
negative counters with the 2
positive counters.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
 Present another individual activity to
the class.
Let the pupils add and subtract
integers using counters.
a. -8, + -4= b. -12 ,+ 12, =
c. -10, + 0 - d. 19,+ (-18) =
c. 8, + 9, =
 Pupils will answer the
activity
E. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment
 Teacher prepares another set of group
activity. This time prepare a different
chips used as counters.
 Let each group draw a counters or
chips to represent the equation.
-Group 1
1.) +5 + 6 = ; 2.) 25 + (-25,) =
, 3.) -45,- -2= ; 4.) -18, + -10=
-Group 2
1.) +50 + (-15), 2.) +18,+ -12=
3.) 50 + 16= 4.) 38, + 29=
Group 3
1.) +16 + (-20) = 2.) -15, + (+5) =
 Group themselves into
3 groups
 Answers the activity
given in groups.
+5 + (-2) = +3
3. -5,+ (- 3), 4.) -5 + (-1) =
F. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living.
 Prepares a problem
Karen weighs 45 kilograms on April as
she weighs herself 2 weeks after loses
5 kilograms. Compute Karen’s weight
with the use of counters.
- Solve the problem given
G. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
 Ask some questions
 How do we add integers?
- Observe the signs of the addends
and the sum
- If the addend have the same sign,
the numbers are added and the
common sign is affixed at the sum.
- If the addends have different signs,
the signs are first disregarded and
the difference between the number
is obtained.
- The sign of the greater number is
affixed to the answer.
 Answers the teachers
question.
H. Evaluating
learning
 Prepares an individual activity.
Add the following integers by using the
counter chips provided by the teacher.
 Answer the activity
I. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
 Draw a counter chips with the
following integers.
 Answer the activity at
home.
V. REMARKS
(-20) + (+15) =
(-16) + (-1) =
(18) + (-8) =
(11) + (-4) =
(-5) + (-2) =
(35) + (-4) =
(28) + (-12) =
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of
learners
who earned
80% on the
formative
assessment
B. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the
remedial
lessons
work? No. of
learners who
have caught
up with the
lesson
D. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did
these work?
F. What
difficulties did
I encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor
can help me
solve?
G. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish
to share with
other
teachers?
School Grade level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time Week 8 Day 4
Quarter SECOND
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
 Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integer.
B. Performance Standards
 Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent,
exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life
situations.
C. Learning Competencies: Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers
using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-155)
Objectives:
Cognitive:
 Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using
materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-
155)
Psychomotor:
 Subtract integers using algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards.
Affective:
 Appreciate the importance of having order in everyday life.
II. CONTENT: Describing and interprets the basic operations on integers using
materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards.
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 359-360
21st
Century Mathletes: p 47-59
2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
3. Textbook pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none
B. Other Learning Resources:
 Activity cards, algebra tiles counters, chips, and cards., Number
Line, & video presentation
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eS3_xTshl-4)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pU2zPf846L4)
Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint)
IV. PROCEDURES
Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson
 Prepare some activity cards on
addition of integers.
(https://www.mathworksheets4kids.com/
adding-subtracting-integers.php)

( Note: Please see attached copy for
a visible picture)
 Set classroom rules
 Learner will answer
the activity
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Introduce the lesson to the learners
and the objectives/ target for learning
 Set classroom rules
 Present a Present a video about how
to add and subtract an integer.
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pU2
zPf846L4
 Listen to the teacher
 Watch the video
C. Presenting
examples/instance
s of the new
lesson.
 Teacher discuss how add integers
using chips
- Discuss to the class on how to get
the difference of the two positive
integers and thus by taking away 1
chips.
 Listen to the teacher
+4 –(+1)= +3
(-5) - (-2) = -3
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
 Present another individual activity to
the class.
Let the pupils subtract integers using
counters.
a. ( -50,) - ( -14) = b. (-12) ,- (-12)=
c. (-19), - (-8) = d. (-11) - (-18) =
 Pupils will answer the
activity
E. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment
 Teacher prepares another set of group
activity. This time prepare a different
chips used as counters.
( Note: Please see attached copy)
 Group themselves into
3 groups
 Answers the activity
given in groups.
F. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living.
 Prepares a problem
Rivera family bought 15 kilograms of
fish. They give away 8 kilograms of fish
to their neighbor. How many kilograms
of fish left for the family? Show your
answer by drawing chips.
- Solve the problem given
G. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
 Ask some questions
 How do we subtract integers?
-
 Answers the teachers
question.
H. Evaluating
learning
 Subtract the integers using chips as
representation.
( Note: Please see attached copy)
 Answer the activity
I. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
 Draw a counter chips with the
following integers.
 Answer the activity at
home.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
H. No. of
learners who
earned 80%
on the
formative
assessment
I. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
J. Did the
remedial
lessons
work? No. of
learners who
have caught
up with the
lesson
K. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
L. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did
these work?
M. What
difficulties did
I encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor
can help me
solve?
N. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish
to share with
other
teachers?
Activity Cards on Reviewing previous lessons.
Activity Card on Subtracting Integers
Activity Sheet for Evaluating Learning Outcome
Activity Card 2
References:
Subtracting Integers Activity 1
https://www.google.com/search?tbm=isch&sa=1&ei=aUjmXOrXJIX2hwOo4pgCw
&q=subtraction+of+intergers+worksheet&oq=subtraction+of+intergers+workshee
t&gs_l=img.12...4401232.4410410..4412673...12.0..0.246.4757.0j6j17......1....1..
gws-wiz-img.JEcfFLeYSqQ#imgrc=wU3HxnPpLtxavM:
Subtracting Integers Activity 2
(https://www.google.com/search?tbm=isch&sa=1&ei=aUjmXOrXJIX2hwOo4pgC
w&q=subtraction+of+intergers+worksheet&oq=subtraction+of+intergers+workshe
et&gs_l=img.12...4401232.4410410..4412673...12.0..0.246.4757.0j6j17......1....1.
.gws-wiz-img.JEcfFLeYSqQ#imgrc=H8TFjo-W5Q-x0M:)
School Grade level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time Week 8 Day 5
Quarter SECOND
QUARTER
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
 Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integer.
B. Performance Standards
 Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent,
exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life
situations.
C. Learning Competencies: Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers
using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-155)
Objectives:
Cognitive:
 Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using
materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-
155)
Psychomotor:
 Multiply integers using algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards.
Affective:
 Appreciate the importance of having order in everyday life.
II. CONTENT: Describing and interprets the basic operations on integers using
materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards.
III. LEARNING RESOURCES:
A. References
1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 359-360
21st
Century Mathletes: p 47-59
2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
3. Textbook pages: 21st
Century Mathletes: p 146- 147
4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none
B. Other Learning Resources:
 Activity cards, algebra tiles counters, chips, and cards., Number
Line, & video presentation
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RAb2PR4lKvY)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jcLUewqIRkM&pbjreload=10)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=r9nzpGc8B7s)
Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint)
IV. PROCEDURES
Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson or
presenting the new
lesson
 Prepare some activity cards on
subtraction of integers.
(https://www.mathworksheets4kids.com/
adding-subtracting-integers.php)


( Note: Please see attached copy for
a visible picture)
 Set classroom rules
 Learner will answer
the activity
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
 Introduce the lesson to the learners
and the objectives/ target for learning
 Set classroom rules
 Present a Present a video about how
to multiply an integer.
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RAb
2PR4lKvY)
(https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jcLU
ewqIRkM&pbjreload=10)
 Listen to the teacher
 Watch the video
C. Presenting
examples/instance
s of the new
lesson.
 Teacher discuss how to multiply
integers using tiles
 Use two colors of tiles that represent
the two signs blue for negative and red
for positive.
 Multiplying two positive numbers
- Discuss to the class on how to
multiply the two positive integers
and thus by grouping each tiles.
- Multiplying 2 different signs
 Listen to the teacher
(+1) x (+4)= +
4 +3 One Group
only
 Discuss to the class that when you
multiply a positive number to a
negative number the answer will
always have negative sign.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
 Present another individual activity to
the class.
Let the pupils multiply integers using
tiles.
a. ( -5,) x ( -8) = b. (6) x (3)=
c. (-3) x (9) = d. (11) X (-18) =
 Pupils will answer the
activity
E. Developing
mastery (leads to
Formative
Assessment
 Teacher prepares another set of group
activity using tiles.
( Note: Please see attached copy)
 Group themselves into
3 groups
 Answers the activity
given in groups.
F. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living.
 Prepares a problem
A test has 20 questions. The test
awards 3 points if the answer is correct
and takes away 1 if the answer is
incorrect. Ana answered 5 correctly.
How many points will she received?
- Solve the problem given
G. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
 Ask some questions
 How do we multiply integers?
-
 Answers the teachers
question.
H. Evaluating
learning
 Multiply the integers using tiles as
representation.
 Answer the activity
(5) x (-2) = -
10
Five
Groups of
Two only
( Note: Please see attached copy)
I. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
 Draw a tiles with the following
integers.
( Note: Please see attached copy)
 Answer the activity at
home.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
O. No. of
learners who
earned 80%
on the
formative
assessment
P. No. of
learners who
require
additional
activities for
remediation
Q. Did the
remedial
lessons
work? No. of
learners who
have caught
up with the
lesson
R. No. of
learners who
continue to
require
remediation
S. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did
these work?
T. What
difficulties did
I encounter
which my
principal or
supervisor
can help me
solve?
U. What
innovation or
localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish
to share with
other
teachers?
Activity Cards on Reviewing previous lessons.
https://www.google.com/search?q=sample+activity+cards+on+subtracting+integers&tbm=isch&
source=iu&ictx=1&fir=n4x1jOqho0ui6M%253A%252CpRWpMJ-
fIpSwLM%252C_&vet=1&usg=AI4_-
kRf25DchkyGljuUlg8XT11nrJRoDA&sa=X&ved=2ahUKEwiEx-fE-sXjAhXac94KHT6yD-
AQ9QEwA3oECAkQDw&biw=1242&bih=597#imgrc=n4x1jOqho0ui6M:&vet=1
Activity Card on Multiplying Integers
https://www.k5learning.com/free-math-worksheets/sixth-grade-6/integers/integer-multiplication
Activity Sheet for Evaluating Learning Outcome
https://www.sopexamples.com/multiplying-integers-worksheet/
Activity Card 2
School Grade Level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates
and Time
Week 9, Day 1 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems
and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies /
Objectives
Performs the basic operations on integers.
(M6NS-IIi-156)
1. Perform addition on integers.
2. Use algebra tiles in adding integers.
II. CONTENT Performing Addition on Integers
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
1. Teacher’s
Guide pages
Mathematics CG for Grade 6, p.196
2. Learner’s
Materials pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp 152-157
3. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp 152-157
4. Additional
Materials from
Learning
Resource (LR)
Portal
none
B. Other Learning
Resources
Mathletes 6 textbook, power point presentation, flash cards, answer
sheets, algebra tiles, number line
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson
or presenting
the new lesson
Drill:
Flash some cards having pair of
integers.
Ask: Which of the two integers in
each pair has a greater distance
from zero?
1. +5 & -4
2. -2 & -9
3. -10 & -6
4. +7 & -3
5. -12 & + 1
6. +6 & -4
7. -8 & +5
8. -2 & +3
Pupils will give the answer orally.
Possible answers:
1. +5
2. -9
3. -10
4. +7
5. -12
6. +6
7. -8
8. +3
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
Present the problem.
Aling Maria bought fruits which
cost ₱500 from a wholesaler and
sold them in her fruit stand. On
Monday, her sales was ₱600; and
on Tuesday, ₱300. But on
Wednesday, she lost ₱200
because some of the fruits were
already rotten. Considering the
sales from Monday to Wednesday,
did Aling Maria gain or lose?
Pupils will read and analyze the
problem carefully.
C. Presenting
Examples/
Instances of the
new lesson
Discuss the answer to the problem
by asking comprehension
questions:
Ask:
1. How much was her total sales
from Monday to Wednesday? (ask
a volunteer to solve on the board)
2. How much was her capital?
To know whether Aling Maria
gained or lost, we have to compare
her total sales from Monday to
Wednesday with her capital.
Ask: Did Aling Maria gain or lose?
Pupils will listen attentively to the
discussion and answer the given
questions.
1. (600)+(300)+(-200)=700
2. Her capital was ₱500.
Answer: She gained ₱200.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
Say: Addition is the same as
“combining”. How do we combine
integers?
Use a number line to help visualize
the addition of integers.
 Add a positive integer by
moving to the right on the
number line.
 Add a negative integer by
moving to the left on the
number line.
Example:
1. 4+3=
Start from 4 and move 3 units to
the right.
Pupils will observe and practice
adding integers using the number
line.
Therefore, 4+3=7
2. (-4)+2=
Start from -4 and move 2 units
to the right.
Thus, (-4)+2=-2
3. (-5)+(-2)=
Start from -5 and move 2 units
to the left.
So, (-5)+(-2)=-7
4. 5+(-7)=
5. (-2)+(-3)
Answer:
4. 5+(-7)= -2
5. (-2)+8= 6
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
Demonstrate adding positive and
negative integers using counters.
Say: We can use positive and
negative counters to model the
addition of integers.
positive negative
What will happen if we put together
1 black tile and another black tile?
Now, how about if we put together
1 white tile and another white tile?
This will produce two black tiles.
=2
This will produce two white tiles
= -2
What will happen if we put together
1 black tile and 1 white tile?
A positive integer paired with a
negative integer form a “zero pair”.
They cancel each other. A zero pair
has a sum of “0”.
Example:
1. Show the sum of +2 and +4
using tiles.
(Let the pupils manipulate the tiles
to show the answer.)
2. Show the sum of +5 and -2 using
tiles.
3. Show the sum of -1 and -3 using
tiles.
4. Show the sum of -4 and +2 using
tiles.
Do you notice a pattern or rule?
- When the signs are the same,
add the numbers together and
keep the sign.
- When the signs are different,
subtract the integers and keep the
sign of the larger digit.
= 0
1.
. = +6
2.
= +3
3
.
= -4
4.
= -2
F. Developing
mastery (Leads
to Formative
Assessment 3)
Group Activity
Divide the class into three groups
and have them add the following
integers:
Members of the group will help
each other in doing the activity.
Group 1 will answer using algebra
tiles.
1) -8 + 8 =
2) -9 + -11 =
3) 13 + (-9) =
4) 7 + 5 =
5) -12 + 10 =
6) -22 + (-16) =
7) 18 + (-5) =
8) -1 + 6 =
9) 0 + (-8) =
10) 4 + 5 =
Group 2 will use the number line in
adding the integers.
Group 3 will add the integers using
the rules.
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and
skills in daily
living
Fish bowl Activity.
The teacher will play a music. As
the music starts, the teacher will
pass a ball to a pupil who will then
pass the ball to the pupil next to
him/her. When the music stops, the
one holding the ball will pick a
paper inside the fish bowl and give
the sum of the integers written on
it.
Pupils will pass the ball to the pupil
next to him. When the music stops,
the one holding the ball will pick a
paper inside the fish bowl and give
the sum of the integers written in it.
H. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
Ask: How do we add integers with
like sign? Unlike sign?
To add integers with like signs, add
the numbers together and keep the
sign.
To add integers with different signs,
subtract the integers and keep the
sign of the larger integer.
I. Evaluating
Learning
The teacher will give a test.
Add the following integers.
1) 8 + 7 =
2) 9 + (-10) =
3) (-3) + (-19) =
4) -2 + 29 =
5) -8 + 3 =
6) -12 + (-30) =
7) -54 + 20 =
8) 6 + (-2) + (-10) =
9) 18 + (-18) =
10) 4 + (-15) =
Pupils will answer individually.
Answers:
1) 8 + 7 = 15
2) 9 + (-10) = -1
3) (-3) + (-19) = -22
4) -2 + 29 = 27
5) -8 + 3 = -5
6) -12 + (-30) = -42
7) 54 + -20 = 34
8) 6+(-2)+(-10) = -6
9) 18 + (-18) = 0
10) 4 + (-15) = -11
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
If the temperature was -7 degrees
(Fahrenheit) at 6 AM, rose 4
degrees by 7 AM and then rose
another 8 degrees by 8 AM, what
was the temperature at 8 AM?
Answer: 5O
F
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80%
on the formative
assessment
B. No. of learners
who require
additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work?
No. of learners
who have
caught up with
the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did these
work?
F. What difficulties
did I
encountered
which my
principal or
supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?
DETAILED LESSON PLAN
School Grade Level VI
Teacher
Learning
Area
MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates
and Time
Week 9, Day 2 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
D. Content Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of
operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and
integers.
E. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of
operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and
integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations.
F. Learning
Competencies /
Objectives
Performs the basic operations on integers.
(M6NS-IIi-156)
3. Perform subtraction on integers.
4. Use algebra tiles as aid in subtracting integers.
5. Show cooperation in group activity.
II. CONTENT Performing Subtraction on Integers
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
C. References
5. Teacher’s Guide
pages
Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196
6. Learner’s Materials
pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp158-165
7. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp158-165
8. Additional
Materials from
Learning Resource
(LR) Portal
none
D. Other Learning
Resources
Mathletes 6 textbook, video clip, power point
presentation, answer sheet
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
K. Reviewing previous
lesson or
presenting the new
lesson
Drill:
Give the opposite of each given
integers.
1. +50
2. +12
3. +42
4. -120
5. -29
Review:
How do we add integers with
like signs? Unlike signs?
Pupils will give the
answer orally.
1. -50
2. -12
3. -42
4. +120
5. +29
To add integers with
like signs, add the
numbers together and
keep the sign.
To add integers with
different signs, subtract
the integers and keep
the sign of the larger
integer.
L. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
The teacher will tell a situation.
The temperature in Malaybalay
City is 24O
C in the morning. It
dropped to 19O
C in the
evening. What is the difference
between these temperatures?
Pupils will listen
attentively and will
answer the question
raised by the teacher.
M. Presenting
Examples/Instances
of the new lesson
Discuss the answer to the
problem using the 3 Steps to
subtract integers:
1.Keep
Keep the 1st
number
2.Change
Subtraction sign to Addition
3.Opposite
Write down the opposite of the
2nd
number
-Then add the way you
normally do.
Subtracting integers is adding
the opposite of subtrahend to
the minuend. In this case, the
opposite of +19 is -19. We add
-19 to +24, giving us +5.
Therefore, Malaybalay City’s
temperatures between morning
and evening differ by 5O
C.
Give other examples for pupils
to solve following the above
steps.
Pupils will listen
attentively to the
teacher’s discussion.
N. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
Show a video clip on how to
subtract integers.
Pupils will watch the
video.
O. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
Demonstrate another example
of subtraction of integers using
algebra tiles.
Example:
Pupils will perform the
steps in subtracting
integers using algebra
tiles.
1. (+5) – (+2) = ____
Place 5 black tiles on the table.
Take away 2 black tiles.
= +3
Since there are 3 black tiles,
the difference is +3. Thus, (+5)
- (+2) = 3.
2. (-4) – (-3) = ____
Place 4 white tiles on the table.
Take away 3 white tiles.
= -1
Since there is 1 white tile left,
the difference is -1. Thus, (-4) -
(-3) = -1.
3. (-4) – (+1) = ____
Place 4 white tiles on the table.
Take away 1 black tile.
Since we cannot take away 1
black tile from 4 white tiles,
then we must add 1 zero pair.
+
Remove 1 black tile, there
remains 5 white tiles.
Therefore, the difference is -5.
4. +3 – (-5) = ____
Place 3 black tiles on the table.
Take away 5 white tiles.
Since we cannot take away 5
white tiles from 3 black tiles, we
have to add 5 zero pairs
without changing the value of
= 3
= -1
+
= -5
the set. Then, remove 5 white
tiles.
+
The difference is +8.
+3 – (-5) = 8
P. Developing mastery
(Leads to Formative
Assessment 3)
Group Activity:
The teacher will divide the class
into groups of 5 members.
Each group will be given an
activity card to answer. After
five minutes, they are going to
exchange their activity cards for
checking. The group with the
most number of correct
answers will be the winner.
Pupils will answer the
activity by group.
1. (-17)-(-19)-21= -19
2. -13-15-(-18)= -10
3. 45 – (-10) = 55
4. -15 – 6= -21
5. 38 – 9 = 29
Q. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living
Practice by Pair:
Subtract the following integers.
1. -7 – 15 =
2. 23 – 98 =
3. 48 - 13 =
4. 5 – (- 6) =
5. 17 – 8 =
Each pair will answer
the given activity.
1. -7 – 15 = -22
2. 23 – 98 = -75
3. 48 - 13 = 35
4. 5 – (-6) = 11
5. 17 – 8 = 11
R. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
How do we subtract integers?
(Subtraction of integers
means adding the
minuend and the
opposite of the
subtrahend.) or
Subtract Integers
1.Keep
Keep the 1st
number
2.Change
Subtraction sign to
Addition
3.Opposite
Write down the
opposite of the 2nd
number
-Then add the way we
normally do.
S. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give a test.
Subtract the following integers.
1) 13 - 4 =
Pupils will answer the
test individually.
Answers:
2) -7 - 4 =
3) 12 - (-17) =
4) 12 - 17 =
5) -9 – (-1) =
6) 6 - 9 =
7) -14 - 5 =
8) 6 - 5 – 2 =
9) (-18) - 0 =
10) 13 - 3 =
1) 13 - 4 = 9
2) -7 - 4 = -11
3) 12 - (-17) = 29
4) 12 - 17 = -5
5) -9 – (-1) = -8
6) 6 - 9 = -3
7) -14 - 5 = -19
8) 6 - 5 – 2 = -1
9) (-18) - 0 = -18
10) 13 - 3 = 10
T. Additional activities
for application or
remediation
Answer the following.
1. Subtract 6 from -15.
2. 8 + (-2) – 9 – (-7) = ___.
Answers:
1. -22
2. 4
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
H. No. of learners who
earned 80% on the
formative
assessment
I. No. of learners who
require additional
activities for
remediation
J. Did the remedial
lessons work? No.
of learners who
have caught up with
the lesson
K. No. of learners who
continue to require
remediation
L. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
M. What difficulties did
I encountered which
my principal or
supervisor can help
me solve?
N. What innovation or
localized materials
did I use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?
DETAILED LESSON PLAN
School Grade Level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates
and Time
Week 9, Day 3 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
G. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of
operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and
integers.
H. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of
operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and
integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations.
I. Learning
Competencies /
Objectives
Performs the basic operations on integers.
(M6NS-IIi-156)
1. Perform multiplication on integers.
2. Use algebra tiles in multiplying integers.
3. Show awareness of the importance of reducing
waste in the community.
II. CONTENT Performing Multiplication on Integers
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
E. References
9. Teacher’s Guide
pages
Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196
10. Learner’s
Materials pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp. 166-168
11. Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp. 166-168
12. Additional
Materials from
Learning
Resource (LR)
Portal
none
F. Other Learning
Resources
Mathletes 6 textbook, video clip, power point presentation,
activity sheets, algebra tiles
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
U. Reviewing
previous lesson
or presenting the
new lesson
Review: (Board work)
The teacher will call pupils to
write the answer of the
following.
1. 18- 7 = ___
2. -26-12 = ____
3. 35- (-8) = ____
4. 20- (-20) = ____
5. -25-(-25) = ____
Pupils will write the
answer in each number.
1. 18- 7 = 11
2. -26-12 = -38
3. 35- (-8) = 43
4. 20- (-20) = 40
5. -25-(-25) = 0
V. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
Present the situation below.
After a campaign on reducing
waste, the amount of garbage
on Jane’s household
decreased by 2 kilograms per
day. By how much will their
garbage decrease after 6
days?
Since Jane’s household had a
decrease of 2 kg in their
garbage, we can represent it
with -2. Such decrease
happened for 6 days, so we
can have:
-2 x 6 = n
Multiplying integers is like
multiplying whole numbers.
We just need to be careful of
the sign we use in the product.
The product of two integers
with different signs is negative.
So, -2 x 6 = -12.
Why is it important to reduce
waste in our community? How
can you help in reducing waste
at home?
Pupils will read and
answer the problem.
Answer:
Jane’s garbage will have
a decrease of 12
kilograms.
Pupils answer may vary.
W. Presenting
Examples/Instan
ces of the new
lesson
Present the rules in multiplying
integers using power point
presentation.
Say: There are rules that we
need to remember in
multiplying integers:
Rule 1:
Positive x Positive =
POSITIVE
Example:
1. 3 x 6 = 18
2. 5 x 2 = 10
Rule 2:
Negative x Negative =
POSITIVE
Example:
1. -2 x -3 = 6
2. -1 x -25 = 25
Rule 3:
Negative x Positive =
NEGATIVE
Pupils will listen
carefully to the
discussion.
Example:
1. -2 x 6 = -12
2. 3 x -5 = -15
Rule 4:
Any Number x 0 = ZERO
Example:
1. -5 x 0 = 0
2. 0 x 7 = 0
X. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
Say:
To further understand our
lesson, let us watch a video on
how to multiply integers.
Pupils will watch the
video.
Y. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
We can also multiply integers
using algebra tiles.
Black tiles represent positive
integers while white tiles
represent the negative
integers.
Example:
1. Find the product of (+3) and
(+4)
Place 4 rows of 3 black tiles
on the table.
Since there are 12 black tiles,
the product is 12. Thus, (+3) x
(+4) = 12.
2. Multiply (+4) by (-3).
Place 3 rows of 4 black tiles
on the table.
Going back to the given, the
other factor is negative, which
means all the tiles in 3 rows
should be flipped over.
Pupils will listen to the
teacher and multiply
integers using algebra
tiles.
= 12
= -12
Since there are 12 white tiles,
the product is -12. Thus, (+4) x
(-3) = -12
Z. Developing
mastery (Leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
Group Activity: Quiz bee
The teacher will divide the
class into 5 groups. Each
group will be given a show-me-
board. Then, they will choose
a leader.
Mechanics:
a. The teacher will flash
integers through power point
slides.
b. Pupils will be given 10
seconds to solve for the
product of the given integers.
c. The leader will write the
product on the show-me-
board.
d. When the time is over, the
teacher will ring the bell and
each group will raise their
show-me-board.
e. The teacher will check the
answers.
f. The group having the most
number of correct answers will
be the winner.
Pupils will go with their
group and choose their
leader.
Answers:
1) 6 x 7 = 42
2) -8 x - 3 = 24
3) 5 x (-3) = -15
4) -12 x 4 = -48
5) -9 x (-2) x (-3) = -54
AA. Finding
practical
applications of
concepts and
skills in daily
living
Pair-share:
Say: Find a pair most
preferably your seatmate.
Then, share your ideas in
finding the product of the
integers.
-2x3=___
-2 x -3 = ___
6x8=___
-7x4=____
7x (-4)=____
2x(-6)=____
Pupils will look for a
pair. They will share
their ideas regarding the
activity given by the
teacher.
-2x3= -6
-2 x -3 = 6
6x8= 48
-7x4= -28
7x (-4)= -28
2x(-6)= -12
BB. Making
generalizations
and abstractions
about the lesson
How do we multiply integers?
 We multiply integers
just like whole
numbers.
 If two integers have
like signs, their
product is positive.
 If two integers have
unlike signs, their
product is negative.
CC. Evaluating
Learning
Multiply the following.
1) (-3) x 8 =
2) -5 x (- 2) =
3) 0 x (-17) =
4) 10 x (-5) =
5) 8 x (-5) x (-2) =
6) (-42) x (-2) =
7) (-9) x (-2) x (-1) =
8) 6 x 2 =
9) (-18) x 1 =
10) -13 x 0 =
Answer:
1) (-3) x 8 = -24
2) -5 x (- 2) = 10
3) 0 x (-17) = 0
4) 10 x (-5) = -50
5) 8 x (-5) x (-2) = 80
6) (-42) x (-2) = 84
7) (-9) x (-2) x (-1) = -18
8) 6 x 2 = 12
9) (-18) x 1 = -18
10) -13 x 0 = 0
DD. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Mother went to the market to
buy some fruits and
vegetables. She bought 5
apples at ₱30.00 each and 3
cabbages at ₱10.00 each. She
gave the vendor a 500-peso
bill. How much change did she
get?
Answer: ₱320.00
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
O. No. of learners
who earned 80%
on the formative
assessment
P. No. of learners
who require
additional
activities for
remediation
Q. Did the remedial
lessons work?
No. of learners
who have caught
up with the
lesson
R. No. of learners
who continue to
require
remediation
S. Which of my
teaching
strategies
worked well?
Why did these
work?
T. What difficulties
did I
encountered
which my
principal or
supervisor can
help me solve?
U. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?
DETAILED LESSON PLAN
School
Grade
Level
VI
Teacher
Learning
Area
MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates
and Time
Week 9, Day 4 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of
operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and
integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations,
ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in
mathematical problems and real-life situations.
C. Competencies /
Objectives
Performs the basic operations on integers.
(M6NS-IIi-156)
1. Perform division on integers.
2. Use algebra tiles as aid in division of integers.
II. CONTENT Performing Division on Integers
III. LEARNING RESOURCES
References
Teacher’s Guide pages Learning Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196
Learner’s Materials
pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp 169-170
Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp 169-170
Additional Materials
from Learning Resource (LR)
Portal
none
Other Learning
Resources
Mathletes 6 textbook, power point presentation, algebra tiles,
answer sheets
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing previous
lesson or presenting
the new lesson
Have a quick review
on multiplying integers
through flash cards.
1. 5 x (-6)
2. -10 x 9
3. -7 x (-5)
4. -4 x 0
5. -6 x (-6)
Pupils will give the answers orally.
1. 5 x (-6) = -30
2. -10 x 9 = -90
3. -7 x (-5) = 35
4. -4 x 0 = 0
5. -6 x (-6) = 36
B. Establishing a purpose
for the lesson
Present the problem
below.
During summer
vacation, Alfred works
as janitor in a
restaurant. He earns
₱450 per week. If he
works for 5 days every
Answer: Alfred earns ₱90 per day.
450 5 = 90
week, how much does
he earn daily?
C. Presenting
Examples/Instances of
the new lesson
Present the rules in
dividing integers.
Say: Dividing integers
is the same as dividing
whole numbers. We
just need to be careful
of the sign we use in
the quotient.
When dividing
integers, we need to
remember that the
quotient of two
integers with like sign
is always POSITIVE.
Example:
1. (+10) ÷ (+2) = (+5)
2. (-6) ÷ (-3) = (+2)
On the other hand, if
the signs are different
the quotient is a
NEGATIVE integer.
Example:
1. (+10) ÷ (-5) = -2
2. -20 ÷ 4 = -5
Pupils will listen attentively to the
teacher’s discussion.
D. Discussing new concepts
and practicing new skills
#1
Board work:
Give more examples
on dividing integers
using the rules.
Call on pupil
volunteers to solve on
the board and explain
their answer to the
class.
Pupils will solve on the board and
explain their answer.
1. 28 ÷ 2 = 14
The answer is +14 since 28 and 2
have the same sign.
2. -75 ÷ 5 = -15
The quotient is -15 sine 75 and 5
have different signs.
3. 36 ÷ (-3) = -12
The answer is -12 since 36 and
3 have unlike signs.
E. Discussing new concepts
and practicing new skills
#2
Discuss another
method of dividing
integers using algebra
tiles.
Example:
1. Divide: (+6) ÷ (+2)
From the 6 black
tiles, make 2 groups
with equal number of
tiles.
There are 3 black
tiles in each group.
Therefore, (+6) ÷ (+2)
= (+3) or simply 3.
2. Divide: (-6) ÷ (+2)
From the 6 white
tiles, make 2 groups
with equal number of
tiles.
There are 3 white
tiles in each group.
Therefore, (-6) ÷ (+2) =
-3.
3. Divide: (+6) ÷ (-2)
Note: Negative divisor
means take the
opposite of or flip over.
Therefore, from the 6
black tiles, make 2
groups with equal
number of WHITE
tiles.
There are 3 white
tiles in each group.
Therefore, (+6) ÷ (-2) =
(-3).
4. Divide: (-6) ÷ (-2)
Note: Negative divisor
means take the
opposite of or flip over.
Therefore, from the 6
white tiles, make 2
groups with equal
number of BLACK
tiles.
There are 3 black
tiles in each group.
Therefore, (-6) ÷ (-2) =
(+3) or simply 3.
Flip over
Flip over
Answer:
1. (-36) ÷ 9 = -4
2. 56 ÷ (-4) = -14
Additional examples:
1. (-36) ÷ 9 =
2. 56 ÷ (-4) =
F. Developing mastery
(Leads to Formative
Assessment 3)
Group Activity:
The class will be
divided into 5 groups.
The teacher will give
each group an activity
card.
Find the quotient of the
following.
1. (-56) ÷ 8 =
2. 120 ÷ (-8) =
3. 144 ÷ 6 =
4. -124÷ 4 =
5. (-48) ÷ (-4) =
Each member of the group will help
each other in answering the activity.
Answer:
1. -7
2. -15
3. 24
4. -31
5. 12
G. Finding practical
applications of concepts
and skills in daily living
Try this with your
seatmate:
54  6 =
-54  6 =
54  -6 =
-54  -6 =
-12  -4 =
Pupil will answer.
54  6 = 9
-54  6 = -9
54  -6 = -9
-54  -6 = 9
-12  -4 = 3
H. Making generalizations
and abstractions about
the lesson
How do we divide
integers?
 Dividing integers is the same as
dividing whole numbers.
 The quotient of two integers with
like sign is a positive integer.
 The quotient of two integers with
different signs is a negative
integer.
I. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give a
test.
Divide the following.
1. (-28) ÷ (-7) =
2. 45 ÷ (-5) =
3. (-75) ÷ (-5) =
4. -30 ÷ 5 =
5. 250 ÷ (-50) =
Pupils will answer individually.
Answers:
1. (-28) ÷ (-7) = 4
2. 45 ÷ (-5) = -9
3. 75 ÷ 5 = 15
4. -30 ÷ 5 = -6
5. 250 ÷ (-50) = -5
J. Additional activities for
application or remediation
Find the quotient.
1. (-144) ÷ 2 =
2. 56 ÷ (-2) =
Answer:
1. -72
2. -28
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners who
earned 80% on the
formative assessment
B. No. of learners who
require additional
activities for remediation
C. Did the remedial lessons
work? No. of learners who
have caught up with the
lesson
D. No. of learners who
continue to require
remediation
E. Which of my teaching
strategies worked well?
Why did these work?
F. What difficulties did I
encountered which my
principal or supervisor
can help me solve?
G. What innovation or
localized materials did I
use/discover which I wish
to share with other
teachers?
School Grade Level VI
Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates
and Time
Week 9, Day 5 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
H. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integers.
I. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems
and real-life situations.
J. Learning
Competencies /
Objectives
Performs the basic operations on integers.
(M6NS-IIi-156)
1. Answer the summative test.
II. CONTENT Answering the Summative Test
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
G. References
451 Teacher’s
Guide pages
Mathematics CG for Grade 6, p.196
452 Learner’s
Materials pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp 152-157
453 Textbook
pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp 152-157
H. Other Learning
Resources
Test paper
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
K. Reviewing
previous lesson
Have a quick review on the
rules in adding, subtracting,
multiplying and dividing
integers.
Pupils will participate actively in the
review.
L. Setting of
Standards Ask: What are the things
that you need to do in
answering a test.
Possible answers:
1. Follow the directions.
2. Answer silently.
3. Cover your test paper.
4. Don’t talk with seatmates.
5. Don’t cheat.
6. If you’re done, review your answers.
M. Giving of
Instructions and
Distribution of
Test Papers
Read the instructions in
answering the test.
Distribute the test papers.
N. Test Proper Supervise the pupils in
answering the summative
test.
Perform the indicated
operation.
Pupils will answer the given test.
1) 9 + (-17) =
2) -2 + 29 + (-16) =
3) (-3) + (-15) =
4) -8 - 5 =
5) 54 - (-20) =
6) -12 x 5 =
7) 6 x (-2) x (-10) =
8) 25 x 12 =
9) 48 ÷ (-3) =
10) -24 ÷ (-2) =
O. Checking of Test
Papers and
Recording of
Scores
The teacher will post the
answers on the board and
record the scores of pupils.
Pupils will check the test papers.
P. Additional
activities for
remediation
Answer the following:
1) 29 + (-7) =
2) -2 - (-16) =
3) (-3) x (-15) =
4) -48 ÷ 2 =
Answer:
1) 22
2) 14
3) 45
4) -24
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80%
on the formative
assessment
B. No. of learners
who require
additional
activities for
remediation
School Grade Level VI
Teacher
Learning
Area
MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates and
Time
Week 10, Day 1 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems
and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies /
Objectives
Solves routine and non-routine problems involving addition of integers
using appropriate strategies and tools. (M6NS-IIj-157)
II. CONTENT
Solving Routine and Non-routine Problems Involving Addition of
Integers
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
Teacher’s Guide
pages
Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196
Learner’s
Materials pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp156-157
Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp156-157
Additional
Materials from
Learning
Resource (LR)
Portal
none
B. Other Learning
Resources
Mathletes 6 textbook, power point presentation, activity cards
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous
lesson or
presenting the
new lesson
Drill: Integers Word Clue!
Teacher will flash cards with a word
which represents either a positive or
negative integer.
When the teacher flashes the
word, pupils will raise the happy
face if the word represents a
positive integer or sad face if it
represents a negative integer.
Answer:
(+) Integers
1. earned
2. saved
3. deposit
4. gained
5. rose
6. increase
7. above
8. ascend
9. profit
10. up
(-) Integers
1. spent
2. cost
3. withdraw
4. lost
5. fell
6. decrease
7. below
8. descend
9. loss
10. down
Review: (Board work)
Call a pupil to perform the indicated
operation.
(+10) + (-9)
(-25) + (+5)
(-80) + (+6)
(-120) + (+20)
(35) + (-20)
(+10) + (-9) = 1
(-25) + (+5) = -20
(-80) + (+6) = -74
(-120)+(+20)= -100
(35) + (-20) = 15
B. Establishing a
purpose for
the lesson
Present the problem to the class.
Problem:
A messenger forgot on what floor in
a building he would deliver his
package. With no one to ask for
directions, he rode the elevator up to
the 10th
floor. Then he went down 5
floors and went up again 4 floors.
Still, he could not find the right floor.
So he went up again 3 floors and
decided to stop for a while. On what
floor did the messenger stop?
Pupils will read the given
problem.
C. Presenting
Examples/Instanc
es of the new
lesson
Use the 4-step plan to solve the
problem.
1. Understand
-What is asked?
-What are given?
2. Plan
-What strategy will you use to
solve the problem?
3. Solve
-Solve the problem using the
strategy.
4. Check
-Check if the answer is correct.
Pupils will analyze and answer
the problem following the steps.
1. a. It asked for the floor where
the messenger stopped.
b. First stop: 10th
floor
down 5 floors
up 4 floors
up 3 floors
2. Use a number line 3. Using
the number line, start at 0 as the
starting point. On the first ride,
the elevator went up to 10th
floor.
So from 10, he went down 5
floors, up again 4 floors, and
went up again 3 floors.
Therefore, the messenger
stopped at 12th
floor
4.Check
10-5+4+3=12
12=12
Thus, the answer is correct.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
Present another problem and guide
the pupils in answering it using the 4-
step plan.
Pupils will answer the problem
using the 4-step plan.
practicing new
skills #1 Problem:
A car is located 40 km north of
Malaybalay City. If it travelled 35km
north then 45 km south, how far from
Malaybalay City was the car at the
end of its travel?
Answer:
40+35-45=30
Thus, the car is located 30 km
north of Malaybalay City.
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
Pair-share:
Answer the problem by pair.
Mrs. Santos lost 3 kg when she was
ill. After recovering, she gained 7 kg.
She went to a fitness center and lost
2 kg. How much did she finally lose
or gain?
Solution:
She lost 3 kg means -3.
She gained 7 kg means +7.
She lost again 2 kg means -2.
Equation:
(-3)+(7)+(-2)=2
Therefore, she gained 2 kg.
F. Developing
mastery (Leads to
Formative
Assessment 3)
Group Activity: Use the 4-step plan
to solve the problem.
1. Divide the class into 4 groups.
2. Give each group an activity card,
marker, and manila paper where
they will write their solution.
3. Pupils are given 10 minutes to do
the activity.
4. When the time is up, each group
will post their output on the board for
checking.
Group 1 and 3
Problem:
In the first half of a trivia game,
Kenneth scored 500 points.
Then, during the second half, he
lost 200 points. What was his
total score?
Solution:
500 + (-200) = 300
Group 2 and 4
Problem:
Simon spent Php1,000 on a
fancy watch and deposited a
Php3,000 paycheck. How much
is the change that Simon had?
Solution:
-
1,000 + 3,000 = 2,000
Simon had Php2,000 more.
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and
skills in daily
living
Use the 4-step plan to solve the
problem.
1. On the first play, the football team
lost 6 yards. On the second play, the
team lost 5 yards. What was their
total change in yards?
Answer:
(-6)+(-5)=(-11)
The team lost 11 yards.
H. Making
generalizations
How do you solve routine and non-
routine problems involving addition of
To solve routine and non-routine
problems involving addition of
integers, we use the 4-step plan:
and abstractions
about the lesson
integers using appropriate strategies
and tools?
1. Understand-Know what is
asked and given.
2. Plan what strategy to use.
3. Solve using the strategy.
4. Check if the answer is
correct.
I. Evaluating
Learning
Solve each problem:
1. Gio walked 5 steps forward, 8
steps backward, 9 steps forward and
3 steps backward. How many steps
is Gio from where he started?
2. A submarine was situated 800 feet
below sea level. If it ascends 250
feet, what is its new position?
Answer:
1.(5)+(-8)+(9)+(-3)=3
Gio is 3 steps from where he
started.
2. (-800)+(250)=-550
The submarine is situated 550
feet below sea level.
J. Additional
activities for
application or
remediation
Give 10 pairs of integers whose
product is greater than zero and
whose sum is less than 50.
Answers may vary.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned
80% on the
formative
assessment
B. No. of learners
who require
additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work?
No. of learners
who have caught
up with the lesson
D. No. of learners
who continue to
require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching
strategies worked
well? Why did
these work?
F. What difficulties
did I encountered
which my
principal or
supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What innovation
or localized
materials did I
use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?
School Grade Level VI
Teacher
Learning
Area
MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates
and Time
Week 10, Day 2 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations,
ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers.
B. Performance Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical
problems and real-life situations.
C. Learning Competencies
/ Objectives
Solves routine and non-routine problems involving subtraction of
integers using appropriate strategies and tools.
M6NS-IIj-157
II. CONTENT
Solving Routine and Non-routine Problems Involving Subtraction
of Integers
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
Teacher’s Guide
pages
Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196
Learner’s Materials
pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp164-165
Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp164-165
Additional Materials
from Learning Resource
(LR) Portal none
B. Other Learning
Resources
Mathletes 6 textbook, power point presentation
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing previous
lesson or
presenting the new
lesson
Drill:
Give the opposite of
each integer.
+25
-57
-100
-82
75
Review: (Board work)
Perform the indicated
operation.
(+20) - (-19)
(-35) - (+5)
(-60) - (-29)
(-45) - (+30)
(55) - (-26)
Answers:
-25
+57
+100
+82
-75
Answer:
+39
-40
-31
-75
+81
B. Establishing a purpose
for the lesson
Present the problem. Pupils will read and analyze the
problem.
The temperature in
Baguio City was 12°
Celsius in the morning.
It dropped to 8° Celsius
in the evening. What is
the difference between
these temperatures?
C. Presenting
Examples/Instances
of the new lesson
Ask the following
questions.
1. What is asked?
2. What is the equation
representing this
situation?
3. What is the difference
between the
temperature of Baguio in
the morning and
evening?
To get the difference
between the two
temperatures, we need
to subtract 8° from 12°.
Answer:
12°- 8° = 4°
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new skills #1
Present another
problem.
During summer, James
weighed 65 kg. When
he came back to school,
he realized that he lost 3
kg. He lost another 2 kg
in December. What was
his weight in December?
1. What is asked?
2. What are given?
3. What is the equation
representing the
situation?
4. What is the final
answer?
Answer:
1. What was his weight in
December?
2. 65 kg, 3kg, 2kg
3. 65-3-2=n
4. 65-3-2=n
=65+(-3)+(-2) [rule in subtracting
integer]
=60kg
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new skills #2
Pair-share:
Answer the problem by
pair.
At sunrise, the outside
temperature was 1°
below zero. By lunch
time, the temperature
rose by 17° and then fell
by 4° by night. What
Pupils will find a partner and answer
the given problem together.
Solution:
The starting temperature is 1° below
zero, or -1°.
Later, the temperature rose, or went
up, by 17°.
Then, the temperature fell, or went
down, by 4°.
was the temperature at
the end of the day? Equation:
-1° + 17° - 4°= -12°
F. Developing mastery
(Leads to Formative
Assessment 3)
Group Activity:
The teacher will divide
the class into 5 groups
and give the activity
card.
Solve the problem.
1. The highest point in
Asia is Mount Everest at
8850 meters. The shore
of the Dead Sea, the
lowest point in Asia, is
about 410 meters below
sea level. What is the
difference between
these elevations?
2. In Fairfield, Montana,
on December 24, 1924,
the air temperature
dropped a record
amount. At noon, the
temperature was 63°F.
Twelve hours later, the
temperature was 21°F.
What was the change in
temperature?
Pupils will answer the problem by
group and report their answer to the
class.
Solution:
Use integers to represent the two
elevations.
Mount Everest: +8850m
Dead Sea: -410 m
Find the difference of 8850 and 410
meters.
8850 -(- 410)
=8850 + 410 [Rule for subtracting
integers]
=9260
ANSWER: The difference between
the elevations is 9260 meters.
2. Solution:
Change in temperature = end
temperature - start temperature
=21 - 63 (Substitute values.)
= 21 + (-63) [Rule for subtracting
integers]
= -42
ANSWER:
The change in temperature was -42,
so the temperature dropped 42°F.
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills in
daily living
Individual Activity
Solve the problem.
1. In the Sahara Desert
one day it was 136°F.
In the Gobi Desert a
temperature of -50°F
was recorded. What is
the difference between
these two
temperatures?
Answer:
136° - (-50°)=n
136° + (50°) = 186°
The difference between the two
temperature is 186°F.
H. Making generalizations
and abstractions about
the lesson
Ask: How do you solve
routine and non-routine
problems involving
subtraction of integers
using appropriate
strategies and tools?
To solve routine and non-routine
problems involving subtraction of
integers, know what is asked and
given, formulate the equation to
represent the problem, solve the
equation and check your answer.
I. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give a
test.
Solve each problem:
1. RJ was able to save
₱895 from his weekly
allowance. If he wants to
buy a second hand
mobile phone for
₱1,050, how much more
money does he still
need?
2. What is the distance
of an airplane that is 890
m above the sea level
and a submarine that is
102 m below sea level?
Answers:
1. ₱155
2. 992m
J. Additional activities for
application or
remediation
If the temperature was -
7 degrees (Fahrenheit)
at 6 AM, rose 4 degrees
by 7 AM and then rose
another 8 degrees by 8
AM, what was the
temperature at 8 AM?
Answer:
-7 + 4 + 8 = 5 degrees (Fahrenheit)
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
K. No. of learners who
earned 80% on the
formative assessment
L. No. of learners who
require additional
activities for
remediation
M. Did the remedial
lessons work? No. of
learners who have
caught up with the
lesson
N. No. of learners who
continue to require
remediation
O. Which of my teaching
strategies worked well?
Why did these work?
P. What difficulties did I
encountered which my
principal or supervisor
can help me solve?
Q. What innovation or
localized materials did I
use/discover which I
wish to share with
other teachers?
School Grade Level VI
Teacher
Learning
Area
MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates
and Time
Week 10, Day 3 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio
and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and
proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems
and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies /
Objectives
The learner solves routine and non-routine problems involving
multiplication and division of integers using appropriate strategies and
tools.
M6NS-IIj-157
II. CONTENT
Solving Routine and Non-routine Problems Involving Multiplication
and Division of Integers
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
Teacher’s Guide
pages
Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196
Learner’s
Materials pages
21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp170-173
Textbook pages 21st
Century Mathletes 6, pp170-173
Additional
Materials from
Learning Resource
(LR) Portal
none
B. Other Learning
Resources
Mathletes 6 textbook, video clip, power point presentation
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Reviewing
previous lesson
or presenting
the new lesson
Drill:
Perform multiplication on
each pair of numbers.
12 & 4
7 & 3
15 & 9
Write positive or negative:
(+) ÷ (+) =
(+) ÷ (−) =
(−) ÷ (+) =
(−) ÷ (−) =
(+) x (+) =
(+) x (−) =
(−) x (+) =
(−) x (−) =
Perform division on each pair
of numbers.
Answers:
48
21
135
(+) ÷ (+) = (+)
(+) ÷ (−) = (−)
(−) ÷ (+) = (−)
(−) ÷ (−) = (+)
(+) x (+) = (+)
(+) x (−) = (−)
(−) x (+) = (−)
(−) x (−) = (+)
9
135 & 15
84 & 6
28 & 7
Review:
Determine if the following
pairs of integers have like
signs or unlike signs.
(+7) & (-12)
(-4) & (-9)
(-5) & (-30)
(+2) & (-11)
(+56) & (-18)
14
4
B. Establishing a
purpose for the
lesson
Present the problem.
After a community campaign
on reducing waste, the
amount of garbage in Rita’s
household decreased by 2
kg. per day. By how much will
their garbage decrease after
6 days? What is the average
reduced waste by each
person in Rita’s household if
there are four of them in the
family?
Pupils will read and analyze the
problem.
C. Presenting
Examples/Instances
of the new lesson
Ask the following questions.
1. What integer will represent
the decrease in garbage in a
day?
2.If such decrease happens
for 6 days, then what
equation will describe the
total decrease of garbage in 6
days?
-Multiplying integers is the
same as multiplying whole
numbers. The product of two
integers with different signs is
negative. On the other hand,
the product of two integers
with same sign is positive.
Solution:
Multiplying 2 and 6 is 12, but
since the signs of the factors
are different, then the product
is -12.
Therefore, after 6 days, Rita’s
household will have a
Answers:
1. -2
2. -2 x 6 = n
3. Divide the total decrease of
garbage by four since they are
four in the family.
4. -12 ÷ 4= n
5. -3kg
Each member of Rita’s
household reduced 3kg in
their garbage.
decrease of 12kg in their
garbage.
3. How are we going to know
the average reduced waste of
each member of Rita’s
household?
-Dividing integers is the same
as dividing whole numbers.
The quotient of two integers
with different signs is
negative. On the other hand,
the quotient of two integers
with the same sign is positive.
4. What will be the equation
representing the average
reduced waste of each
member of Rita’s household?
5. What is the quotient of the
two integers in your
equation?
Solution: 12 ÷ 4 is 3. Since 12
& 4 have different signs, then
the final answer will be -3.
Thus, each of the 4 members
of Rita’s household reduced
3kg in their garbage.
D. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #1
Present another problem and
discuss the answer using the
4-step plan.
There were 15 rows of 50
chairs arranged in an
auditorium. Each chair was
rented ₱40. How much was
paid for the rental?
1.Understand
What is asked? Given?
2. Plan
What equation represents
the problem?
3. Solve
4. Check
Pupils will read the problem, listen to
the discussion and answer some
questions raised by the teacher.
Answers:
1. How much was paid for the rental?
Given: 15 rows of 50 chairs, ₱40
each chair
2. 15x50x40=n
3. 15x50x40=₱30, 000
E. Discussing new
concepts and
practicing new
skills #2
Present another problem.
Guide the pupils in answering
the problem.
Alicia owes Php200 to each
of her 4 friends. How much
money does she owe?
Solution: The problem above
can be solved using integers.
Owing Php200 can be
represented by -200. Thus
the problem becomes:
(-200) (+4)
The parentheses indicate that
these integers are being
multiplied. In order to solve
this problem, we need to
know the rules for
multiplication of integers.
We can now use Rule 1 to
solve the problem
arithmetically:(-
200) (+
4) = -
800. So Alicia owes -Php800.
The pupils will read and analyze the
problem.
Rule 1: The product of a positive
integer and a negative integer is a
negative integer.
Rule 2: The product of two
negative integers or two positive
integers is a positive integer.
F. Developing mastery
(Leads to Formative
Assessment 3)
Group Activity:
Divide the class into 5
groups. Give each group an
activity card.
Answer the following
problems. Use the 4-step
plan to solve the problem.
1. A person has a debt of
Php500. Five friends offer to
pay off all of the debt. How
much does each person need
to pay in order to pay off the
debt?
2. Ms. Reyes needed Php250.
She withdrew five times that
amount. How much money did
she withdraw?
3. A sprinkler was -20 feet
below ground level. Mr. Cruz
has a machine that digs -4
Pupils will answer the problem by
group.
Answers:
1. Php100.
2. Php1,250
3. 5 digs
feet at a time. How many digs
does he need to make in order
to reach the sprinkler?
G. Finding practical
applications of
concepts and skills
in daily living
Present the problem and
have pupils answer it
individually.
Use the 4-step plan to solve
the problem.
1. Four roommates share an
apartment. The balance for
their bills for the month of July
is -Php1600. How much do
they each owe?
2. Yesterday's low
temperature was -2.5. Today's
low temperature is 5 times as
low as yesterday's low
temperature. What is the
temperature today?
Answers:
1. Each of them owes Php400.
2. -12.5
H. Making
generalizations and
abstractions about
the lesson
Ask: How do you solve
routine and non-routine
problems involving
multiplication & division of
integers using appropriate
strategies and tools?
To solve routine and non-routine
problems involving multiplication &
division of integers, use the 4-step
plan:
1. Understand-what is asked/given
2. Plan-what equation represents the
problem
3.Solve equation
4. Check answer
I. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give a test.
Solve each problem:
1. Mr. Cruz went to market to
buy some fruits and
vegetables. He bought 5
apples at Php30 each and 3
cabbages at Php10 each. He
gave the vendor a 500-peso
bill. How much change did he
get?
2. Mrs. Tan has ₱500 to buy
some groceries. Can she buy
10 can goods that cost ₱40
each? Show your solution.
Answers:
1. Php320
2. Yes
₱500÷₱40=12.5
₱40x10=₱400
Thus, she can buy 10 can
goods worth ₱10 each.
J. Additional activities
for application or
remediation
Math Challenge
1. The sum of two numbers is
96 and one of them is five
times the other. What are the
two numbers?
Answer:
Let x=1st
number
5x=2nd
number
To show the sum:
x + 5x = 96
6x = 96
x = 96 ÷6
x = 16 is the 1st
number.
5x=5(16)=80 is the 2nd
number
Check:
16+80=96
96=96
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned 80%
on the formative
assessment
B. No. of learners who
require additional
activities for
remediation
C. Did the remedial
lessons work? No.
of learners who
have caught up
with the lesson
D. No. of learners who
continue to require
remediation
E. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
F. What difficulties did
I encountered
which my principal
or supervisor can
help me solve?
G. What innovation or
localized materials
did I use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?
DETAILED LESSON PLAN IN MATHEMATICS 6
School Grade Level VI
Teacher
Learning
Area
MATHEMATICS
Teaching Dates
and Time
Week 10, Day 4-5 Quarter 2ND
I. OBJECTIVES
A. Content
Standards
The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations,
ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers.
B. Performance
Standards
The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations,
ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in
mathematical problems and real-life situations.
C. Learning
Competencies /
Objectives
Answer the second quarterly test.
II. CONTENT Answering the Second Quarterly Test
III. LEARNING
RESOURCES
A. References
Teacher’s Guide
pages
Mathematics CG for Grade 6, pp.190-196
Learner’s
Materials pages
21st Century Mathletes 6, pp. 82-180
Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp. 82-180
Additional
Materials from
Learning
Resource (LR)
Portal
none
B. Other Learning
Resources
Test paper
IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity
A. Setting of
Standards Ask: What are the things
that you need to do in
answering a test.
Possible answers:
1. Follow the directions.
2. Answer silently.
3. Cover your test paper.
4. Don’t talk with seatmates.
5. Don’t cheat.
6. If you’re done, review your
answers.
B. Giving of
Instructions and
Distribution of
Test Papers
Read the instructions in
answering the test.
Distribute the test
papers.
C. Test Proper Supervise the pupils in
answering the second
periodic test.
Pupils will answer the test.
D. Checking of Test
Papers and
Recording of
Scores
The teacher will post the
answers on the board
and record the scores of
pupils.
Pupils will check the test papers.
V. REMARKS
VI. REFLECTION
A. No. of learners
who earned
80% on the
formative
assessment
B. No. of learners
who require
additional
activities for
remediation
A. Did the remedial
lessons work?
No. of learners
who have
caught up with
the lesson
B. No. of learners who
continue to require
remediation
C. Which of my
teaching strategies
worked well? Why
did these work?
D. What difficulties did
I encountered which
my principal or
supervisor can help
me solve?
E. What innovation or
localized materials
did I use/discover
which I wish to
share with other
teachers?

DLP-MATH-6.docx

  • 1.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards Thelearner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Expresses one value as a fraction of another given ratio and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-129) 1. Express one value as a fraction of another given their ratio and vice versa. 2. Write ratio in three different ways. II. CONTENT Expressing one’s value as a fraction of another given ratio and vice versa. III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87 3. Textbook Pages Mathematics for Everyday Use 6 p. 128 - 129 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 5 - Rational Numbers: Ratio and Proportion p. 1-5 B. Other Learning Resources Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 p. 289 - 293 IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson. Mental Computation: 1. 3÷ 3 7 = N 2. 3 4 ÷ 1 2 = N 3. 1 5 ÷ 6 = N 4. 8 ÷ 1 2 = N 5. 1 1 3 ÷ 4 Possible answer. 1. 7 2. 3 2 or 1 1 2 3. 1 30 4. 10 5. 1 23 School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: Week 1, Day 1 Quarter: SECOND
  • 2.
    B. Establishing a purposefor the lesson. Ask the pupils to compare the things in the classroom according to their number or quantity. For example, the number of chairs compare to the number of tables, the number of shoes to the number of slippers and so, on. Have them write the ratios of these sets of objects on the board. Pupils answer may vary. C. Presenting examples/ instances of the new lesson In Mr. Cambangay’s class, there are 12 boys and 10 girls. Compare the number of girls to the number of boys and vice versa. Guide the pupils to show the relationship of the number of boys to the number of girls. Ask: How will you write the comparison of the number of boys to the number of girls using fraction? Is there another way of writing it? How? Possible answer. 12 10 Yes in colon (:) and in words. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 To compare, let us use the concept of ratio. Ratio is a comparison of two quantities. If there are 12 boys and 10 girls, we can say that 12 is to 10. Other ways to express such comparison is by writing them using a colon, 12:10 or writing them in fraction from, 12/10. Therefore, comparing the number of boys to the number of girls can be expressed as: 12 is to 10, 12:10, or 12 10 . Even if the ratio is in fractional form, we say twelve is to ten. Possible answer. 12:10 Twelve is to ten 12 10 E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Ratio is the spoken language of arithmetic. It is a way of comparing two or more quantities having the same units – the quantities may be Possible answer.
  • 3.
    separate entities orthey may be different parts of a whole. We can write ratio of a and b in three ways: Word form  a is to b Colon form  a:b Fraction form  a/b The order of which ratio is expressed is important. Therefore, the order of the terms in a ratio must correspond to the order of the objects being compared. Ivy has some yellow and red beads. (Present this using blocks) Yellow Beads: Read Beads: Ask: The ratio of the number of read beads to the number of yellow beads is ___:___ Two is to five, 2:5 2 5 F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Compare the number of vowels to consonants and vice versa in the word MATHEMATICS, in word, colon and fraction forms. Vowels: A, E, and I  3 Consonants: M.T,H, C and S  5 Ratio of vowels to consonants: Word form: 3 is to 5 Colon form: 3:5 Fraction form: 3 5 Ratio of consonants to vowels: Word form: 5 is to 3 Colon form: 5:3 Fraction form: 5 3 G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living There are 10 buses in a station and each bus has 6 wheels, what is the ratio of buses to wheels? Word form: 10 is to 6 Colon form: 10:6 Fraction form: 10 6
  • 4.
    Write your answerin three ways. H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson What is ratio? What are the three ways of writing ratio? Ratio - is a way of comparing two or more quantities having the same units – the quantities may be separate entities or they may be different parts of a whole. The three ways of writing ratio are: Word form, colon form and fraction form. I. Evaluating Learning Write a ratio for each of the following using the three ways of writing ratio. 1. 4 apples compared to 5 guavas. 2. Eight compared to 28. 3. There are five kites to seven boys. 4. Four squares compared to 3 circles. 5. 2 flowers compared to 3 leaves. Answer for number 1 a) Word form: 4 is to 5 b) Colon form: 4:5 c) Fraction form: 4 5 Answer for number 2 a. Word form: 8 is to 28 b. Colon form: 8:28 c. Fraction form: 8/28 Answer for number 3 a. Word form: 5 is to 7 b. Colon form: 5:7 c. Fraction form: 5/7 Answer for number 4 a. Word form: 4 is to 3 b. Colon form: 4:3 c. Fraction form: 4/3 Answer for number 5 a. Word form: 2 is to 3 b. Colon form: 2:3 c. Fraction form: 2/3
  • 5.
    J. Additional activities for applicationor remediation 1. 2. 3. 4 wins to 2 losses in basketball 4. 10 decimeters to 10 centimeters 5. 6 weeks to 12 days Possible answer. 1. 8:6, 8/6, 8 is to 6 2. 10:8, 10/8, 10 is to 8 3. 4:2, 4/2, 4 is to 2 4. 100:10, 100/10, 100 is to 10 5. 42:12, 42/12, 42 is to 12 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter
  • 6.
    which my principal orsupervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 7.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards Thelearner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Finds how many times one value is as large as another given their ratio and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-130) 1. Find how many times one value is as large as another given their ratio and vice versa. 2. Write ratio in simplest form. II. CONTENT Finding how many times one value is as large as another given their ratio and vice versa. III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87 3. Textbook Pages Mathematics for Everyday Use 6 p. 130 - 132 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 5 - Rational Numbers: Ratio and Proportion p. 5-9 B. Other Learning Resources Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 p. 293 - 297 IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson. Teacher conducts a review in finding the GCF. Let the pupils do this mentally. Give the GCF using drill board. 1. 15 and 60 2. 24 and 18 3. 16 and 40 4. 49 and 28 5. 35 and 50 Possible answer. 1. 15 2. 6 3. 4 4. 7 5. 7 School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: Week 1, Day 2 Quarter: SECOND
  • 8.
    B. Establishing a purposefor the lesson. Ask the pupils about their favorite drink for snacks, like calamansi juice, tea, etc. Tell them that Calamansi Juice is good because of its nutritious value. Pupils will share what their favorite drink for snack is. (Answers may vary.) C. Presenting examples/ instances of the new lesson Teacher presents this problem situation. Mother is preparing Calamansi Juice: a) For each glass of Calamansi Juice, 5 pieces of Calamansi are needed. b) If she makes 2 glasses, how many pieces of calamansi are needed? c) If she makes 3 glasses, how many pieces of calamansi are needed? Analyze the problem by asking the following questions: a) What is asked? b) What are the given facts? What strategies may be used to answer the problem? Possible answer. a. The number of calamansi needed in making 2 glasses of calamansi juice. b. The number of calamansi needed in making 3 glasses of calamansi juice. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Illustrate the problem using blocks. a) Glass: Calamansi: b) Glass: Calamansi: c) Glass: Calamansi: E. Discussing new concepts and Ask: Possible answer.
  • 9.
    practicing new skills #2 1.How many pieces of Calamansi are there in a glass of Water in a? In b? In c? 2. Which of these ratios is expressed in lowest term/simplest form? Why? Pupils write the ratios for question number 1. a. ( 1 5 or 1:5) b. ( 2 10 or 2:10) c. ( 3 15 or 3:15) 2. (1:5) F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Reduce the following ratios in lowest term. Choose the letter that corresponds to the ratio in simplest form. E = 3:4 I = 1:2 R = 2:9 T = 15:4 G = 1:6 N = 5:6 S = 1:4 4:8 15:18 30:8 18:24 6:27 15:20 8:32 60:16 7:14 25:30 4:24 What is the hidden word? ____________________________ Possible answer. I = 1:1 N = 5:6 T = 15:4 E = 3:4 R = 2:9 E = 3:4 S = 1:4 T = 15”4 I = 1:2 N = 5:6 G = 1:6 G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Study the table below and answer the question after it. Things Quantity Costs Stamps 10 Php50 Patches 15 Php180 Bookmark 20 Php300 Diary 12 Php300 In simplest form, express the following ratio of: a) stamps to patches b) bookmark to patches c) diary to patches d) bookmark to stamps e) diary and stamps Possible answer. a. 10:15 = 2:3 b. 20:15 = 4:3 c. 12:15 = 4:5 d. 20:10 = 2:1 e. 12:10 = 6:5
  • 10.
    H. Making generalizations and abstractionsabout the lesson The teacher will ask the pupils the following question: Can a ratio be expressed in lowest terms? How? Possible answer. Yes. By dividing the ratio by its common factor. I. Evaluating Learning Reduce these ratios in simplest form. 1) 10:12 2) 9:15 3) 18:24 4) 21:27 5) 40:50 Possible answer. 1. 5:6 2. 3:5 3. 3:4 4. 7:9 5. 4:5 J. Additional activities for application or remediation Express the given ratio to simplest or lowest terms. a. 8 hours to 10 hours b. 40 minutes to 1 hours c. 25 centavos to 1 peso d. 2 dozen to 18 things e. 18 boys to 16 girls Possible answer. a. 8:10 = 4:5 b. 40:60 = 4:6 c. 25:100 = 1:4 d. 24:18 = 4:3 e. 18:16 = 9:8 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized
  • 11.
    materials did I use/discoverwhich I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 12.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards Thelearner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Finds how many times on value is as large as another given their ratio and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-130) 1. Find how many times one value is as large as another given their ratio and vice versa. 2. Write ratio in simplest form. II. CONTENT Writing ratio to lowest term. III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87 3. Textbook Pages Mathematics for Everyday Use 6 p. 130 - 132 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 5 - Rational Numbers: Ratio and Proportion p. 5-9 B. Other Learning Resources Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 p. 293 - 297 IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson. Teacher conducts a review on reducing fractions to lowest terms. Let the pupils do this mentally. Reduce these fractions to lowest terms. 8/10, 12/15, 18/30, 3/9, 6/20 Possible answer. a. 8/10 = 4/5 b. 12/15 = 4/5 c. 18/30 = 3/5 d. 3/9 = 1/3 e. 6/20 = 3/10 School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: Week 1, Day 3 Quarter: SECOND
  • 13.
    B. Establishing a purposefor the lesson. Present the picture on the board: Ask: What is the ratio of the number of blue cubes to the number of red cubes? Possible answer. 6:12 or 1:2 C. Presenting examples/ instances of the new lesson Let us now place the cubes in groups of 2. What is the ratio? Place the cubes in groups of 3 What is the ratio? Finally, group them into 6s. What is the ratio? Say: 6:12, 3:6, 2:4 and 1:2 are called Equivalent Ratios. 1:2 is the ratio in the Simplest Form Possible answer. 3:6 2:4 1:2 D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Take a look at the ratio 12:8. How do we write it in simplest form? Step 1: Divide 12: 8 by the common factor 2 to get 6:4 Step 2: Divide 6:4 by the common factor 2 to get 3:2 12:8 ÷ 2 ÷ 2 6:4 ÷ 2 ÷ 2 3:2 Possible answer. Divide 12 and 8 by common factor which is 4 to get 3:2. 3:2 cannot be divided exactly by a common factor thus 3:2 is the ratio in simplest form.
  • 14.
    The ratio 3:2cannot be divided exactly by a common factor to get another equivalent ratio. Thus, 3:2 is the ratio in Simplest Form E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Present this example: There are 9 papayas and 15 pineapples. What is the ratio in simplest form? 9:15 ÷3 ÷3 3:5 The ratio of papaya to pineapple is 3:5 F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment ) A Volleyball Team won 8 games out of 12 games it played. a) Write the ratio of wins to games played. b) Write the ratio of wins to losses. c) Write the ratio of losses to games played. Possible answer. a. 8:12 = 2:3 b. 8:4 = 2:1 c. 4:12 = 1:3 G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living In a Grade VI Mathematics class, there are 27 boys and 21 girls. a) Write the ratio of boys to girls. b) Write the ratio of girls to boys. c) Write the ratio of girls to the whole class. d) The ratio of boys to the whole class. Possible answer. a. 27:21 = 9:7 b. 21:27 = 7:9 c. 21:48 = 7:16 d. 27:48 = 9:16 H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson The teacher will ask the pupils the following question: How do we express ratio in simplest form? Possible answer. We express ratio in simplest form by dividing it to its common factor. I. Evaluating Learning Write each of the following ratios in simplest form: Possible answer.
  • 15.
    1) 12:18 2) 25:10 3)21:56 4) 20:25 5) 30: 54 1. 2:3 2. 5:2 3. 3:8 4. 4:5 5. 5:9 J. Additional activities for application or remediation Express each rate in lowest terms. 1. 36:18 2. 48:6 3. 5760:12 4. 468:9 5. 504:14 Possible answer. 1. 2:1 2. 8:1 3. 480:1 4. 52:1 5. 36:1 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or
  • 16.
    supervisor can help mesolve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 17.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards Thelearner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Finds how many times one value is as large as another given their ratio and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-130) 1. Express ratio in lowest term. 2. Find the rate. II. CONTENT Expressing ratio in lowest term. III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87 3. Textbook Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 82 - 87 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics 6 p. 293 - 297 B. Other Learning Resources Mathematics for Everyday Use 6 p. 130 – 132. IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson. Ask: What is a ratio? Give example of ratio. Possible answer. Ratio is a comparison of two qualities which can be written in colon, word or fraction form. (answers may vary) B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson. A motorist traveled 240 km in 3 hours. What is the speed of the motorist? Solution: Possible answer. School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: Week 1, Day 4 Quarter: SECOND
  • 18.
    240 𝑘𝑚 3 ℎ𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠 =N 240km 3 hours The motorist has a constant speed of 80 km/hour. What do you call the comparison of the distance and the time travelled by the motorist? 80 km/hr C. Presenting examples/ instances of the new lesson There are instances when the terms of the ratio do not have the same units or classifications. For example, 60 kilometers to an hour of 60 kilometers per hour. This special ratio is called rate. Rate is the comparison of two quantities but may have different units of measures and their ratio has a unit of measure. Pupils will listen to the discussion. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Present this example: Joshua scored 168 points in 7 basketball games. Express in lowest terms, the average rate of the number of points that Joshua scored in every game. Rate = 168 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑠 7 𝑔𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑠 = 24 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑠 1 𝑔𝑎𝑚𝑒 = 24 points per game. Notice that in the above example, the two terms do not have the same classification; that is, points and games. In this instance, we have to use rate. Pupils will listen and participate in the discussion by solving on their seat the problem presented. Possible answer. 24 points per game = 80 km/hr
  • 19.
    E. Discussing new conceptsand practicing new skills #2 Joana can type 288 words in 8 minutes. How many words can she type per minute? Rate = 288 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑠 8 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 = 36 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑠 1 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒 = 36 words/minute Possible answer. 36 words/minute F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Ask the pupils to find the rate and express it to lowest term if possible. a) If Luisa can type 440 words in 8 minutes, what is her rate of typing? b) If 30 green oranges cost Php100, at what rate are the oranges sold? Possible answer. 55 words per minute Php10 for 3 oranges G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Answer the following: a) A Mitsubishi Montero vehicle can travel 900 km on 75 liters of diesel. Write the rate of liters of diesel used to kilometers traveled. b) A machine can produce 156 items in 12 minutes. Write the rate of the number of items produced to the number of minutes. Possible answer: a. 900 𝑘𝑚 75 𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑠 = 12km/liters b. 156 𝑖𝑡𝑒𝑚𝑠 12 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 =13 items/min H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher will ask: What is rate? Possible answer. Rate is the comparison of two quantities but may have different units of measures and their ratio has a unit of measure. I. Evaluating Learning Express each rate in lowest term. 1. The ratio of 112 persons to 16 tables. 2. the ratio of Php306.00 to 9 m cloth 3. The ratio of 312 m to 13 seconds 4. The ratio of Php6,480.00 to 12 families. Possible answer: 1. 7 person/table 2. Php34/m 3. 1,140 4. Php540.00/family 5. 46 students/bus
  • 20.
    5. The ratioof 368 students to 8 buses. J. Additional activities for application or remediation Find the unit rate and express the answer to lowest term if possible. a) 700 kilometers in 5 hours b) 150 stools in 2 weeks c) 300 words in 5 minutes d) Php48 for 8 ball pens e) Php275 for 2 3 4 𝑘𝑔 of chicken. Possible answer. a. 140km/hr b. 75 stools/week c. 60 words/minute d. Php6/ball pen e. Php100/kg. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 21.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards Thelearner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Expresses one value as a fraction of another given ratio and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-129) Finds how many times on value is as large as another given their ratio and vice versa. (M6NS-IIa-130) Answer weekly test. II. CONTENT Expressing one value as a fraction of another given their ratio and vice versa and finding how many times one value is as large as another given their ratio and vice versa. III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes p. 82-91 3. Textbook Pages 21st Century Mathletes p. 82-91 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics 6 p. 293 - 297 B. Other Learning Resources IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson. Have a quick review on writing ratio in three ways, that is; Word form, Colon form, fraction form, writing ratio in lowest term and expressing ratio in lowest term Pupils answer may vary. School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: Week 1, Day 5 Quarter: SECOND
  • 22.
    B. Setting of Standards. Ask.What are the things that you need to do in answering the test? Possible answers. 1. Read and follow the directions. 2. Answer silently. 3. Cover your paper. 4. Don’t talk with your seatmates. 5. Don’t cheat. 6. If you’re done, review your answer. C. Giving of instruction and distribution of test papers. Read the instruction in answering the test. Distribute the test papers. D. Test Proper Supervise the pupils in answering the test. A. Write a ratio for each of the following in three ways. 1. 4 wins to 2 losses in basketball 2. 3 months to 8 weeks 3. 24 girls to 18 boys 4. 8 melons to 36 fruits 5. 6 weeks to 12 days B. Express ratios in lowest terms. 1. 5:15 b. 21:27 3. 2:14 4. 25:100 5. 60:16 C. Find the rate. Jay can type 324 words in 9 minutes. How many words can he type per minute? Possible answer. A. 1. 4 is to 2, 4:2, 4/2 2. 3 is to 8, 3:8, 3/8 3. 24 is to 18, 24:18, 24/18 4. 8 is to 36, 8:38, 8/36 5. 6 is to 12, 6:12, 6/12 B. 1. 1:3 2. 7:9 3. 1:7 4. 1:4 5. 15:4 C. Rate = 324 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑠 9 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 = 36 𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑠 1 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒 = 36 words/minute E. Checking of Test paper and recording of scores. The teacher will post the answer on the board and record pupils score. Pupils will check the test papers. F. Additional activities for Solve the following problems. Possible answer.
  • 23.
    application or remediation 1. Theratio of ducks to chicken in the farm is 3:5. The total number of chickens and ducks together is 72. If 6 chickens have shown symptoms of flu and had to be removed from the farm, what is the new ratio of ducks to chickens? Solution: Ducks = 3 Chicken = 5 Total = 72 3:5 = 72 3n+5n = 72 8𝑛 8 = 72 8 N= 9 (Ducks) 9 x 3 = 27 (Chicken) 9 x 5 = 45 So, 45 – 6 = 39 The new ratio of ducks to chicken is now 9:13. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized
  • 24.
    materials did I use/discover whichI wish to share with other teachers?
  • 25.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards Thelearner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Defines and illustrates the meaning of ratio and proportion using concrete or pictorial models. M6NS-IIb-131 Sets up proportions for groups of objects or numbers and given situations. M6NS-IIb-132 1. Defines and illustrates the meaning of ratio and proportion using concrete or pictorial models. 2. Sets up proportions for groups of objects or numbers and given situations 3. Value carefulness in doing the activities II. CONTENT Forming ratio and proportion III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 190 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 88 - 91 3. Textbook Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 88 - 91 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 p. 289 - 293 B. Other Learning Resources IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: WEEK 2, DAY 1 Quarter: SECOND
  • 26.
    A. Reviewing previous lessonor presenting the new lesson`. Give the fractional part of the shaded portion. Possible answer. a. 2/8 or ¼ b. 6/15 or 2/5 c. 1 ¼ d. 5/10 or ½ e. 8/16 or 1/2 B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson. Look around your room. What are the things you find inside? Answers may vary. C. Presenting examples/ instances of the new lesson 1. Let the pupils count the number of boys and girls. Guide the pupils to show the relationship of the number of boys to the number of girls. Example: 25/28 25 is the first term boy, 28 is the second term girls Possible answer. 25:28
  • 27.
    Ask: Is thereanother way of writing it? How? 2. Let the pupils count other objects/things. Let them give/write the ration in 2 ways (colon and fraction form) Ask: Did you count the objects/things correctly? Why? What will you do if you are given objects to use/ manipulate? How will you handle them? Yes. 25/28 D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 The teacher will show a problem. Ronald bought 3 pencils for 10 pesos at Elen’s School Supply Store. Ruby bought 6 pencils for 20 pesos. Give the ration of the pencils to the amount of money of each child. 1. What did Ronald and Ruby buy? How many pencils did each of them buy? How much did each of them pay? 2. What are being compared in the problem? Write the ratios in 2 ways 3. How many ratios did you write? 4. What can you say about the two ratios? Why? 5. How can we write the two ratios to show the equality in two ways? 6. What do you call two equal ratios? 1. Ronald and Ruby buys pencil. Ronald buys 3 pencils while Ruby buys 6 pencils. They pay P10.00 and P20.00 pesos each. 2. The number of pencils and its price. 3:10 and 6:20 3. There are two ratios. 4. The two ratios are equal. 5. 3:10::6:20 6. Two equal ratios are called proportion. E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 The ratio of chairs to tables is 8 to 2 or 4 to 1. Let the pupils write in 2 ways. Possible answer. 8:2::4:1 8 2 = 4 1
  • 28.
    Let them identifythe terms, means and extremes. F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Let the pupils answer it by pair. Illustrate and give the ratio of the following in two different ways( colon and fraction): 1. 4 squares to 3 circles 2. 2 flowers to 3 leaves 3. 5 crayons to 4 books 4. 2 basketball to 8 tennis balls 5. 6 apple to 7 guavas 1. 4:3, 4/3 2. 2:3, 2/3 3. 5:4, 5/4 4. 2:8, 2/8 5. 6:7, 6/7 G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Find the ratio and proportion of the following. 1. There are 10 busses at gas station. If each bus has 6 wheels, what is the ratio of busses to wheels? 2. Every quarter each student submits 2 projects in EPP. Give the ratio of projects to quarters. 3. There are 3 caimito trees and 4 mango trees in Mang Tino’s orchard. While in Mr. Trazona’s orchard, there are 6 caimito trees and 8 mango trees. Give the ratio of the mango to caimito trees in each orchard then write a proportion. Possible answer. 1. 10/6, 10:6 2. 2/1, 2:1 3. 4:3, and 8:6 H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson What is a ratio? Proportion? What are the ways in writing ratio/ proportion? Possible answer. Ratio is a way of comparing two or more quantities having the same units. The three ways in ratio are: word form, colon and fraction form. I. Evaluating Learning Write the ratio and proportion for each of the following: 1. 6 apples to 18 children. 2. Eight compared to 28. 3. There are 5 kites to seven boys. 4. In a t-shirt factory, each box contains 3 t-shirts. Give the ratio of boxes to t-shirts. 5. In a camping, each boy scout was given 4 hotdogs. If there are 5 boy scouts, 20 Possible answer. 1. 6:18, 6/18 2. 8:28, 8/28 3. 5:7, 5/7 4. 1:3, 1//3 5. 1:4=5:20
  • 29.
    hotdogs were cooked.Write the proportion. J. Additional activities for application or remediation Form ratio/proportion for the following using 2 different ways. 1) 7 to 8 2) 3 to 5 is equivalent to 6 to 15 3) two barangays to 13 348 people 4) one boat to 3 people is equal to 6 boats to 18 people 5) 45 members of Glee Club to 30 members of Dance Club Possible answer. 1. 7:8, 7/8 2. 3:5 = 6:15 3. 2 : 13 348 4. 1 :3 = 6:18 5. 45:30 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 30.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards Thelearner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive) M6NS-IIb-133 4. Find a missing term in a direct proportion. 5. Solve for the missing term in a direct proportion. II. CONTENT Finding a missing term in a direct proportion. III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 191 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 88 - 91 3. Textbook Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 88 - 91 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics 6 p. 301 - 3014 B. Other Learning Resources Lesson Guide in Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 – Ateneo de Manila University, 2010 IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson. What is ratio? Give examples. Answers may vary. School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: WEEK 2, DAY 2 Quarter: SECOND
  • 31.
    B. Establishing a purposefor the lesson. The teacher will show an equation and ask questions. 1 mango:12 pesos = 4 mangoes: 48 pesos What have you observed from the given equation? Notice that as the number of mangoes increases, the payment also increases. Why do you think so? Answers may vary. C. Presenting examples/ instances of the new lesson Mr. Cambangay bought 9 different kinds of bread for Php324.00. At the same price, how much will she pay for the 15 different breads? To solve this problem, write equal ratios. Let n be the price of 15 different kinds of bread 9 324 = 15 𝑛 To solve the problem of Mr. Cambangay: 9 324 = 15 𝑛 9 x n = 324 x 15 9n = 4860 9𝑛 9 = 4860 9 n = 540 Therefore, he has to pay Php540.00 for 15 different kinds of bread. Possible answer. N = 540 D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 When two ratios are equal, a proportion is formed. A proportion is a statement of equality between two ratios. Each part of a proportion is a term. The first and the last terms are called extremes while the second and the third terms are called means. In the proportion 9 324 = 15 𝑛 or 9:324= 15: n, 9 and n are the extremes. While 324 and 15 are the means. Pupils will listen attentively to the discussion.
  • 32.
    In a proportion,the cross product of equal ratios are equal. If 𝑎 𝑏 = 𝑐 𝑑 , then ad = bc. Thus, the product of the means is equal to the product of the extremes. a:b = c:d If in a given proportion a term is missing, it can be solved using cross multiplication. Tell whether the ratios form a proportion. a. 6 14 , 3 7 6 14 =? 3 7 Write the proportion 6 x 7 =? 14 x 3 Form cross products 42 =/ 42 Multiply. Answer: The ratios form a proportion. b. 6:9 = 8:n 6 x n = 9 x 8 6𝑛 6 = 72 6 n = 12 Answer: The ratios form a proportion. E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 The above problems are examples of direct proportion. In direct proportion, as one quantity increases, the other quantity increases at the same rate and vice versa. F. Developing mastery (Leads to Group Activity Possible answer: Means Extremes
  • 33.
    Formative Assessment) The teacher willpresent a problem on the board and let the group answer it. Arlene and her mother also sells hotcakes on weekends. Mother’s recipe need 3 eggs to make 5 hotcakes. Arlene wants to make 25 hotcakes. How many eggs will she need? 1. Let the group illustrate their solution on the board. 2. Check if the groups wrote the correct proportions for the problems. 3. Again, guide the pupils in finding the missing term or element. 4. Ask questions to elicit the rule for finding the missing element in a proportion. Eggs Cakes 3 5 6 10 9 15 12 20 15 25 Another solution using proportion. 3 = 5 n 25 3 x 25 = n x 5 75 = 5n 5 5 n = 15 G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living At the school canteen: a. 3 pieces of pad paper cost 50 cents. 21 pieces of pad paper cost _____. b. 4 colored pencils cost Php25.00. 12 colored pencils cost ________. c. 2 boiled bananas cost Php3.50. 10 boiled bananas cost ________. Possible answer: a. 3 = 50 21 n 3 x n = 21 x 50 3n = 1050 3 3 n = 350 b. 4 = 25 12 n 4 x n = 12 x 25 4n = 300 4 4 n = 75 c. 2:10::3.50:n 2 x n = 10 x 3.5 2n = 35 2 2 n = 17.5 H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson What is proportion? Define direct proportion. Possible answer. A proportion is a statement of equality between two ratios. Each part of a proportion is a term. The first and the last terms are called
  • 34.
    extremes while the secondand the third terms are called means. The product of the means is equal to the product of the extremes. Direct proportion on the other hand is a proportion that as one quantity increases, the other quantity increase at the same rate and vice versa. I. Evaluating Learning A. Find the missing term and tell whether it is a direct proportion or not. 1. 2 3 = 4 𝑛 2. 12 15 = 𝑛 5 3. 𝑛 7 = 24 28 4. 28 𝑛 = 2 3 B. Analyze the problem and write a proportion to solve it. 1. A car travels 72 km on 8 liters of gasoline. At the same rate, about how far can it travel on 10 liters of gasoline? Possible answer. A. 1. 2 x n = 3 x 4 2n = 12 2 2 n = 6, direct proportion 2. 12 x 5=15 x n 60 = 15n 15 15 n = 4, direct proportion 3. n x 28=7 x 24 28n = 168 28 28 n = 6, direct proportion 4. 28 x 3 = n x 2 84 = 2n 2 2 n = 42, direct proportion B. 72 𝑛 = 8 10 72 x 10 = n x 8 720 = 8n 8 8
  • 35.
    n = 90 J.Additional activities for application or remediation Solve each proportion. 1. 5 12 = 35 𝑛 2. 39 2 = 𝑛 4 3. 27 𝑛 = 9 5 4. 𝑛 4 = 24 6 5. 3 𝑛 = 24 40 Possible answer. 1. 5 x n=12 x 35 5n = 420 5 5 n = 84 2. 39 x 4 = 2 x n 156 = 2n 2 2 n = 78 3. 27 x 5 = n x 9 135 = 9n 9 9 n = 15 4. n x 6 = 4 x 24 6n = 96 6 6 n = 16 5. 3 x 40=n x 24 120 = 24n 24 24 n = 5 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter
  • 36.
    which my principal orsupervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers? I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive) M6NS-IIb-133 1. Find a missing term in an inverse proportion. 2. Solve for the missing term in an inverse proportion. 3. Be generous enough to care for the less fortunate and the needy. II. CONTENT Finding a missing term in an inverse proportion. III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 191 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 92 - 95 3. Textbook Pages 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal BEAM LG Grade 6 – Module 11, page 26. School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: WEEK 2, DAY 3 Quarter: SECOND
  • 37.
    B. Other Learning Resources Lesson Guidein Elementary Mathematics Grade 6 – Ateneo de Manila University, 2010 IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson`. Review on direct proportion. The teacher will show to the pupils the following problem involving direct proportion. 1. 𝑛 8 = 9 24 3. 9 4 = 𝑛 16 2. 6 𝑛 = 18 21 4. 5 3 = 25 𝑛 5. 𝑛 8 = 15 24 Possible answer. 1. 3 2. 7 3. 36 4. 15 5. 5 B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson. Ask pupils if they have visited some places that care for the physically handicapped, aged or orphans. Discuss the importance of these places, and the value of helping our less fortunate brothers. Today, we’re going to learn a new type of proportion; inverse proportion. Answers may vary. C. Presenting examples/ instances of the new lesson An orphanage has enough bread to feed 30 orphans for 12 days. If 10 more orphans are added, how many days will the same amount of bread last? Solution: (Orphans) (Days) 𝑂𝑟𝑖𝑔 𝑛𝑜. 𝑁𝑒𝑤 𝑛𝑜. = 𝑁𝑒𝑤 𝑛𝑜. 𝑂𝑟𝑖𝑔 𝑛𝑜. (Orphans) (Days) Therefore: 30 40 = 𝑛 12 40n = 30 x 12 40n = 360 n = 360 40 n = 9 Possible answer. N = 9
  • 38.
    Therefore, their supplyof bread will only last for 9 days if additional 10 orphans will be admitted to the orphanage. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 In inverse proportion, when one quantity increases, the other quantity decreases, and vice versa. We can also say that in an inverse proportion, the quantities change in opposite directions, that is, as one quantity increases, the other decreases. It takes Kevin 20 minutes to ride his bicycle at 20kph from home to the grocery store. To shorten his travel time to 16 minutes for the same distance, how fast should he cycle? Solution: Let the desired speed be x kph. Then we have the following table. Speed (kph) 20 X Time (in minutes) 20 16 Hence, 𝑥 20 = 20 16 16 * x = 20 * 20 - Give the cross product 16x = 20*20 - Divide both sides by 16 16𝑥 16 = 400 16 Answer: Kevin should cycle at 25kph. Notice that the faster the bike is driven, the less time is required to reach the destination. Possible answer. Kevin should cycle at 25kph. E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 The above problems are examples of inverse proportion. In an inverse proportion, one quantity increases as the other quantity decreases at the same rate and vice versa. Speed varies inversely with time of travel because the faster we go, the shorter time of travel.
  • 39.
    F. Developing mastery (Leads toFormative Assessment) Group Activity The teacher will present a problem on the board and let the group answer it. If 4 farmers can plow a 3-hectare land in 6 days, how long will 8 farmers do it? Possible answer. Solution: 4 8 = 𝑛 6 4 x 6 = 8 x n 24 8 = 8𝑛 8 n = 3 G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Solve the following problem in inverse proportion. 1. A house contractor has enough money to pay 8 workers for 15 days. If he adds 4 more workers, for how many days can he pay them at the same rate? 2. Five people can finish painting a wall in 5 hours. If only 2 people are available, how many hours do they have to work to finish the same job? Possible answer. 1. 8 12 = 𝑛 15 8 x 15 = 12 x n 120 = 12n 12 12 n = 10 2. 5:2::n:5 2 x n = 5 x 5 2n = 25 2 2 n = 12.5 hours H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson What is an inverse proportion? Possible answer. An inverse proportion is a proportion that when one quantity increases, the other quantity decreases, and vice versa. We can also say that in an inverse proportion, the quantities change in opposite directions, that is, as one quantity increases, the other decreases. I. Evaluating Learning A. Find the missing term in the following inverse proportion. 1. 40𝑘𝑝ℎ 𝑛 = 50 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 60𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 Possible answer: A. 1.
  • 40.
    2. 𝑛 90 = 8 20 3. 24 28 = 𝑛 7 4. 12 𝑛 = 6 10 B. Analyze theproblem and solve for the missing term. 1. A house contractor has enough money to pay 16 workers for 30 days. If he adds 8 more workers, for how many days can he pay them at the same rate? 40 x 60 =n x 50 2400 = 50n 50 50 n = 48 2. 20 x n = 90 x 8 20n = 720 20 20 n = 36 3. n x 28 = 7 x 24 28n = 168 28 28 n = 6 4. 12 x 10 = n x 6 120 = 6n 6 6 n = 20 B. 16:24::n:30 16 x 30 = 24 x n 480 = 24n 24 24 n = 20 J. Additional activities for application or remediation Solve for the value of n. 1. 16 𝑛 = 4 3 2. 𝑛 20 = 2 5 3. 15:30 = 12: n 4. n:125 = 3:5 5. n:16 = 5:4 Possible answer: 1. 16 x 3 = n x 4 48 = 4n 4 4 n = 12 2. n x 5 = 20 x 2 5n = 40 5 5 n = 8 3. 15:30::12:n 15 x n = 30 x 12 15n = 360 15 15
  • 41.
    n = 24 4.n:125 = 3:5 n x 5 = 125 x 3 5n = 375 5 5 n = 75 5. n:16 = 5:4 n x 4 = 16 x 5 4n = 80 4 4 n = 20 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or
  • 42.
    supervisor can help mesolve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 43.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards Thelearner demonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive) M6NS-IIb-133 1. Find a missing term in a partitive proportion. 2. Solve for the missing term in a partitive proportion. 3. Accept things given with an open heart. II. CONTENT Finding a missing term in a partitive division. III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 191 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 92 - 95 3. Textbook Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 LM p. 92 - 95 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal BEAM LG Grade VI Module 11 B. Other Learning Resources https://bit.ly/30yipsn IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson (5 minutes) What is a direct proportion? How would you set up the proportion? A direct proportion state as one quantity increases the other quantity increases at the same rate and vice versa. School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: Mathematics Teaching Date and Time: Week 2, Day 4 Quarter: 2nd Quarter
  • 44.
    B. Establishing a purposefor the lesson (10 minutes) The teacher will show 21 popsicle sticks. Ask: How are we going to divide it in to 3 groups if the popsicle sticks are not even? The teacher will show how and explain further as they go on to another examples. Answers may vary. C. Presenting examples/ instances of the new lesson (10 minutes) The teacher will example of partitive proportion. A class has 56 students. The ratio of girls to boys is 4:3. How many are girls? boys? What is asked in the problem? What are the given facts? What type of proportion is this? -The number of boys and girls in a class. - 56 students - Students will be divided in the ratio 4:3 D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 PARTITIVE PROPORTION The word "part" (noun) may be defined as a division or portion of a whole. As a verb it means to divide into parts. The word "partitive" is an adjective derived of the word "part" and it means restricted to a part of a whole. Partitive Proportion is a proportion applied to dividing a given quantity into two or more parts, which shall be in a given ratio, one to another. The terms of the given ratio or ratios, may be called the proportional terms. In a partitive proportion, a whole is divided into parts that are proportional to the given ratio. Possible answer.
  • 45.
    Steps in solvingpartitive proportions: • Add together all the given proportional terms. 4 + 3 = 7 • Multiply the total number of students by each proportional term. Divide the product by the sum of the proportional terms. (56 x 4) ÷ 7 = 32 (56 x 3) ÷ 7 = 24 Therefore, there are 32 girls and 24 boys in a class E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 What number we can multiply to 4 and 5 to get 72? 4:5 = 72 4n + 5n = 72 9n = 72 n = 72 ÷9 n = 8 4(8) + 5(8) = 72 32 + 40 = 72 Try to answer this! (By Pair) Find the missing terms in the partitive proportion 1. 5:3 = 56 2. 1:2:3 = 48 3. 3:4 = 3500 1. 5n = 35 3n = 21 2. n = 8 2n = 16 3n = 24 3. 3n = 1500 4n = 2000 F. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living The teacher will group the pupils and let them answer the following. 1. Two numbers are in the ratio of 3:4. Their sum is 105. Find the two numbers. 2. The sum of two numbers is 430. If the ratio is 4:6, find the smaller number. 3. The ratio of yellow flowers to white flowers is 5:6. If there were 88 flowers in all. How many are yellow/ white? Possible answer. 1. 3n = 45 4n = 60 2. 4n = 172 3. 5n = 40 6n = 48 G. Making generalizations What is partitive proportion? How do we find the missing terms? What are the steps? Possible answer.
  • 46.
    and abstractions about thelesson Partitive Proportion is a proportion applied to dividing a given quantity into two or more parts, which shall be in a given ratio, one to another. The terms of the given ratio or ratios, may be called the proportional terms Steps in solving partitive proportions: • Add together all the given proportional terms. • Multiply the total number of students by each proportional term. Divide the product by the sum of the proportional terms. H. Evaluating Learning (15 minutes) Solve and find the missing terms involving partitive proportion. 1. The ratio of the three sides of a triangle is 1:2:3. What are the measurements of each sides if the perimeter of the triangle is 120 cm? 2. Ronald draws three lines in different colors, red, yellow and green. Their lengths are in the ratio of 1:3:5. The yellow line is 18. How long is the green line? The red line? 3. The total weight of Maria, Juan and Jose is 112 kg. Their weight are in the ratio of of 3:1:4. What is Maria’s weight? How much heavier is Jose than Juan? Possible answer. 1. n= 20 2n = 40 3n = 60 2. red = 6 green = 30 3. Maria = 42 kg Jose = 56 kg Juan = 14 kg - 42kg I. Additional activities for application or remediation 1. Ruby, Diana and Jane are business partners. They agreed to divide their profits in the ratio of 1:2:3. How much should each receive if the total profit is 6000 pesos? 2. Divide a 72m rope into 3 with the ratio 1:2:5, What is the measure of each rope? Possible answer. 1. Ruby = Php1000 Diana = Php2000 Jane = Php3000 2. 9m, 18m, 45m V. REMARKS
  • 47.
    VI. REFLECTION A. No.of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 48.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learnerdemonstrate understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponent, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives/ LC Code Defines and illustrates the meaning of ratio and proportion using concrete or pictorial models. M6NS-IIb-131 Sets up proportions for groups of objects or numbers and given situations. M6NS-IIb-132 Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive) M6NS-IIb-133 II. CONTENT Find a missing term in a proportion (direct, inverse and partitive) III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages Mathematics Curriculum Guide for Grade 6 p. 191 2. Learner’s Materials Pages 21st Century Mathletes 6 TX p. 92 - 97 3. Textbook Pages 4. Additional Materials from Learning (LR) Portal Lesson Guide in Mathematics 6 p. 3012 - 307 B. Other Learning Resources IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson. Have a quick review on defining and illustrating the meaning of ratio and proportion, setting up proportions for groups of objects or numbers and given situations and finding the Pupils answer may vary. School: Grade Level: VI Teacher: Learning Area: MATHEMATICS Teaching Date and Time: Week 2 Day 5 Quarter: SECOND
  • 49.
    missing term ina direct, inverse and partitive proportion. B. Setting of Standards. Ask. What are the things that you need to do in answering the test? Possible answers. 1. Read and follow the directions. 2. Answer silently. 3. Cover your paper. 4. Don’t talk with your seatmates. 5. Don’t cheat. 6. If you’re done, review your answer. C. Giving of instruction and distribution of test papers. Read the instruction in answering the test. Distribute the test papers. D. Test Proper Supervise the pupils in answering the test. A. Find the missing term in a proportion. 1. 3 𝑛 = 9 15 2. 𝑛 6 = 6 4 3. 5 11 = 35 𝑛 4. 3:x = 6:10 5. 3:4 = 27:x B. Find the missing term in the following proportion (direct, inverse and partitive) 1. The ratio of the areas of 2 squares is 1:4. The area of smaller square is 36 cm square. How long is each side of the bigger square? 2. The ratio of 2 numbers is 3:5. The larger number is 30. What is the smaller number? 3. The ratio of cats to dogs is 6:5. There are 495 dogs and cats in a certain barangay. a. How many cats are there? b. How many dogs are there? Possible answer. A. 1. n = 5 2. n = 9 3. n = 77 4. x = 5 5. x = 36 B. 1. The area of the bigger square is 144 cm square. 2. The smaller number is 18. 3. a. There are 270 cats b. There are 225 dogs 4. a. 72
  • 50.
    4. Three numbersare in the ratio 2:5:7. If their sum is 504, what are the three numbers? a. First number b. Second number c. Third number b. 180 c. 252 E. Checking of Test paper and recording of scores. The teacher will post the answer on the board and record pupils score. Pupils will check the test papers. F. Additional activities for application or remediation V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my
  • 51.
    principal or supervisor can helpme solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 52.
    School Grade LevelSIX Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates Time Week 3 day 1 Quarter 2nd QUARTER 1.OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards : The learners demonstrate understanding of order of operations , ratio and proportion , percent, exponent and integers . M6NS-IIc-134 B. Performance Standards : The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations , ratio and proportion , percent, exponent and integers in mathematical problems and real life situations C. Learning Competencies / Objectives  Solve word problems involving direct proportion  Write proportions correctly  Practice diligence and industry 134 M6NS – IIc – 134 II. CONTENT : Solving Word Problem Involving Direct Proportion III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. CG in Mathematics 6 pp 190-191 2. Learners Material 21st Century Mathletes TB Job Cards, puzzle pieces 3. Additional Materials from Learning Resource portal Lesson Guide in Mathematics 6 ( ATENEO ) pp284-287 (uploaded at http://lrmds.deped.gov.ph) B. Other Learning Resources Activity cards, video presentation, slide deck presentation on direct proportion IV. PROCEDURES Teachers Activity Pupils Activity A. Reviewing previous lessons  Conduct a drill on finding the missing term in a proportion  One contestant will represent each group
  • 53.
     (group contest) Prepare set of flashcards written with 3: n = 6 :10 3 :4 = 27: N N:9 = 12;18  Set a standard  Answer orally and make one step forward if first to answer. B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson and set classroom rules.  Motivate the children by guessing what do the children doing in the picture (slide show)  Ask: which of the pictures can you do by yourself?  Listen to the teacher  Watch the video  Call some pupils to answer C. Presenting Examples/ Instances of new lessons Present this problem: Ben and Roy sell newspapers on weekends to earn extra money. For every 3 newspapers that Ben sells, Al sells 5. If Roy sold 15 newspapers, how many did Al sell? Analyze the problem: a) What is being asked? b) What are given? c) Illustrate the problem ?  Watch the video D. Discussing new concepts and Practicing new skills # 1  Illustrate the problem using blocks  Explain the illustration  Set up a proportion BEN 3 15 ROY 5 N BEN : ROY = BEN : ROY 3 : 5 = 15 : N  the teacher will explain that the proportion is called a direct proportion as the number of newspaper that Ben sells increases, the number of  Listen to the teacher
  • 54.
    newspapers that Roy sellsalso increases. E. Discussing new concepts and Practicing new skills #2  Present another problem and let each group work for the answer.  Give directions on what to do.  The sign on the store window says “magazine for sale, buy 3 take 2” How many magazines will I buy if I want to take 10 magazines for free?  Check if they were able to write the proportion correctly.  Work in group  Listen to the teacher .  Have them show their solution on their white board. F. Developing Mastery Leads to Formative Assessment # 3  Present another word problem and let them work by pair:  At the school canteen: a) 3 pcs of pad paper cost 45 cents, 21 pieces of pad paper cost _______ b) 4 colored pencil costs 25. c) 12 colored pencils cost _______ d) 2 boiled bananas cost 3.50 e) 10 boiled bananas cost ____  Let them show their solution on their tag board and be check by the teacher  Work by pair  Let them show their solution G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in Daily living  This is for an individual output. Let them read and solve the problem on their tag board.  Reporting method. Each group should have a representative to do the reporting of his /her output  Read and solve the word problem given  Reporting of his/ her output  The pupils are encourage to interact
  • 55.
     A) amotorist travels 275 km in 5 hours. How far can he travel in 9 hours at the same speed? Proportion _________ Answer ____________ B) Two buses can transport 130 people. how many buses are needed to transport 780? Proportion ________ Answer ___________ H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson  The teacher will ask the following questions:  What are the steps in solving problems involving Direct Proportions?  What must you remember when setting a direct Proportion? Answer the teacher’s question I. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give 5 item test. Read and solve. Write your answer on the blank. 1.At the rate of 3 items per 100 how much will 12 items costs? Proportion ______ Answer _________ 2) A car travels 72 km on 8 liters of gasoline. At the same rate, about how far can it travel on 11 liters of gasoline? Proportion ________ Answer ____________ 3) The ratio of duck eggs to chicken eggs in an egg store is 2 : 7 . If there are 312 duck eggs in a store, how many chicken eggs are there? Answer the activity in 1 2 sheet of paper
  • 56.
    Proportion ______________ Answer _________________ 4) The Ratio of men to women working for a construction company is 10 : 3 if there are 21 women in the construction company, how many men are there ? Proportion ________ Answer ___________ 5 ) The ratio of the Areas of 2 squares is 1 : 4 The area of the smaller square is 36 𝑐𝑚2 . How long is each side of the bigger square? Proportion _____________ Answer _______________ J. Additional activities for applications and remediation  Teacher prepares another set of activity.  Write a proportion for each problem, Then find the missing term: 1. The ratio of 2 numbers is 3 ; 5 . The larger number is 30. What is the smaller number? 2. There are 3 teachers to 125 pupils during the school program. How many teachers were there if there are 2500 pupils? The ratio of male teachers to female teachers in our school is 2 :9. If there are108 female teachers, how many teachers are male?  Answer the activity at home . V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% in the evaluation
  • 57.
    B. No. of learnerswho require additional activities for the remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did this work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which My principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I used / discover which I wish to share with other Teachers
  • 58.
    IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewingprevious lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Form 4 teams of equal number of members. With the use of a flash cards, the 4 teams will play the game, the members will have to write their answers on the board, the first to write the correct answer will have a corresponding point for their team Do: What is Asked for What is 25% of 30? Forty is what percent of 200? 18 is 30% of what number? 300 is 20% of what number? What is 52% of 250? Actively participates in the activity 7.5 0.20 60 1500 130 School Grade Level SIX Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates Time Week 3 day 1 Quarter 2nd QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner is able to demonstrate understanding of solving word problems on percent of increase and decrease B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge in solving word problems on percent of increase and decrease C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives Write the LC code for each Solves Percent problems such as percent of Increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked-up price) commission, sales tax, and simple interests. M6NS-IIe-144 Cognitive: Solve word problems involving finding the percent of increase/decrease on discounts Affective: Use Money Wisely Psychomotor: Write the solutions of word problems on percent of increase/decrease on discounts II. CONTENT Solving Word Problems Involving Increase and Decrease of Discounts III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics 2. Learner’s Materials pages 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes pp. 122-129 4Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal B. Other Learning Resources
  • 59.
    B. Establishing apurpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity The table shows the population of the two largest cities in the Philippines. By about what percent did the population in each city increase from 2000 to 2010? Which city had the greater percent of change in population? City 2000 2010 Manila 1 581 082 1 652 171 Quezon 2 173 831 2 761 720 (Guide the pupils to come up with a solution for the problem.) Unsatisfactory response C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Bar Graph: Reads and analysis the bar graph, takes down notes on the important data presented in the graph… D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Form 4 group, with equal number of members, each group will answer questions on how to find the percent of increase in the population of Manila and Quezon City for ten years. Guide the pupils to Present the questions: 1. Which City do you think have the highest increase of population for ten years? 2. What operation are you going to use to solve for the answer? 3. How are we going to solve for the increase in population of Manila City? Quezon City? Actively participates in the activity 0 500000 1000000 1500000 2000000 2500000 3000000 2000 2010 Manila and Quezon City Population Manila Quezon City
  • 60.
    Explain: To determine whichCity had the greater percent of change in its population, find the increase in population of each city in percent for us to compare them. Guide the pupils to perform the step by step procedure in solving the problem: Step 1: Subtract the total population of Manila City in 2000 from 2010 1 652 171 – 1 581 082 = 71 089 Step 2: Divide the difference with the total population of Manila City in year 2000 71 089 ÷ 1 581 082 = 0.045 (Rounded to the nearest thousandths) Step 3: Multiply the quotient by 100% 0.045 x 100% = 4.5% Manila’s percent of increase is about 4.5% Instruct the pupils to do the same steps in order for them to solve for the percent of change in population in Quezon City. Explain: A percent of change indicates how much a quantity increases or decreases with respect to the original amount. Whenever there is a change (increase or decrease), it can be expressed as a percent of increase or of a decrease. If the new amount or value is greater than the original amount or value, the percent of change is called percent of increase. If the new amount or value is less than the original amount or value, the percent of change is called percent of decrease. To find the percent of change, use the following formula: Percent of change= Amount of Increase or decrease Original Amount
  • 61.
    E. Discussing newconcepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Present the problem: At a local bookstore, Jane makes ₱500.00 a week working part-time. Last week, she received ₱550.00. what was the percent of increase in Jane’s salary last week? Ask the group to answer the following questions: 1. what is asked? 2. what are the given facts? Guide the pupils to find the answer, allow them to solve for the answer with the help of their groupmates. Each group will be given time to show their solution on the blackboard, they will have to explain their answers in front of the class. 3. what is the percent of change in Jane’s salary? The percent of change in Jane’s salary She earns ₱500.00 per week. Her salary is raised to ₱550.00 last week 10% F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Complete the table. For percent of change, indicate whether the change is an increase or a decrease. Round your answer to the nearest hundredths (if rounding is needed) Original Quantity New Quantity Difference Percent of Change 1. 10 20 2. 25 75 3. 42 24 4. 100 300 5. 89 33 6. 256 500 7. 667 243.25 8. 999 673.50 9. 1,245.50 900 10. 2,456.30 15,000 Pupils actively participates in the activity. Take turns in finding the answers on the presented table G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Solve Each problem:
  • 62.
    1. Due totyphoon, the harvest of cabbage in Baguio this month decreased from 125 tons to 80 tons, what is the percent of decrease? 2. the price of a kilo of galunggong increased from 73.00 to 85.00 per kilo. Find the percent of increase 3. there were 12 pupils in a Grade 6 class who failed in the first quarterly exam. In the last quarterly test, only 5 failed. What is the decrease in failure? H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How do you solve for percent of increase and decrease? Use the formula: Percent of change= Amount of Increase or decrease Original Amount I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Analyze and solve the problem: 1 following the raise in cost of health insurance by Philhealth, 250 out of 3000 employees of a company dropped their health coverage. What percent of the employees cancelled in their insurance? 2. A man invested an amount of money in a fund that earns 5% interest in a year. After how many years will his money be doubled? 3. A manager of a bank has an annual salary of ₱430,200.00. He also receives 8% raise in his annual salary. How much will be his new monthly salary next year? V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher? ___
  • 63.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. ContentStandards The learner demonstrates understanding in solving word problems involving increase/decrease on discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked up price. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of in solving word problems involving increase/decrease on discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked up price C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives Write the LC code for each Solves percent problems such as percent of increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked up price) commission, sales tax, and simple interests. M6NS-IIe-144 Cognitive: solve word problems involving finding the increase/decrease on discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price and marked up price Affective: Use money wisely Psychomotor: write the solution of word problems on percent of increase/decrease on discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price and marked up price II. CONTENT Solving Word problems involving Percent of Increase/Decrease in discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price and Mark up Price III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References
  • 64.
    IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewing previouslesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity The pupils of Lundagin Elementary School had an educational trip. One of the places they visited was Lukban, Quezon. While the group was going around the place the attention of some pupils was caught by the signs in one of the stalls. 15% off, 10% off, and 12% off. Can you tell what the signs mean? Unsatisfactory Response C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the problem: Allow the pupils to read the problem aloud. Then give them time to read it silently. Fritz is selling ethnic sandals from his father’s factory. One day, he decided to rent a stall in a market to sell his products. A costumer can get a 10% discount for each pair of ethnic sandals if he buys 3 pairs. Each cost ₱1,000.00, each exclusive of the 12% VAT (Value Added Tax). For every pair of sandals that Fritz can sell, he gets 40% of the profit and the rest will be used for the payment of other expenses. If he gets his sandals from his father’s factory at 650.00 each, how much is Fritz’s total gain amount if he sells 120 ethnic sandals? How much will be remitted to BIR for the 12% vat? Reads and analyze the problem Unsatisfactory response D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Let the pupils discuss the presented problem among their groupmates, guide them in finding the answer. 1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp., 332- 336 2. Learner’s Materials pages 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes, pp. 130-144 4Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal B. Other Learning Resources
  • 65.
    Ask: 1. What isasked in the problem? 2. What are the given data? 3. how are you going to solve the problem? Present the table: Selling price Rate of discoun t Discou nt Sale Price Total sales amount ₱1,000. 00 10% ₱100.0 0 ₱900.0 0 ₱108,0 00 Allow the pupils to analyze the table presented. Ask: 1. what is 10% of ₱1,000.00? 2. What is the formula in finding the 10% of ₱1000.00? 3. What is the formula in finding the sale price? If he gets his sandals from his father’s factory at 650.00 each, how much is Fritz’s total gain amount if he sells 120 ethnic sandals? How much will be remitted to BIR for the 12% vat? costumer can get a 10% discount for each pair of ethnic sandals if he buys 3 pairs. Each cost ₱1,000.00, each exclusive of the 12% VAT (Value Added Tax). For every pair of sandals that Fritz can sell, Unsatisfactory response ₱100.00 Multiply ₱1000.00 by 10% Subtract the amount of discount form the original price E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the problem: Lyka waited until after summer to buy a dress. She found one amounting to ₱2,500.00 and selling at a discount of 40%. How much did she save by waiting? How much did she pay for the dress? Ask: 1. what is asked in the problem? 2. what are the given data? 3. How are you going to solve the problem? Allow the pupils to solve the problem on the board Present the formulas in solving discount problems: a. discount (D) = Discount Rate x Original Price Reads the problem aloud then read it silently to analyze on how to solve the problem How much did Lyka save by waiting? How much did she pay for the dress? ₱2,500.00 original price of the dress and 40% discount Multiply 2,500 by 40% then subtract the answer form the original price Take down notes on their notebooks
  • 66.
    b. Original Price= Discount Discount Rate c. Discount Rate = Discount x 100% Original Price d. Sale Price = Original Price – Discount e. Sale Price = Original Price x (100% - Discount Price) F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Pair/Share Activity: Find the missing entries: Original Price Rate of Discount Discount Sale Price ₱220.00 10% ₱235.00 ₱47.00 ₱930.00 ₱874.20 Original Price Rate of Profit Profit Mark up Price ₱1,050.00 ₱1,470.00 ₱6,500.00 25% ₱9,000.00 ₱2,700.00 G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: Nancy was offered a house and lot with an original price of ₱3,500,000.00. the owner of the property wanted to sell it to raise funds for her daughter’s education. The data below was the basis for her decision to buy. Complete the data on the table to find out how much discount Nancy will get if the owner of the offers her 15% discount if he buys the property Original Price Rate of Discount Discount Sale Price ₱3,500,000 15%
  • 67.
    When Nancy reachedhome, she made a plan to have a marked-up price attracted to her costumers as shown below. Complete the table Original Price Rate of Profit Profit Mark up Price ₱3,500,000 25% Ask: 1. Who was offered a house and lot? 2. what was the original price of the property? 3. why did the owner of the property want to sell it? 4. how are you going to solve for the discount and the sale price? 5. how are you going to solve for the profit and the mark-up price? Nancy ₱3,500,000.00 To raise funds for her daughter’s education Multiply ₱3,500,000.00 by 15% then subtract the product from the original price to get the amount of the sale price Multiply ₱3,500,000.00 by 25% the add the product to the original price H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How to you solve for percent problems involving increase/decrease? Discounts? Original price? Rate of discount? Sale price? Mark up price? Use the formula a. discount (D) = Discount Rate x Original Price b. Original Price = Discount Discount Rate c. Discount Rate = Discount x 100% Original Price d. Sale Price = Original Price – Discount e. Sale Price = Original Price x (100% - Discount Price) I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Complete the following table: Selling Price Rate of Discount Discount Sale Price ₱500.00 20% ₱950.00 35% 25% ₱250.00 12% ₱574.20 ₱9,455.00 ₱3,782.00 Original Price Mark Up rate Mark Up Price Selling Price
  • 68.
    300.00 10% 1,055.00 12% 25%₱275.00 18% ₱1,712.60 11,563.00 ₱1,734.45 V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher? I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner is able to demonstrate understanding in solving word problems involving commission. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge in solving word problems involving commission. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives Write the LC code for each Solves Percent problems such as percent of Increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked-up price) commission, sales tax, and simple interests. M6NS-IIe-144 Cognitive: Solve word problems involving commission, Rate of Commission, total sales and total Income Affective: be financially sufficient to meet one’s needs, show industry
  • 69.
    IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewingprevious lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Drill on finding the rate, base or percentage Solve the following: 1. 3% of 600 = N 2. 50% of ___ is 45 3. What is 40% of 5? 4. 7% of 400 = N 5. 45 is N% of 50 18 90 2 28 90% B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Ask: What do you call the amount given to the sales agent after selling an item of the company aside from having a basic monthly salary? What does commission mean? Commission is the money you receive in selling something C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: Mr. Baclaya, a real estate agent, receives a 5% commission on a property he sells. What is his commission if he sold a lot at ₱1,040,000.00? Ask: How are you going to solve for Mr. Baclaya’s commission? Unsatisfactory response D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Pair-Share Activity: Psychomotor: Write the solutions of word problems on involving commission, Rate of Commission, total sales and total Income II. CONTENT Solving Word Problems Involving commission III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics 6, pp 336-339 2. Learner’s Materials pages 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes pp. 134-140 4Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal B. Other Learning Resources
  • 70.
    Present the problem: Bing,a teacher, is also a sales agent of her friend who owns an appliance store. She sells appliances with 5% commission. She asked herself the following questions: 1. if she sells a stand fan at ₱800.00, how much is her commission? 2. if she sells 5 stand fans, how much is her total sales and total income? 3. if she sells a tv set at ₱32,000.00 and receives a commission of ₱3,200, what is the rate of her commission? Ask: 1.How are you going to solve for Bing’s commission in if she were able to sell a stand fan for ₱800.00? 2. How are you going to solve for Bing’s total sales and total income if she were able to sell 5 stand fans? 3. How are you going to solve for Bing’s rate of commission if she were able to sell a tv set worth 32,000.00 with a commission of 3,200.00? Guide the pupils on how to solve the problem. Discuss: To answer the question on how much is Bing’s commission in selling a stand fan at ₱800.00 with 5% commission, use the formula: Total sale x commission rate Ask: 1. What is Bing’s total sales in selling a stand fan? 2. what is her commission rate? 3. how are we going to find the amount of commission? 4. How much is Bing’s commission? Discuss: To find Bing’s total sales and total income in selling 5 stand fans use the formula: Commission ÷ commission rate Ask: 1. How many stand fans did Bing sold? 2. How are you going to solve for Bing’s total sales? 3. How much is her total sales? 4. How are you going to solve for Bing’s total income? Reads the problem aloud and read it silently for the second time for them to analyze. Works in pair, discusses among themselves how to solve the problem. Unsatisfactory response Unsatisfactory response Unsatisfactory response ₱800.00 5% Multiply ₱800.00 by 5% ₱40.00 5 ₱800.00 x 5 ₱800.00 x 5 = ₱4,000.00 Bing’s commission in selling a stand fan for ₱800.00 with a
  • 71.
    Discuss: In finding Bing’scommission rate in selling a tv set for ₱32,000.00 with a ₱3,200.00 commission, use the formula: Commission x 100% Total sales Ask: 1. How are you going to solve for Bing’s rate of commission in selling a tv set? 2. What is Bing’s rate of commission in selling the tv set? 5% is ₱40.00. Since Bing was able to sell 5 stand fans, she would have ₱200.00 income Divide 3,200 by 32,000 then multiply the quotient by 100% 10% E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Form 5 groups, each group will have to complete the activity presented below. Give them time to discuss their answers in front of the class Present the Problem: Sixto works as a sales agent in an appliance center with a basic monthly salary of 12,000.00. he is given 8% commission on all items he sells above 50,000.00. At the end of the month, he needs to know how much money he has. He prepares a table and solves. Complete the table: Total sales Above 50,000 Rate of commission Commission Total Income 275,000.00 8% 275,000.00 20,250.00 Actively participates in the activity Discusses among their group mates on how to solve for Sixto’s rate of commission, commission and total sales F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Complete the table: Total Sales Rate of Commission Commission ₱5,000.00 5% ₱12,500.00 8% 14% ₱2,864.12 15% ₱8,350.50 ₱112,545.00 ₱28,136.25 G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Solve the Problem: 1. Mr. Gomez sells used cellphones. His commission for every cellphone sold is 20%. If his total sale is ₱33,850.00, how much is his total commission? Solves the problem among their groupmates
  • 72.
    2. Mrs. Vargasis a car sales agent who earns 5,850.00 monthly plus 4% commission on all her sales. During a month, she sold a car worth ₱740,000.00. how much is her total earnings? 3. Jim, a sales agent, has an income of ₱30,000.00 and receives a commission of 5% on all sales above ₱75,000.00. If his basic salary is ₱13,500.00, what is his total sales? 4. Manuel, a sales agent, has a basic salary of ₱18,000.00 and a commission of 20% on all sales above H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How to you solve for commission? Rate of commission? Total sales and total income? Use the formula: Total sale x commission rate Commission ÷ commission rate Commission x 100% Total sales I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Complete the Table: Total Sales Rate of Commission Commission ₱5,000.00 5% ₱12,560.00 8% 14% ₱2,864.12 15% ₱8,350.50 ₱112,545.00 ₱28,136.25 V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 73.
    IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewingprevious lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner is able to demonstrate understanding in solving word problems involving simple interests. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge in solving word problems involving simple interests. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives Write the LC code for each Solves Percent problems such as percent of Increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked-up price) commission, sales tax, and simple interests. M6NS-IIe-144 Cognitive: Solve word problems involving sales tax and simple interests. Affective: be tax conscious, being punctual in paying one’s tax, be truthful in paying one’s tax Psychomotor: Write the solutions of word problems on involving simple interest. II. CONTENT Solving Word Problems Involving Simple Interests III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics 6, pp 344-347 2. Learner’s Materials pages 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes pp. 134-140 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal B. Other Learning Resources
  • 74.
    B. Establishing apurpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Who has seen a bank book? What can you see in it? Does it have an interest? What about the principal? C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: Rhoda has a deposit of ₱5,000.00 in a savings account for 2 years. If the bank pays a simple interest at the rate of 6%, how much interest will she receive? Ask: 1. Who has a savings account in a bank? 2. How much is he deposit? 3. If you were Rhoda will you open a savings account in the bank? Why? How will you solve for the interest Rhoda will receive? Rhoda ₱5,000.00 Yes, to save money Unsatisfactory response D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the problem: Jaypee opens a savings account in National Commercial Bank where the money earns 1.5% interest per year. If he has ₱7,500.00 in his account, how much interest will the money earn in one year? Ask: 1. How much money does Jaypee have in his savings account? 2. How much is the interest offered by the bank? 3. How will you solve for the interest of Jaypee’s money in one year? Discuss: To find the answer for the problem, present the formula: Interest = Principal Amount x Rate x Time (I = P x R x T) Ask: 1. How much money does Jaypee have in his savings account? Reads the problem aloud and read it silently to analyze ₱7,500.00 1.5% Unsatisfactory response ₱7,500.00
  • 75.
    Say: ₱7, 500.00 isthe principal amount, the principal amount is the money deposited, invested or borrowed Ask: 2. How much is the interest offered by the bank? Say: 1.5% is the rate, rate is the percent added to the principal amount invested or borrowed, and 1 year is the length of time the money has been deposited in the bank. Present the solution: I = ₱7,500.00 x 1.5 x 1 I = ₱7,500 x 0.015 x 1 I = ₱112.05 Say: So Jaypee’s ₱7,500.00 will earn ₱112.50 in one year 1.5% E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: Coach Bernard borrowed money from his friend at 8% simple interest. If he paid an interest of ₱480.00 after 18 months, how much money did he borrow? Ask: 1. How much interest did Coach Bernard paid for the money he borrowed from his friend? 2. How much was the rate of interest? 3. How will you solve for the principal amount? Discuss: To solve for the principal amount, use the formula: Principal amount = Interest ÷ Rate x Time Ask: 1. How much interest did Coach Bernard paid for the money he borrowed from his friend? Say: ₱480.00 is the interest, it is the amount of money earned/paid for using another’s money over a period of time 2. How much was the rate of interest? Present the Solution: Reads the problem aloud and read it silently to analyze ₱480.00 8% Unsatisfactory response ₱480.00 8%
  • 76.
    P = ₱480.00÷ 8% x 1.5 P = ₱480.00 ÷ 0.12 P = ₱4,000.00 Coach Bernard borrowed ₱4,000.00 from his friend F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group activity: Give each group strips of paper with a problem, they have to solve the problems for themselves, then they will have to present their answers in front of the class: 1. Nena borrowed ₱75,000.00 from a credit union. At the end of 2 years she has to pay back 8% interest. How much is the interest? 2. Ricardo’s father borrows ₱90,000.00 from a financial institution. At the end of 2 ¾ years he has to pay an interest rate of 20%. How much will he pay back the financial institution? 3. Rolando has ₱20,000.00 in his savings account. If the rate of interest is 4 ½% a year. How much interest does his money earn? How much money will he have in all? 4. Yoly paid back the credit union ₱21,000.00. if she was given 10% interest 4 years ago, how much did she borrowed? Actively participates in the activity Group reporting G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Solve the Problem: 1. Sally deposits ₱22,000.00 in her savings account. If the bank pays 1.5% interest per year, how much will she receive at the end of the year? 2. Shuyen wanted to save some money. She deposited ₱300.00 in a bank which pays 0.5% interest per annum. After nine months, she needed the money to buy some gifts. How much will she be able to get if she widraws all her money from the bank? H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How do you solve for the simple interest? Rate of interest and time? Use the formula Interest = Principal Amount x Rate x Time (I = P x R x T)
  • 77.
    Principal amount =Interest ÷ Rate x Time I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Complete the Table: Principal Amount Rate Time Simple Interest ₱8,000.00 1% 1 year ₱12,000.00 2% 2 years ₱15,500.00 5% 18 months ₱21,680.00 0.5% 5 years ₱24,742.00 1.25% 9 months ₱4,200.00 4 years ₱252.00 ₱6,700.00 6 months ₱73.70 0.25 years ₱120.00 3.5 years ₱15,000.00 ₱49,900.00 ₱3,742.50 V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 78.
    IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewingprevious lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity (require pupils to bring a sample of sales invoice from a store e.g. official receipt from Gaisano) Ask: Have you been able to buy goods in a store? What do you receive after buying goods from a store aside from your change? Examine the receipt you are holding. What can you see? Is there any amount you paid for tax? How much did you pay for tax? Yes Receipt The amount paid and the individual amount of each good bought Yes (the amount of tax paid depends on how much I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner is able to demonstrate understanding in solving word problems involving sales tax. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge in solving word problems involving sales tax. C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives Write the LC code for each Solves Percent problems such as percent of Increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked-up price) commission, sales tax, and simple interests. M6NS-IIe-144 Cognitive: Solve word problems involving sales tax and simple interests. Affective: be tax conscious, being punctual in paying one’s tax, be truthful in paying one’s tax Psychomotor: Write the solutions of word problems on involving sales tax II. CONTENT Solving Word problems involving sales tax III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics 6, pp 336-339 2. Learner’s Materials pages 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes pp. 134-140 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal B. Other Learning Resources
  • 79.
    C. Presenting examples/instancesof the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the problem: A group of Grade 6 pupils ate in a fast food restaurant. If their orders totaled ₱750.00 plus a 12% VAT, how much is the total amount they paid to the cashier? Unsatisfactory response D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: Nena intends to buy a car. She thinks of the tax the government imposes. She made a table showing the rate of sales tax imposed as shown: Item Selling Price Rate of Sales Tax Sales tax Total cost of the item Brand new car ₱2,500,000 6% Slightly Used car ₱1,900,000 ₱2,090,00 Second hand car 4% ₱20,000 Guide the pupils to solve for the missing entry in the table shown. Ask: 1. How are you going to solve for the rate of sales tax and the total cost of the brand-new car? Discuss: In finding the sales tax and the total cost of a brand- new car, use the formula: Total amount of product x rate of sales tax Ask: 1. How much is the cost of a brand-new car? 2. What is the rate of sales tax? Discuss: To find the sales tax of the brand-new car, multiply ₱2,500,000.00 by 6%, so you get ₱150,000.00. Ask: How much is the sales tax? To find the total cost of the brand-new car, add the sales tax to the selling price. ₱2,500,000.00 + ₱150,000.00 = ₱2,650,000.00 Ask: Unsatisfactory response ₱2,500,000.00 6% ₱150,000.00
  • 80.
    How much isthe total cost of the item? Ask: How are you going to solve for the rate of sales tax and sales tax of a slightly used car? Discuss: To find the rate of sales tax and the sales tax use the formula: Total cost of the item – Selling price = sales tax Sales tax ÷ selling price = rate of sales tax Ask: 1. how much is the total cost of a slightly used car? 2. how much is the selling price? 3. if we are going to subtract the total cost and the selling price of the slightly used car? How much is the sales tax? 4. if we are going to divide the sales tax and the selling price of the slightly used car, what is the rate of sales tax? Ask: How are you going to solve for the selling price and total cost of the second hand car? Discuss: To find the selling price and the total cost of the second hand car, use the formula: Sales tax ÷ rate of sales tax = selling price Selling price + sales tax = total cost of the item Ask: 1. How much is the selling price of the second hand car? If we are going to divide ₱20,000.00 by 4% what is the answer? 2. how much is the total cost of a second hand car? ₱2,650,000.00 Unsatisfactory response ₱2,090,000.00 ₱1,900,000.00 ₱190,000.00 0.1 or 10% Unsatisfactory response ₱500,000.00 ₱520,000.00 E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Guide the pupils in completing the table, ask them to follow the steps discussed on how to solve for the selling price, sales tax, rate of sales tax and the total cost of the item. Have each group discuss their answers in front of the class. Selling price Rate of sales tax Sales tax Total cost ₱200.00 3% ₱680.00 ₱34.00 ₱795.00 Actively participates in the activity. Group reporting
  • 81.
    ₱750.00 ₱795.00 ₱2,500.00 8% 6%₱300.00 F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Solve the problem: 1. Mr. Foronda bought a picture frame for ₱510.00 inclusive for 6% tax. How much is the tax? What is the selling price of the picture frame? 2. A sales tax for an item is ₱420.00 or 6%. How much is the total cost and the selling price of the item? G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Solve the problem: 1. A lady’s bag worth ₱1,500.00 has a sales tax of 6%. How much will the buyer pay for the bag? 2. a food item has a sales tax of ₱22.40 or 4%. How much is the selling price of the item? How much is the total cost paid by the costumer? 3. The sales tax of an item is ₱125.00. The cost is ₱3,125.00. What is the rate of sales tax? How much is the selling price? H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How do you solve for the sales tax? Rate of sales tax? And selling price? Use the formula: Total amount of product x rate of sales tax Total cost of the item – Selling price = sales tax Sales tax ÷ selling price = rate of sales tax Sales tax ÷ rate of sales tax = selling price Selling price + sales tax = total cost of the item I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Fill the data to complete the table: Selling Price Rate of sales tax Sales tax Total Costs
  • 82.
    ₱1,500.00 3% ₱48.00 ₱4,500.006% ₱4,770.00 ₱900.00 4% ₱9,000.00 ₱720.00 ₱600.00 ₱10,600.00 ₱18,000.00 ₱540.00 ₱80,500.00 2% 4% ₱826.80 ₱35,000.00 8% ₱45.00 ₱795.00 V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 83.
    IV.PROCEDURES: A. Reviewing previouslesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity The pupils of Lundagin Elementary School had an educational trip. One of the places they visited was Lukban, Quezon. While the group was going around the place the attention of some pupils was caught by the signs in one of the stalls. 15% off, Unsatisfactory Response I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding in solving word problems involving increase/decrease on discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked up price. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of in solving word problems involving increase/decrease on discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked up price C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives Write the LC code for each Solves percent problems such as percent of increase/decrease (discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price, marked up price) commission, sales tax, and simple interests. M6NS-IIe-144 Cognitive: solve word problems involving finding the increase/decrease on discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price and marked up price Affective: Use money wisely Psychomotor: write the solution of word problems on percent of increase/decrease on discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price and marked up price II. CONTENT Solving Word problems involving Percent of Increase/Decrease in discounts, original price, rate of discount, sale price and Mark up Price III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp., 332-336 2. Learner’s Materials pages 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes, pp. 130-144 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal B. Other Learning Resources
  • 84.
    10% off, and12% off. Can you tell what the signs mean? C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the problem: Allow the pupils to read the problem aloud. Then give them time to read it silently. Fritz is selling ethnic sandals from his father’s factory. One day, he decided to rent a stall in a market to sell his products. A costumer can get a 10% discount for each pair of ethnic sandals if he buys 3 pairs. Each cost ₱1,000.00, each exclusive of the 12% VAT (Value Added Tax). For every pair of sandals that Fritz can sell, he gets 40% of the profit and the rest will be used for the payment of other expenses. If he gets his sandals from his father’s factory at 650.00 each, how much is Fritz’s total gain amount if he sells 120 ethnic sandals? How much will be remitted to BIR for the 12% vat? Reads and analyze the problem Unsatisfactory response D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Let the pupils discuss the presented problem among their groupmates, guide them in finding the answer. Ask: 1. What is asked in the problem? 2. What are the given data? 3. how are you going to solve the problem? Present the table: If he gets his sandals from his father’s factory at 650.00 each, how much is Fritz’s total gain amount if he sells 120 ethnic sandals? How much will be remitted to BIR for the 12% vat? costumer can get a 10% discount for each pair of ethnic sandals if he buys 3 pairs. Each cost ₱1,000.00, each exclusive of the 12% VAT (Value Added Tax). For every pair of sandals that Fritz can sell, Unsatisfactory response
  • 85.
    Selling price Rate of discount Discount Sale Price Total sales amount ₱1,000.00 10%₱100.00 ₱900.00 ₱108,000 Allow the pupils to analyze the table presented. Ask: 1. what is 10% of ₱1,000.00? 2. What is the formula in finding the 10% of ₱1000.00? 3. What is the formula in finding the sale price? ₱100.00 Multiply ₱1000.00 by 10% Subtract the amount of discount form the original price E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the problem: Lyka waited until after summer to buy a dress. She found one amounting to ₱2,500.00 and selling at a discount of 40%. How much did she save by waiting? How much did she pay for the dress? Ask: 1. what is asked in the problem? 2. what are the given data? 3. How are you going to solve the problem? Allow the pupils to solve the problem on the board Present the formulas in solving discount problems: a. discount (D) = Discount Rate x Original Price b. Original Price = Discount Discount Rate c. Discount Rate = Discount x 100% Original Price d. Sale Price = Original Price – Discount e. Sale Price = Original Price x (100% - Discount Price) Reads the problem aloud then read it silently to analyze on how to solve the problem How much did Lyka save by waiting? How much did she pay for the dress? ₱2,500.00 original price of the dress and 40% discount Multiply 2,500 by 40% then subtract the answer form the original price Take down notes on their notebooks F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Pair/Share Activity: Find the missing entries: Original Price Rate of Discount Discount Sale Price ₱220.00 10% ₱235.00 ₱47.00 ₱930.00 ₱874.20
  • 86.
    Original Price Rate of Profit Profit Mark up Price ₱1,050.00₱1,470.00 ₱6,500.00 25% ₱9,000.00 ₱2,700.00 G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: Nancy was offered a house and lot with an original price of ₱3,500,000.00. the owner of the property wanted to sell it to raise funds for her daughter’s education. The data below was the basis for her decision to buy. Complete the data on the table to find out how much discount Nancy will get if the owner of the offers her 15% discount if he buys the property Original Price Rate of Discount Discount Sale Price ₱3,500,000 15% When Nancy reached home, she made a plan to have a marked-up price attracted to her costumers as shown below. Complete the table Original Price Rate of Profit Profit Mark up Price ₱3,500,000 25% Ask: 1. Who was offered a house and lot? 2. what was the original price of the property? 3. why did the owner of the property want to sell it? 4. how are you going to solve for the discount and the sale price? 5. how are you going to solve for the profit and the mark-up price? Nancy ₱3,500,000.00 To raise funds for her daughter’s education Multiply ₱3,500,000.00 by 15% then subtract the product from the original price to get the amount of the sale price Multiply ₱3,500,000.00 by 25% the add the product to the original price H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How to you solve for percent problems involving increase/decrease? Discounts? Original price? Rate of discount? Sale price? Mark up price? Use the formula a. discount (D) = Discount Rate x Original Price
  • 87.
    b. Original Price= Discount Discount Rate c. Discount Rate = Discount x 100% Original Price d. Sale Price = Original Price – Discount e. Sale Price = Original Price x (100% - Discount Price) I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Complete the following table: Selling Price Rate of Discount Discount Sale Price ₱500.00 20% ₱950.00 35% 25% ₱250.00 12% ₱574.20 ₱9,455.00 ₱3,782.00 V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 88.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. ContentStandards: The learner is able to demonstrate understanding in creating problems involving percentage with reasonable answers. B. Performance Standards: The learner is able to apply knowledge creating problems involving percentage with reasonable answers. C. Learning Competencies/Objectives: Creates problems involving percent with reasonable answers M6NS-II-e-144 Cognitive: create word problems involving percent with reasonable answers. Affective: Use Money Wisely Psychomotor: solve created word problems involving percent with reasonable answers. II. CONTENT: Creating Word Problems (with reasonable answers) involving percent III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References: 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics 2. Leaner’s Materials Pages: 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes pp. 122-129 4. Materials: Powerpoint Presentation Manila Paper Pentel pen 5. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal: B. Other Learning Resources IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
  • 89.
    What is yourplan/ dream in the future? How do you plan to achieve it? Ask: Is it important to make plan before doing any activity? Ask: Does making a plan contribute in achieving one’s goal? Why? Why not? Lead the pupils to appreciate planning ahead of time in any activity. Yes yes C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present this problem to the class: Ms. Losinio have 40 pupils. She decided to have a general cleaning of her room. She assigned 25% to sweep the floor, 20% to wipe the tables and blackboards, 40% to fix the books in the cabinet and 15% to arrange the chairs. How many pupils were assigned to arrange the chairs? Guide the pupils in solving the problem. Ask: 1. What is asked in the problem? 2. What are given? 3. What is the operation to be used? 4. What is the number sentence? 5. What is the answer? Does it make sense? How many pupils were assigned to arrange the chairs? 40 pupils 25% to sweep the floor 20% to wipe the tables 40% to fix the books 15% to arrange the chairs Multiplication D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Divide the class into 5 groups. The task of the pupils is to help each other solve the problem. Give them enough time to perform the task. After all the groups have finished, ask them to post their output on the board and let them discuss their solutions. Actively participates in the activity E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
  • 90.
    Divide the classinto four groups. Encourage the groups to create a problem similar to the one given. F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Create a problem using the given data: 1. 1.5 % interest, ₱4,000.00 money saved 2. a pair of jeans at ₱550.00 with 35% discount 3. 2 books for ₱350.00 each with a sales tax of 6% G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Create a problem using the given data: 1. A second hand bag sold for ₱1,500.00 with a total cost of ₱1,700.00 2. A house and lot with an original price of ₱1,500,000.00 with a 15% discount. 3. A brand-new car with a ₱200,000.00 discount and a sale price of ₱2,300,000.00 H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How do you create problems involving percentage with reasonable answers? I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Directions: Create a problem using the given information. 1. 50 – numbers of pupils in Grade 5 – Jose Rizal 12% - failed in the quarter examination in Mathematics V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 91.
    IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewingprevious lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Let the pupils describe the pattern shown. Let them draw the next picture in the pattern Ask: Two Eight I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of exponent and base in exponential notations B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of exponent and base in exponential notations C. Learning Competencies/ Objectives Write the LC code for each Describes the exponent and the base in a number expressed in exponential notation. M6NS-IIf-146 Cognitive: Give the meaning of exponent and base Affective: Appreciate beauty Be clean and orderly Psychomotor: Evaluate an expression in solving exponent and base II. CONTENT Identify the exponent and base in a number expressed in exponential notation III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages Lesson guide in Mathematics Grade 6, pp. 6 2. Learner’s Materials pages 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes, pp. 174-179 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal B. Other Learning Resources
  • 92.
    How many squaresare there in the 2nd figure? How may squares are there in the 3rd figure? What is the rule in finding the number of squares in the next figure? How many squares will be in the fifth figure? Unsatisfactory response Unsatisfactory response B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Teacher will write 4 x 4 x 4 on the blackboard Ask: 1. how many times did we multiply 4 by itself? 2. what is the answer if we multiply 4 3 times by itself? The teacher will further discuss that this way of multiplying number by itself is known as exponential notation. The teacher will write the equation on the board 4 x 4 x 4 =43 The teacher will further explain that 4 x 4 x 4 can be written as 43 where 4 is the base and 3 is the exponent. 3 times 64 C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the problem: Cindy saved ₱2.00 on Monday, ₱4.00 on Tuesday, ₱8.00 on Wednesday, ₱16.00 on Thursday and so on. If the pattern continues, how much will she save on Sunday? How much will her total savings be in a week? Ask: what do you observe in the pattern? Pupils will have to read the problem aloud, and read it silently for the second time so that they can analyze the presented problem D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Further discuss the problem by asking the following questions: a. what is asked in the problem? b. how will you solve for question number 1? c. how will you solve for question number 2? Explain: the pattern shows that Cindy was able to save twice as much as she saved the previous day. In this case she will be able to save ₱32.00 on Friday, ₱64.00 on Saturday, therefore Cindy will save ₱128.00 on Sunday. Show the pattern on the board: Monday: 21 = 2 Tuesday: 22 = 4 How much will Cindy save on Sunday How much will her total savings be in a week? Unsatisfactory response Unsatisfactory response Pupils will have to take down notes
  • 93.
    Wednesday: 23 = 8 Thursday:24 = 16 Friday: 25 = 32 Saturday: 26 = 64 Sunday: 27 = 128 Explain the pattern on how to get the total money saved on Friday, Saturday, and Sunday. Ask the pupils how many times did they have to multiply 2 by itself to get the total amount of money saved by Cindy. Let them identify the exponent and the base form the equation presented. Ask the pupils to add up all Cindy’s savings from Monday to Sunday, To get the total amount saved on Friday, we have to multiply 2 by itself 5 times… E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Pair-share Activity: Present the Problem: The side of a small cutout square is 7cm. What is its area? Ask: 1.Write an expression about the problem. 2. What is the equation? 3. Can you write 7 x 7 in another way? How? 4.What do you call 7 in 72 ? 2 in 72 ? Explain: The Exponent tells how many times the base is used as a factor to form a product. The Base is the factor which is to be multiplied by itself the number of times indicated in the exponent to obtain the product. Present the Table: Exponential Expression Read Meaning & Value 42 Four to the second power, four squared 4 x 4 = 16 23 Two to the third power, two cubed 2 x 2 x 2 = 8 74 Seven to the fourth power 7 x 7 x 7 x 7 = 2401 Pupils will analyze the presented problem… Exponential notation Yes… 7 x 7 can also be written as 72 7 is the base, 2 is the exponent Pupils will have to take down notes
  • 94.
    Explain that thetable shows some example of exponential expression, how to read it and its value F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: The pupils will have to complete the table by writing the base, exponent, meaning, value and the equation of the given exponential expression. Expres sion Bas e Expon ent Mean ing Value Equation 53 34 63 25 105 93 82 Actively participates in the activity G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Board Work: Select pupils to solve and answer the equations on the board A. Rewrite each of the following using exponents. Determine the numerical value. 1. second power of seven 2. fourth power of 5 3. 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 = 4. 8 x 8 x 8 = 5. 15 x 15 = Actively participates in the activity 72 54 26 83 152 H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity What is an exponent? base? The exponent tells how many times the base is taken as a factor. The base is the bottom part of anything. It is the number used as the factor. I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity A. Evaluate 1.) 6 x 22 + 7 2.) 3 x 72 + 5 x 52 3.) 92 - 72 + 10 4.) 25 x 52 - 32 x 43 5.) (10 + 2)2 - 102
  • 95.
    J. Additional activitiesfor applications or remediations Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Solve the following problems: 1. Jordan is enlarging a photo on his computer screen. The photo starts at 4 cm wide. Each time he enlarges the photo, the width is doubled. Jordan enlarged the photo 4 times. What is the final width of the photo on his computer screen? V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 96.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. ContentStandards: The learner demonstrates understanding in giving the value of numbers expressed in exponential notation B. Performance Standards: The learner is able to apply knowledge in giving the value of numbers expressed in exponential notation C. Learning Competencies/Objectives: Gives the value of numbers expressed in exponential notation M6NS-IIf-147 Cognitive: Evaluate an expression involving exponents Affective: Show love, care, concern for people with terminal illness Psychomotor: Write numbers in exponent forms/solve for the value of numbers expressed in exponential notation II. CONTENT: III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References: 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages: Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 2. Leaner’s Materials Pages: 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathematics, pp 174-179 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal: B. Other Learning Resources IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Game: Can you find a pair of numbers whose sum is equal to their product? Example: 2 + 2 = 2 x 2 = 4 Expected answer: 3 + 1.5 = 3 x 1.5 = 4.5 5 + 1.25 = 5 x 1.25 = 6.25 11 + 1.1 = 11 x 1.1 = 12.1 B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Let us see how well you remember your multiplication table? Pair the pupils to do the activity. Actively participates in finding the product of the given equations.
  • 97.
    Find the productsof the following. See if you can get them all correctly. 1) 121 x 121 2) 89 x 89 3) 50 x 50 x 50 4) 20 x 20 x 20 x 20 5) 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Presents the following equations: Find the product of each of the following. 1) 100 x 100 2) 35 x 35 3) 9 x 9 x 9 4) 4 x 4 x 4 x 4 5) 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 Actively participates in finding the product of the given equations. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Asks the pupils to look closely at the numbers used in each expression. Let the pupils answer the questions orally . A. 100 x 100 Are the factors identical? What are the factors used? How many times is the number used as a factor? What operation is used repeatedly? B. 35 x 35: Are the factors identical? What are the factors used? How many times is the number used as a factor? Are the operations the same? What operation is used repeatedly? C. 9 x 9 x 9: Use the same questions above to answer letters C to J. D. 4 x 4 x 4 x 4: E. 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2: F. 121 x 121 G. 89 x 89 H. 50 x 50 x 50 I. 20 x 20 x 20 x 20 J. 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 Yes 100 2 times Multiplication Yes 35 2 times Yes multiplication E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2
  • 98.
    Teacher’s Activity Pupil’sActivity How many times is the number used as a factor? Are your answers to each of the three questions the same from Example A to E? Since all the answers are the same, then we can rewrite the five examples as equations. 1) 100 x 100 = 1002 We can write the first expression by using 2) 35 x 35 = 352 3) 9 x 9 x 9 = 93 4) 4 x 4 x 4 x 4 = 44 of 5) 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 = 25 We can write the first expression by using the factor 100 as the base and the exponent (2) which indicates the number of times the base is used as a factor. Are 1002 , 352 , 93 , 44 , and 25 expressions? What do you observe with these new expressions? In 1002 , both 100 and 2 are numbers. How is each one written? This is known as superscript Yes, they are expressions since each one represents a number. The number 100 is written in normal font size, but the number 2 is written in a smaller font size and placed above the right side of 100 F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: You sent an email to 3 of your friends, each of your 3 friends sent the email to 3 more friends. And each of those friends sent it to 3 other friends, and so on. Complete the table: Stage Email sent as a power Value of power 1 31 3 2 32 9 3 ? ? 4 ? ? 5 ? ? Guide the pupils in completing the table by asking the following questions: 1. What is asked? 2. What are the given facts? Actively participates in the activity G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
  • 99.
    Present the problem: LastMonday, Jenny invited 2 friends to her birthday party. The next day, Tuesday, each of her 2 friends invited 2 other friends. This pattern continued until Friday. How many friends were invited on Friday? How many friends were invited all in all? Ask: 1. What is asked? 2. what are the given facts? 3. how are you going to solve the problem? Guide the pupils in solving the problem. The total number of friends invited Jenny invited 2 friends to her birthday party. The next day, Tuesday, each of her 2 friends invited 2 other friends. This pattern continued until Friday. Use multiplication, multiply 2 by itself 5 times H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How do we find the value of numbers in an exponential notation? Multiply the base by itself the number of times indicated by the exponent I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity A. Complete the following sentences: 1) In 53 , _____ is the base and ______ is the exponent. 2) 62 is the exponential form of 6 x _____. 3) 144 is the ___ power of 12. 4) 22 means 2 multiplied by _. 5)74 means _____ is multiplied by itself four times. B. Give the value of the ff: 1)63 = 2)45 = 3)27 = 4)92 = 5)74 = V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___
  • 100.
    F. Which ofmy teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 101.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. ContentStandards: The learner demonstrates understanding evaluating expression with two different operations with or without exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols B. Performance Standards: The learner is able to apply knowledge evaluating expression with two different operations with or without exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols C. Learning Competencies/Objectives: Interprets and explains the grouping, exponent, multiplication, division, addition, subtraction (GEMDAS) rule M6NS-IIf-148 Cognitive: Evaluate an expression with two different operations with or without exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols Affective: be helpful, clean and orderly Psychomotor: write the solution in evaluating the expression II. CONTENT: Order of Operations Involving Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References: 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages: Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp. 2. Leaner’s Materials Pages: 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes, pp.180-185 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal: B. Other Learning Resources IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity A. Drill Evaluating the expression Mechanics: Form 4 groups of pupils. The teacher flashes the cards with expressions. The groups are given 60 seconds to evaluate the expression. One member of each group simultaneously goes to the board and writes the answer. The teacher checks the answer. The group with the most number of correct answer wins Sample item: a.3×4+1 = b.62+3 = c. (6+3) + 2 = e. (15 + 3) × 2 = Actively participates in the activity
  • 102.
    d. (16 ÷4) × 3 = B. Have a review on the divisibility rules. Provide exercises written on the flash cards. B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: Richard and Robert are both working on the value of the expression: 2 + 4 x 3 – 6 ÷ 2. However, they have different answers. Richard and answered 6 while Robert answered 11. Of the two students, who answered correctly? Ask: If we are going to follow the order of operation in the expression, what do you think is the answer? Is there any other way to solve for the answer? Say: Today we are going to learn about the order of operations involving integers. -Unsatisfactory response -Analyze the problem and tries to sole for the correct answer. Unsatisfactory response Unsatisfactory response C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Ask: From the expression presented, what operation comes first? Second? What are we going to do in order to solve for the right answer for the expression? What number are we going to multiply? What operation are we going to perform next after multiplying 4 and 3? What number are we going to divide? Are we going to divide 6 and 2? Yes or no? Explain: In a series of operations without grouping symbols, multiplication ang division are performed first from left to right, followed by addition and subtraction, whichever comes first from left to right. Show the solution on the board: To solve 2 + 4 x 3 – 6 ÷ 2 Multiplication: 2 + (4 x 3) – 6 ÷ 2 Division: 2 + 12 – (6 ÷ 2) Addition: (2 + 12) – 3 Subtraction: 14 – 3 Answer: 11 Ask: Who got the correct answer? What do you observed about the order of operation that we performed in finding the correct answer for the expression? Are you familiar with the GEMDAS rule? Addition Multiplication Perform multiplication first 4 and 3 Division Yes Shall take down note in their notebooks Robert We use the MDAS rule Unsatisfactory response
  • 103.
    D. Discussing newconcepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Divide the class into 6 groups with equal number of members. Give instructions to the pupils on what they are going to do to complete the activity Give the following expression for pupils to read and analyze. With the use of their paper and pen, they will have to simplify the different expression, thus answers the questions corresponding the expression given. Each group is given time to discuss their answers in front of the whole class 1. Simplify: 2 + (7 x 3) – 5 What is the grouping symbol in the expression? How many operations do you have to perform to get the answer? What operation are you going to perform first? How are you able to get the correct answer? What is the answer? 2. Simplify: 3 x 4 ÷ (7 - 5) – 12 ÷ 4 What is the grouping symbol in the expression? How many operations do you have to perform to get the answer? What operation are you going to perform first? How are you able to get the correct answer? What is the answer? 3. Simplify: 7 + [ 2 (12 – 5) + 32] – 18 ÷ 3 What is the grouping symbol in the expression? How many operations do you have to perform to get the answer? What operation are you going to perform first? How are you able to get the correct answer? What is the answer? 4. Simplify: 4 + [ -1 (-2 – 1)] What is the grouping symbol in the expression? How many operations do you have to perform to get the answer? What operation are you going to perform first? How are you able to get the correct answer? What is the answer? 5. Simplify: 5 – [4 + 2 x 23 ) ÷ 10] What is the grouping symbol in the expression? How many operations do you have to perform to get the answer? What operation are you going to perform first? How are you able to get the correct answer? What is the answer? 6. Simplify: 42 – 4 x 32 + 2(5 − 2)3 What is the grouping symbol in the expression? Performs the activity with their group mates, discusses among themselves what is the correct answer…
  • 104.
    How many operationsdo you have to perform to get the answer? What operation are you going to perform first? How are you able to get the correct answer? What is the answer? E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Each group of pupils will be given time to report/discuss their answers in front of the whole class. The teacher guides each group. The teacher helps the pupils on how to simplify the equation. Let them know what to do in order to arrive for the correct answer. Explain about: How to apply the GEMDAS RULE (grouping symbols, exponents, multiplication, Division, addition and subtraction) group reporting F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Perform the Indicated operations. 1. 2 ( -5) + (-3) (-7) 2. 27 ÷ (-9) – (3) (-2) 3. 16 + (42 – 2 x 3) – 34 4. 42 ÷ 7 x [37 ÷ 3 – 8] 5. 32 + 2 [5 x (24 – 6)] – 48 ÷ 24 G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Solve each Problem: Klein has 42,500.00 in his bank account. Over the summer period, he made 3 withdrawals of 8,500.00 each and a deposit of 13,250.00 write an order of operations to represent this situation H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Guide the pupils to give the following generalizations by asking: What rule would you follow in order to perform the order of operation? What does GEMDAS rule mean? -simplify the operations in grouping symbols. Start from the innermost grouping symbol. -evaluate exponential expressions -multiply and divide in order they appear from left to right Add and subtract in order they appear from left to right. Means grouping symbols, exponents, multiplication, division, addition, and subtraction.
  • 105.
    I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’sActivity Pupil’s Activity Using the following values, a = 5, b = 10, and c = 15, perform the indicated operations 1. (a + b) – 5 (c ÷ a) 2. (b x c) ÷ 10 (a x 2) 3. (a – b) + (b ÷ a) 4. (2ab – 45) ÷ a 5. (2bc -5ab) ÷ ab V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 106.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. ContentStandards: The learner demonstrates understanding in performing two or more different operations on whole numbers with exponents and grouping symbols B. Performance Standards: The learner is able to apply knowledge in performing two or more different operations on whole numbers with exponents and grouping symbols C. Learning Competencies/Objectives: Performs two or more different operations on whole numbers with or without exponents and grouping symbols M6NS-IIf-149 Cognitive: Evaluate an expression with two different operations with exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols Affective: be helpful, be honest Psychomotor: write the solution in evaluating an expression II. CONTENT: Performs two or more different operations on whole numbers with Exponents and grouping symbols III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References: 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages: Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp. 17-21 2. Leaner’s Materials Pages: 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes, 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal: B. Other Learning Resources IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Game The teacher flashes flash cards with expressions, the pupils will have to solve for the problem 1. 3 x 4 + 1 = 2. 62 + 3 = 3. (6 + 3) + 2 = 4. (16 ÷ 4) x 3 5. (15 + 3) x 2 = Actively participates in the activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Ask:
  • 107.
    What do youobserve when somebody in your home is sick? Does he take medicine? Is it liquid or tablets? How are the tablets kept? Give him/her medicines C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Present the Problem: In a drugstore, the pharmacist daughter of the owner helps her mother account the medicines for fever. She finds specialized squares holders of tablets. She recorded 4 groups of 10 layers of 10 tablets on each side of the holders and 6 sets of 10 tablets, is she right in reporting that there are 40,060 tablets? Why? Group Activity: (divides the class into 5 groups with equal number of members. Ask: a. what is the profession of the daughter of the drugstore owner? b. what does the pharmacist do? c. what does she find in the drugstore? d. if you were the pharmacist? Will you also have a systematic arrangement of your medicines? Why? Reads the problem aloud and read it silently for the second time to analyze. Pharmacist Tablets/medicines Yes, to easily find the medicine D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Let each group use flats and longs to visualize the problem Let them answer the questions: a. what will you find in the problem? b. what are the given data? c. what operations to be used? Lead the groups to think aloud of a numerical expression about the problem (4 x 103 ) + (6 x 10) The total number of tablets 4 groups of 10 layers of 10 tablets and 6 sets of 10 tablets Multiplication and addition E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Present the problem: Emma helps her mother arrange the items in their store. Her mother has specialized square tray for quail eggs. She finds 4 groups of 5 rows with 5 quail eggs placed in trays and 3 groups with 10 quail Actively participates in the activity
  • 108.
    eggs. She informsher mother that they have 1030 quail eggs. Is she right? Why? Ask each group to answer the following questions: 1. Who helps her mother in the store? 2. What does Emma do to help her mother? 3. What facts are given? 4. how are you going to solve for the answer? 5. ask them to evaluate the numerical expression: (4 x 52 ) + (3 x 10) (4 x 25) + (3 + 10) 100 + 30 130 Have the pupils analyze which operation should be performed first, second, next to arrive at the answer F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Activity 3: Group Activity Bing asks her son to do his homework and looks at his notebook. She finds the following: Evaluate the expressions: 1) 6 + (2 x 7 + 52 ) 2) 3 x (4 x 82) – 8 3) 5 x [24  2 x (10 – 8)2  10] 4) (15 – 6) + (4 – 1) x 23 5) 3 x [3 + 2 x (10 – 32)] Ask each pair of pupils to answer the questions below, let each group solve the given equations on the board, allow them to explain their answers in front of the class. 1) What are the facts given? 2) Which operation should be done first? second? third? last? Why? b) Have each pair of pupils evaluate the expressions. Actively participates in the activity Group reporting G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Think-Pair-Share Activity: Pupils are given the freedom to choose their partners for the activity: Evaluate the ff. expressions: a) (114 – 4) x (12 ÷ 4)2 + 3 b) 16 + 82 ÷ (4 + 4) c) (36 – 6) x (3 x 4)2 + 7
  • 109.
    d) 122 x30 + (890 ÷ 2) e) 62 x 23 + (400 ÷ 2) H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How do we evaluate an expression with more than two operations with exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols? Apply the GEMDAS RULE I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity 1.Evaluate the following expressions: a) (9 – 2) + (32 x 21) b) (18 + 14) ÷ (6 + 2) c) 36 ÷ 22 + 4 x (4 – 2) d) (36 – 6) + [(3 x 42) + 7] e) (72 + 15) x 4 – f) 4 x (15 – 32) + 16 g) (93 + 7) x 6 + 10 h) 12 x 30 + (890 ÷ 10) i) [(144 ÷ 12)2 x 3] ÷ 3 x 6 j) (16 + 82) ÷ (4 + 4) 2.Evaluate the expression if: a) R = 2 1.[(6R + R x 8) ÷ 13] – 5 + R 2. S = 3 [(7S – S) x 6] + 6S – S x 5 V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 110.
    I. OBJECTIVES A. ContentStandards: The learner demonstrates understanding in performing two or more different operations on whole numbers without exponents and grouping symbols B. Performance Standards: The learner is able to apply knowledge in performing two or more different operations on whole numbers without exponents and grouping symbols C. Learning Competencies/Objectives: Performs two or more different operations on whole numbers with or without exponents and grouping symbols M6NS-IIf-149 Cognitive: Evaluate an expression with two different operations without exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols Affective: be helpful, be honest Psychomotor: write the solution in evaluating an expression II. CONTENT: Order of Operations Involving Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References: 1. Teacher’s Guide Pages: Lesson Guide in Mathematics Grade 6 pp. 13-16 2. Leaner’s Materials Pages: 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes, 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) portal: B. Other Learning Resources IV. PROCEDURES: A. Reviewing previous lesson of presenting the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Form 4 groups: The teacher flashes numerical expression in a flash card One member of the group simultaneously goes to the board and writes the answer The teacher checks the answer The group with the highest number of correct answer wins Actively participates in the activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity
  • 111.
    Ask the pupilsabout the occupation of their parents. Let them tell how they help their parents earn a living. C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Activity 1 – Use of Role Play in a Sari-Sari Store Jethro was helping his mother in their store when a delivery man delivered 20 dozen of eggs at 42 a dozen. If the delivery man gave him 160, how much was his money? Was he right in asking for a change of 260, if his money was 1,000? Why? Ask the following questions: Who helped mother in the store? Who delivered dozens of eggs? How many dozens of eggs were delivered to them? If you were Jethro: will you help your family earn a living? Why? will you keep the change given by the delivery man? Why? Have each pair of pupils act it out using play money and ask them to answer the following: What are the given data? What are the operations to be used? Jethro Delivery man 20 dozens Yes, No, it’s not good to tell lies Pupils actively participates in the role play D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Lead each pair of pupils to think of an expression related to the problem. Let them evaluate the expression they have formulated. 160 + (20 x P42) 160 + P840 1,000 money of Jethro Require them to analyze the operations they used in arriving at the exact change Actively participates in the activity E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity– Learning Stations Have 3 learning stations. Let the pupils do the activity in each learning station by group. Once they have finished an activity, they need to go to the next station and do the activity indicated there. Pupils need to do the activity as fast as they can. Present the Problem first: Pupils actively participates in the group activity
  • 112.
    Tita was absentfor a week because she was sick. When she went to school, she had to take a test. Few of the items given are shown below. Ask each group of pupils to answer the following questions: What facts are given? What operations are in each problem? Which operations come first? Which operation will you do first? Guide each pair of pupils to evaluate the expressions F. Developing Mastery (leads to formative assessment 3) Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group Activity: Evaluate the expression. a) 8 + 4  2 b) 5 x 8  4 c) 65 – 91  7 d) 72  3 x 8 e) 67 + 33  25 Evaluates the expression using paper and pen G. Finding Practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Group activity: Write an expression about the problems. Then evaluate the expression. 1)In a certain eatery, there are 5 glass racks having 24 glasses and 8 left over. The answer says there are 130 glasses in all. Is it right? Why? 2)Use numbers less than 7 once to make the expression right. Actively participates in the activity H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity How do we evaluate an expression with two different operations without exponents and parenthesis/grouping symbols? Answers: Evaluate exponential expressions Learning Station 1: Evaluate: a) 2 x 3 + 4 b) 7 x 9 – 3 Learning Station 2: Evaluate: c) 18 – 12  2 d) 35 – 6 x 3 Learning Station 2: Evaluate: e) 3 x 2 + 4 f) 48  12 + 8
  • 113.
    Follow the MDASRule I. Evaluating Learning Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Evaluate the following expressions. 1) 4 x 3 + 8 2) 84 ÷ 3 x 4 3) 76 – 8 + 5 4) 53 + 7 – 20 5) 3 x 5 ÷ 25 J. Additional activities for applications or remediations Teacher’s Activity Pupil’s Activity Assignment: Write an expression for the problem then, evaluate: Tickets for children in the carnival cost ₱150.00. A teacher of a class of 48 pupils gets for the whole class but only 43 bought tickets. Is it right for the teacher to say that she ha ₱6,350.00 for the tickets of the children? Why? V. Remarks: VI. Reflection: A. No. of learners achieve 80%: ____ B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation: ___ C. Did the remedial lessons work? ___ D. No. of learners who have caught up the lesson: ___ E. No. of learners who continue to require remediation: ___ F. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? ___ G. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor help me solve? H. What innovation or localized materials did I used/discover which I wish to share with other teacher?
  • 114.
    DETAILED LESSON PLAN SchoolGrade level VI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 7 Day 1 & 2 Quarter SECOND QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards  Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integer. B. Performance Standards  Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies: Identifies real-life situations that make use of integers. (M6NS-IIg-150) Objectives: Cognitive:  Identifies real-life situations that make use of integers. Psychomotor:  Write an integer to represent each real life situation. Affective:  Show teamwork within a group II. CONTENT: Identifying real-life situations that make use of integers. III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-356 21st Century Mathletes: p 47-59 2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none B. Other Learning Resources:  Activity cards, pictures, room thermometer, Video presentation about integer. (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uopjGTZdj64) & Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint) IV. PROCEDURES Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or  Call pupils  do the following actions walking forward,  and volunteers do
  • 115.
    presenting the new lesson sitdown, laugh, shake head the opposite actions  walking backward, stand up, cry, nod B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson & set classroom rules  present a picture of a child & a ladder/ stairs  show to the class the movement of going up and down of the child in the picture  let the learners describe how many steps did the child make both in going down and up.  Listen to the teacher  Listen to the teacher  Answers how many steps did a child make in going up and down. C. Presenting examples/instances of the new lesson.  Have the learners watch a video about integers that represent a situation.  https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uopjGTZdj64  Present a number line.  Describe a number line… -Tell what is in the number line, - the numbers in the number line are called integers. - define integers - that a number line has two sides to the right is the positive integers and to its left are the negative integers.  Go back to the picture of a child  Discuss to the class that if the child made two steps up that is +2 but if the child goes three steps down that is -3.  Watch the video  Listen to the teacher D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1  Present another picture to the class of two Room Thermometer and read the temperature reflected on the thermometers.  Compare the readings of the two thermometers if the temperature reading is 35 degrees above zero we say its +35 and if it is 35 degrees below zero it can be read as -35.  Listen to the teacher E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2  Present the following situations to the class a. gain of 5 points b. 8 steps backward c. a loss of 100 pesos  Answers the situation given.
  • 116.
    F. Developing mastery (leadsto Formative Assessment 3)  Group the learners into 4 groups  Present an activity  Write the Integer represented by each situation. a. The temperature is 18℃ below 0. b. The altitude is 75 m below sea level. c. The corals are 15 m below sea level. d. He has a weight loss of 5 kg. e. She spent 375.00 pesos for a dress.  Group themselves into 4 groups  Answers the activity given in groups using tag/ show me boards. G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living. - Teacher will present a problem. Let the pupils solve the problem. -Yren Walked 7 steps forward, 5 steps backward, 10 steps forward, and 6 steps backward. How many steps is Yren from where he started? - Solve the problem given H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson - Teacher will ask the following questions. What are Integers? What are its uses?  Answers the teachers question. I. Evaluating learning  Teacher present a situation.  Write an Integer from the following situations. 1. loss of 15 kilograms 2. 10 degrees below zero 3. overtime pay of 85.00 pesos 4. 8 hours ago 5. 10 km north 6. gain of 345.00 pesos 7. 230 m below sea level 8. going 4 km downstream 9. 12 years from now 10. spending 50 pesos.  Answer the activity J. Additional activities for application or remediation  Teacher prepares another set of activity.  Write an Integer from the following situations.  1. Water freezes at temperature 0 degrees centigrade. The temperature was at 20℃ above zero during the day.  Answer the activity at home. Day 2 B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Teacher will prepare some words and class gives the antonym Love, good, patience, stubborn  Teacher will relate the words to the lesson and use the number line to illustrate.  Present a number line on the board.  Have a little review about the negative and the positive integers.  Give the antonym of the words.
  • 117.
    C. Presenting examples/instances of thenew lesson.  Teacher prepares a situation card cards before the lesson. Let the pupils locate the numbers on the number line. And give the integers. a. 5 units to the left b. 50 meters below the ground c. 60 degrees above zero. d. lost 30 points e. 10 floors up f. 15 % dropped D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1  Teacher discuss to the class the following words below, above, gained, increased, decreased, dropped & spent. Relate the following words to the Number line.  Example: 230 ft. below sea level, 50 m above the ground Climb 5 steps up.  Listen to the teacher. E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2  Present another set of activity.  Write the Integer represented by each situation. 1. deposited 15,000.00 pesos 2. 47° above 0 3. gained 15 points 4. grades are increased to 15% 5. enrolment decreased to 115 6. the temperature dropped to 25° C 7. She spent 100.00 pesos from her money.  Answer the activity. F. Developing mastery (leads to Formative Assessment 3)  Group the class into 3  Present a situation to the class and each group will illustrate by drawing, role playing or acting out. 1. Mang Pepe bought a pair of Polo Shirt worth 600.00 2. The temperature dropped to 38° C. 3. The highest elevation of the country is 8077 ft. 4. 12 ft. below the ground 5. Yhra makes 5 steps up and 2 steps down  Perform the activity G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living.  Prepares an activity (can be grouped or not) Write an integer described in the situation. You watched a rocket launching on TV. The announcer said: a. blast off 4 seconds b. 4 seconds after blast off c. 3 seconds before blast off  Answer the activity.
  • 118.
    H. Making generalizations and abstractionsabout the lesson  How do we represent real life situations?  Possible answer by using integers I. Evaluating learning  Write an integer described in the situation. 1. 600 m above the ground 2. lost 15 points 3. gained 30.00 pesos 4. spent 150.00 pesos 5. 150 ft below the ground 6. his grade decreased to 80% 7. 60° above 0 8. dropped to 150 9. 12 steps forward 10. 15 floors up J. Additional activities for application or remediation Use a number line to identify the points describe. 1. 6 units to the right 2. 12 units to the left 3. 16 units to -5 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work?
  • 119.
    F. What difficulties didI encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 120.
    DETAILED LESSON PLAN SchoolGrade level VI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 7 Day 3 Quarter SECOND QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards  Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integer. B. Performance Standards  Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies: Describes the set of integers. (M6NS-IIg-151) Objectives: Cognitive:  Describes the set of integers. (M6NS-IIg-151) Psychomotor:  Write an integer from the given number line Affective:  Show teamwork within a group II. CONTENT: Describing the set of integers. III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-356 21st Century Mathletes: p 47-59 2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none B. Other Learning Resources:  Activity cards, pictures, Number Line, & video presentation Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5oHJcmYbHvA) IV. PROCEDURES Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or  Present a puzzle to the class and group the pupils into 4-5 let the pupils assemble the puzzle  Assemble the puzzle  Listen to the teacher
  • 121.
    presenting the new lesson Teacher gives awards to the group who first assemble the puzzle.  present another number line  ask the following questions 1. where they can locate the positive and negative numbers on the number line. 2. what are the examples of a negative and positive integers?  Learner will answer the questions B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson to the learners  Set classroom rules  Present a video about how to describe an integer. (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5oH JcmYbHvA)  Have a little review on the video presentation.  Ask some questions about the video  Listen to the teacher  Watch the video  Answer the questions C. Presenting examples/instance s of the new lesson.  Present a picture of Mayon Volcano (http://tiny.cc/rqiz6y)  Ask the learners what is in the picture.  Let the learner describe the picture  Teacher then describe the picture - Mayon Volcano is 2077 feet above sea level3 - To write 2077 ft. above sea level as +2007  Answer the questions  Describe the picture. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1  Present another problem to the class (https://www.vigattintourism.com/touris m/articles/TOP-10-Highest-Mountains- in-the-Philippines) Situation: The highest elevation in the Philippines is Mount Apo between Davao & Cotabato, is the tallest mountain in the Philippines, having an elevation of 2,956 meters. The lowest elevation Galathea Depth 10,540 metres below sea level.  Listen to the teacher
  • 122.
     above usesthe notion of opposites: Above sea level is the opposite of below sea level. Here are some more examples of opposites: top, bottom | increase, decrease | forward, backward | positive, negative. E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2  Teacher prepares another set of group activity or a set of situation this allow the pupils to find a stair case, prepare realia like money. Let them present their activity by group.  Have them prepare also a number line basis for their answer.  Group 1 a. +5 c. 6 d. 15 e. 25 b. -2 f. -8 g. -10 h. -18 Group 2 (uses real objects describes integers using increase and decrease) a. +50 stones b. -15 stones c. +18 sticks d. -12 sticks e. +16 papers f. -8 papers. Group 3 (Uses meter stick or steel tape; describes integers using top and bottom) a. +160cm b. -20cm c. +5 cm d. -25cm e. 3cm f. -50 cm  Group themselves into 4 groups  Answers the activity given in groups. (steps forward) (steps backward) F. Developing mastery (leads to Formative Assessment 3)  Prepares pupil activity  Let each pupil’s answer the following by describing the integers. 1. +200 m 2. – 500.00 pesos 3. +10 4. -6 5. -100cm  Answers the activity. G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living.  Prepares a problem Lillia bought 4 pairs of black jeans at 320.00 each. How much money did she pay the clerk? - Solve the problem given H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson  Ask some questions  How do we describe the integers? We can use the following words to describe integers top, bottom | increase, decrease | forward, backward | positive, negative.  Answers the teachers question. I. Evaluating learning  Prepares an individual activity. Describe the following integers using top, bottom | increase,  Answer the activity
  • 123.
    decrease | forward, backward| positive, negative. 1. 8 2. 12 3. -17 4. 120 5. -23 J. Additional activities for application or remediation  A tree post was situated 550 feet below sea level. If it descends 100 feet, what is its new position?  Answer the activity at home. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION H. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment I. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation J. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson K. No. of learners who continue to require remediation L. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? M. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? N. What innovation or
  • 124.
    localized materials did I use/discover whichI wish to share with other teachers?
  • 125.
    DETAILED LESSON PLAN SchoolGrade level VI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 7 Day 4 Quarter SECOND QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards  Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integer. B. Performance Standards  Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies: Compares integers with other numbers such as whole numbers, fractions, and decimals. (M6NS-IIg-151) Objectives: Cognitive:  Compares integers with other numbers such as whole numbers, fractions, and decimals. (M6NS-IIg-151) Psychomotor:  Write <, >, or = in comparing integers Affective:  Show teamwork within a group II. CONTENT: Comparing integers with other numbers such as whole numbers, fractions, and decimals. III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-358 21st Century Mathletes: p 47-59 2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none B. Other Learning Resources:  Activity cards, pictures, Number Line, & video presentation Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oq2KoAGrY64) IV. PROCEDURES Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or  Present a game named Number Line Assemble to the class and group the pupils into 2 groups.  Assemble the puzzle  Listen to the teacher
  • 126.
    presenting the new lesson Teacher distributes number cards from 0 to 9 and a card with a negative sign, to each group. One pupil one card.  Teacher gives awards to the group who first assemble the numbers  The group who assembles first wins the game  Discuss the value of teamwork  Learner will answer the questions B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson to the learners  Set classroom rules  Present a video about how to compare an integer. (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oq2 KoAGrY64)  Have a little review on the video presentation.  Ask some questions about the video  Listen to the teacher  Watch the video  Answer the questions C. Presenting examples/instance s of the new lesson.  Teacher discuss how to compare integers using the symbols <, >, or =  Teacher explains using the number line - Zero is greater than all negative integers but smaller than all positive integers. - All positive integers are greater than all negative integers; all negative integers are less than all positive integers - When comparing 2 integers with the same signs, that one that is farther to the right on the number line is the greater integer. Example:  Listen to the teacher -4 -8 -8 is greater than - 4 since it is farther to the right. Use the sign <. 8 - 8 8 is greater than - 8 since it is a positive number. Use the sign >. 8 > -8 -4 < -8 13 +13 13 = +13
  • 127.
    D. Discussing new conceptsand practicing new skills #1  Present another individual activity to the class. Let the pupils compare integers using <, >, or =. a. -4 -8 e. -12 12 b. -10 0 f. -150 -149 c. 8 9 d. -9 -9  Pupils will answer the activity E. Developing mastery (leads to Formative Assessment  Teacher prepares another set of group activity. This time prepare a number cards with the following integers.  Let each group assign a member to hold the >, <, or =.  Let them present their activity by group.  The group who got the most correct numbered of pairs win. -Group 1 a. +5 & 6 b. 15 & 25. 45 c. -2 & -8 d. -10 & -18 -Group 2 a. +50 & -15 b. +18 & -12 .50 c. +16 & -8 d. -28 & -29 Group 3 a. +160 & -20. 75 c. +5 & -25 d. 3 & -50 e. -1 & 1 1/4  Group themselves into 4 groups  Answers the activity given in groups. F. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living.  Prepares a problem Yren was asked by his teacher to compare two integers, he chose -5 and +4. From the two numbers which is greater and which is lesser? - Solve the problem given G. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson  Ask some questions  How do we compare integers? We can use the following symbols to compare integers using the symbols <, >, or =.  Answers the teachers question. 13 and +13 are the same. Use = sign.
  • 128.
    H. Evaluating learning  Preparesan individual activity. Compare the following integers using the following symbols <, >, or =. And fill in the box. 1. 25 -25 2. -16 - 16.45 3. -15 -14 4. 9 - 9 5. 150 149 1/2  Answer the activity I. Additional activities for application or remediation  Answer page 150 on the 21st Century Mathletes.  Answer the activity at home. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION O. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment P. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation Q. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson R. No. of learners who continue to require remediation S. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? T. What difficulties did I encounter which my
  • 129.
    principal or supervisor can helpme solve? U. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 130.
    School Grade levelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 8 Day 1 Quarter SECOND QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards  Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integer. B. Performance Standards  Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies: Represents integers on the number line. (M6NS-IIh-153) Objectives: Cognitive:  Represents integers on the number line. (M6NS-IIh-153) Psychomotor:  Write integers correctly Affective:  Appreciate the use of number line. II. CONTENT: Representing integers on the number line. III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-358 21st Century Mathletes: p 47-59 2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none B. Other Learning Resources:  Activity cards (https://www.pinterest.ph/pin/573294227556015390/?lp=true), Number Line, & video presentation https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o3kIi8g3mwI) or (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vTfqgqkBges) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=A186iWp5vKQ) Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint) IV. PROCEDURES Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or  Show a number Line to the class  Listen to the teacher
  • 131.
    presenting the new lesson Review on the different parts of the Number Line B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson to the learners and your objectives.  Set classroom rules  Present a video about the number line https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o3kIi 8g3mwI) or (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vTfq gqkBges)  Have a little review on the video presentation.  Ask some questions about the video  Listen to the teacher  Watch the video  Answer the questions C. Presenting examples/instance s of the new lesson.  Teacher discuss how represent integers in the number line  Teacher explains using the number line - A whole number is any counting number. Numbers, like 1/2 or .75, that you use to describe a part of something are not whole numbers. - A positive number is a number greater than zero. It can be written with or without a + symbol in front of it. A gain in something is written with a positive number. Profit, increase, and income are all examples of words that mean positive. - A negative number is a number that is less than zero. It is always written with a - symbol in front of it. A loss is written with a negative number. Decrease, spend, and decline are examples of words that mean negative. - An integer is any positive whole number or its negative. Zero is also considered an integer. - - Give examples 1. 2 units right of 4  Listen to the teacher
  • 132.
    2. 4 unitsof -2 3. 5 units to the left 0f 1 D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1  Present a group activity to the class. Let the pupils locate the integers using the Activity card on number line. 1. 3 units to the right of 5 2. 9 units to the right of 0 3. 7 units to the left of -2 4. 6 units to the right of zero 5. 5 units to the left of -5  Pupils will answer the activity E. Developing mastery (leads to Formative Assessment  Teacher prepares another set of individual activity. Use the Number line activity card. 1. 8 to the right of -8. 2. 2 to the right of 7 3. 5 to the left of -5 4. 6 to the left of -2 5. 8 to the right of -10  Answers the activity given in groups. F. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living.  Prepares a problem Kris like to take a walk every day. She started with a 25 steps forward and add another 15 steps forward and 16 steps backward. How many steps did she make in all? - Solve the problem given G. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson  Ask some questions  How do we represent integers?  Answers the teachers question. H. Evaluating learning  Prepares an individual activity. Use the number line activity card. Represent the following integers using the number line. 1. 3 units to the right of -1 2. 5 units to the right 1 3. 7 units to the left of 2 4. 12 units to the left of 7 5. 8 units to the right of 2  Answer the activity I. Additional activities for application or remediation Represent the following integers using the number line. 1. 10 units to the right -8 2. 6 units to the right of -10 3. 13 units to right of -6 4. 2 units to the right of 0 5. 11 units to the right of 5  Answer the activity at home. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION
  • 133.
    V. No. of learnerswho earned 80% on the formative assessment W. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation X. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson Y. No. of learners who continue to require remediation Z. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? AA.What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? BB.What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 134.
    Activity Cards onNumber Line.
  • 135.
    DETAILED LESSON PLAN SchoolGrade level VI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 8 Day 2 Quarter SECOND QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards  Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integer. B. Performance Standards  Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies: Compares and arranges integers. (M6NS-IIh-154) Objectives: Cognitive:  Compares and arranges integers. (M6NS-IIh-154) Psychomotor:  Write integers from greatest to least and vice versa Affective:  Appreciate the importance of having order in everyday life. II. CONTENT: Comparing and arranging integers. III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 353-358 21st Century Mathletes: p 47-59 2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none B. Other Learning Resources:  Activity cards, pictures, Number Line, & video presentation Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oq2KoAGrY64) IV. PROCEDURES Teachers Activity Student’s/ Pupil’s Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson  Present a game named Arrange Me game to the class an group the pupils into 2 groups.  Teacher distributes number cards from 0 to 20 make sure to include also the  Assemble the puzzle  Listen to the teacher  Learner will answer the questions
  • 136.
    negative integers, toeach group. One pupil one card.  Teacher gives awards to the group who first assemble the numbers  The group who assembles first wins the game  Discuss the value of teamwork B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson to the learners and the objectives/ target for learning  Set classroom rules  Present a video about how to compare an integer. (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oq2 KoAGrY64)  Have a little review on the video presentation.  Ask some questions about the video  Teacher will review the previous concepts about comparing numbers - Zero is greater than all negative integers but smaller than all positive integers. - All positive integers are greater than all negative integers; all negative integers are less than all positive integers - When comparing 2 integers with the same signs, that one that is farther to the right on the number line is the greater integer.  Listen to the teacher  Watch the video  Answer the questions C. Presenting examples/instance s of the new lesson.  Teacher discuss how to arrange the integers correctly. From greatest to least and vice versa.  Listen to the teacher D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1  Present another individual activity to the class. Let the pupils arrange the integers from least to greatest & from greatest to least. a. -4, -8, -12 , 12, -10 b. -10, 0, -150, -149, 18 c. 8, 9, 15, -18, 20  Pupils will answer the activity -4 15 -10 -8 - 13 0 6 9
  • 137.
    E. Developing mastery (leadsto Formative Assessment  Teacher prepares another set of group activity. This time prepare a number cards with the following integers.  Let each group assign a member to hold. -Group 1 +5, 6, 15, 25, 45, -2, -8, -10, -18 -Group 2 +50, -15, +18, -12, 50, 16, -8, 28, -29 Group 3 +160, -20, 75, +5, -25, 3, -50, -1  Group themselves into 3 groups  Answers the activity given in groups. F. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living.  Prepares a problem Rica was asked by his teacher to arrange the number blocks on the shelves she was determined to arrange the numbers from least to greatest. The numbers on the blocks are 37, -73, 83, 31, 13, -25, -17, -3, -1. - Solve the problem given G. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson  Ask some questions  How do we arrange integers? - By basing it first on the number line. - Zero is greater than all negative integers but smaller than all positive integers. - All positive integers are greater than all negative integers; all negative integers are less than all positive integers - When comparing 2 integers with the same signs, that one that is farther to the right on the number line is the greater integer.  Answers the teachers question. H. Evaluating learning  Prepares an individual activity. Arrange the following integers from least to greatest & greatest to least. - Arrange the following Integers from least to greatest. 1.) 25, -25, -16, 45, -15 2.) -14 4, 9, - 9, 150 3.) 49, 6, -5, 0, 17 4.) 9 -8 8, -32, -24 5.). 89, 73 17 23  Answer the activity
  • 138.
    - Arrange theintegers from greatest to least 1.) -3, -6, -4, -1, 5, 12, 10, -18, -45, 31 2. -60, 505, 13, -13, 18, 91, 3, -8, 6, -25 I. Additional activities for application or remediation  Answer page 150 letter B on the 21st Century Mathletes.  Answer the activity at home. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION CC. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment DD. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation EE.Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson FF.No. of learners who continue to require remediation GG. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? HH. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve?
  • 139.
    II. What innovation or localized materialsdid I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 140.
    School Grade levelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 8 Day 3 Quarter SECOND QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards  Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integer. B. Performance Standards  Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies: Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-155) Objectives: Cognitive:  Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh- 155) Psychomotor:  Add integers using algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. Affective:  Appreciate the importance of having order in everyday life. II. CONTENT: Describing and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 359-360 21st Century Mathletes: p 47-59 2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none B. Other Learning Resources:  Activity cards, algebra tiles counters, chips, and cards., Number Line, & video presentation (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eS3_xTshl-4) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pU2zPf846L4) Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint) IV. PROCEDURES
  • 141.
    Teachers Activity Student’s/Pupil’s Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson  Prepare some activity cards on addition of numbers and subtraction of numbers. (http://www.math- aids.com/Mixed_Problems/)  Set classroom rules  Learner will answer the activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson to the learners and the objectives/ target for learning  Set classroom rules  Present a Present a video about how to add and subtract an integer. (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pU2 zPf846L4  Listen to the teacher  Watch the video  Answer the questions C. Presenting examples/instance s of the new lesson.  Teacher discuss how add integers using counters - Discuss to the class on how to get the sum of the two positive integers and thus by putting together the counters with the same colors. - It produces two negative red tiles.  Listen to the teacher 1+ 1= 2 -1 - (-1) = - 1 +2 + (+4) = 6
  • 142.
    - Discuss tothe class the zero pair - Zero pair is a process which is to eliminate the tiles with pair so the answer is 3 since we pair the 2 negative counters with the 2 positive counters. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1  Present another individual activity to the class. Let the pupils add and subtract integers using counters. a. -8, + -4= b. -12 ,+ 12, = c. -10, + 0 - d. 19,+ (-18) = c. 8, + 9, =  Pupils will answer the activity E. Developing mastery (leads to Formative Assessment  Teacher prepares another set of group activity. This time prepare a different chips used as counters.  Let each group draw a counters or chips to represent the equation. -Group 1 1.) +5 + 6 = ; 2.) 25 + (-25,) = , 3.) -45,- -2= ; 4.) -18, + -10= -Group 2 1.) +50 + (-15), 2.) +18,+ -12= 3.) 50 + 16= 4.) 38, + 29= Group 3 1.) +16 + (-20) = 2.) -15, + (+5) =  Group themselves into 3 groups  Answers the activity given in groups. +5 + (-2) = +3
  • 143.
    3. -5,+ (-3), 4.) -5 + (-1) = F. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living.  Prepares a problem Karen weighs 45 kilograms on April as she weighs herself 2 weeks after loses 5 kilograms. Compute Karen’s weight with the use of counters. - Solve the problem given G. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson  Ask some questions  How do we add integers? - Observe the signs of the addends and the sum - If the addend have the same sign, the numbers are added and the common sign is affixed at the sum. - If the addends have different signs, the signs are first disregarded and the difference between the number is obtained. - The sign of the greater number is affixed to the answer.  Answers the teachers question. H. Evaluating learning  Prepares an individual activity. Add the following integers by using the counter chips provided by the teacher.  Answer the activity I. Additional activities for application or remediation  Draw a counter chips with the following integers.  Answer the activity at home. V. REMARKS (-20) + (+15) = (-16) + (-1) = (18) + (-8) = (11) + (-4) = (-5) + (-2) = (35) + (-4) = (28) + (-12) =
  • 144.
    VI. REFLECTION A. No.of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 145.
    School Grade levelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 8 Day 4 Quarter SECOND QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards  Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integer. B. Performance Standards  Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies: Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-155) Objectives: Cognitive:  Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh- 155) Psychomotor:  Subtract integers using algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. Affective:  Appreciate the importance of having order in everyday life. II. CONTENT: Describing and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 359-360 21st Century Mathletes: p 47-59 2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none B. Other Learning Resources:  Activity cards, algebra tiles counters, chips, and cards., Number Line, & video presentation (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eS3_xTshl-4) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pU2zPf846L4) Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint) IV. PROCEDURES
  • 146.
    Teachers Activity Student’s/Pupil’s Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson  Prepare some activity cards on addition of integers. (https://www.mathworksheets4kids.com/ adding-subtracting-integers.php)  ( Note: Please see attached copy for a visible picture)  Set classroom rules  Learner will answer the activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson to the learners and the objectives/ target for learning  Set classroom rules  Present a Present a video about how to add and subtract an integer. (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pU2 zPf846L4  Listen to the teacher  Watch the video C. Presenting examples/instance s of the new lesson.  Teacher discuss how add integers using chips - Discuss to the class on how to get the difference of the two positive integers and thus by taking away 1 chips.  Listen to the teacher +4 –(+1)= +3 (-5) - (-2) = -3
  • 147.
    D. Discussing new conceptsand practicing new skills #1  Present another individual activity to the class. Let the pupils subtract integers using counters. a. ( -50,) - ( -14) = b. (-12) ,- (-12)= c. (-19), - (-8) = d. (-11) - (-18) =  Pupils will answer the activity E. Developing mastery (leads to Formative Assessment  Teacher prepares another set of group activity. This time prepare a different chips used as counters. ( Note: Please see attached copy)  Group themselves into 3 groups  Answers the activity given in groups. F. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living.  Prepares a problem Rivera family bought 15 kilograms of fish. They give away 8 kilograms of fish to their neighbor. How many kilograms of fish left for the family? Show your answer by drawing chips. - Solve the problem given G. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson  Ask some questions  How do we subtract integers? -  Answers the teachers question. H. Evaluating learning  Subtract the integers using chips as representation. ( Note: Please see attached copy)  Answer the activity I. Additional activities for application or remediation  Draw a counter chips with the following integers.  Answer the activity at home.
  • 148.
    V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION H.No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment I. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation J. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson K. No. of learners who continue to require remediation L. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? M. What difficulties did I encounter which my
  • 149.
    principal or supervisor can helpme solve? N. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 150.
    Activity Cards onReviewing previous lessons.
  • 151.
    Activity Card onSubtracting Integers Activity Sheet for Evaluating Learning Outcome Activity Card 2
  • 152.
    References: Subtracting Integers Activity1 https://www.google.com/search?tbm=isch&sa=1&ei=aUjmXOrXJIX2hwOo4pgCw &q=subtraction+of+intergers+worksheet&oq=subtraction+of+intergers+workshee t&gs_l=img.12...4401232.4410410..4412673...12.0..0.246.4757.0j6j17......1....1.. gws-wiz-img.JEcfFLeYSqQ#imgrc=wU3HxnPpLtxavM: Subtracting Integers Activity 2
  • 153.
  • 154.
    School Grade levelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 8 Day 5 Quarter SECOND QUARTER I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards  Demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integer. B. Performance Standards  Apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies: Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh-155) Objectives: Cognitive:  Describes and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. (M6NS-IIh- 155) Psychomotor:  Multiply integers using algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. Affective:  Appreciate the importance of having order in everyday life. II. CONTENT: Describing and interprets the basic operations on integers using materials such as algebra tiles, counters, chips, and cards. III. LEARNING RESOURCES: A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages: Lesson guide in Elementary Mathematics VI: p 359-360 21st Century Mathletes: p 47-59 2. Learner’s Materials pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 3. Textbook pages: 21st Century Mathletes: p 146- 147 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource(LR) portal: none B. Other Learning Resources:  Activity cards, algebra tiles counters, chips, and cards., Number Line, & video presentation (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RAb2PR4lKvY) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jcLUewqIRkM&pbjreload=10) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=r9nzpGc8B7s) Slide deck presentation (Powerpoint) IV. PROCEDURES
  • 155.
    Teachers Activity Student’s/Pupil’s Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson  Prepare some activity cards on subtraction of integers. (https://www.mathworksheets4kids.com/ adding-subtracting-integers.php)   ( Note: Please see attached copy for a visible picture)  Set classroom rules  Learner will answer the activity B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson  Introduce the lesson to the learners and the objectives/ target for learning  Set classroom rules  Present a Present a video about how to multiply an integer. (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RAb 2PR4lKvY) (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jcLU ewqIRkM&pbjreload=10)  Listen to the teacher  Watch the video C. Presenting examples/instance s of the new lesson.  Teacher discuss how to multiply integers using tiles  Use two colors of tiles that represent the two signs blue for negative and red for positive.  Multiplying two positive numbers - Discuss to the class on how to multiply the two positive integers and thus by grouping each tiles. - Multiplying 2 different signs  Listen to the teacher (+1) x (+4)= + 4 +3 One Group only
  • 156.
     Discuss tothe class that when you multiply a positive number to a negative number the answer will always have negative sign. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1  Present another individual activity to the class. Let the pupils multiply integers using tiles. a. ( -5,) x ( -8) = b. (6) x (3)= c. (-3) x (9) = d. (11) X (-18) =  Pupils will answer the activity E. Developing mastery (leads to Formative Assessment  Teacher prepares another set of group activity using tiles. ( Note: Please see attached copy)  Group themselves into 3 groups  Answers the activity given in groups. F. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living.  Prepares a problem A test has 20 questions. The test awards 3 points if the answer is correct and takes away 1 if the answer is incorrect. Ana answered 5 correctly. How many points will she received? - Solve the problem given G. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson  Ask some questions  How do we multiply integers? -  Answers the teachers question. H. Evaluating learning  Multiply the integers using tiles as representation.  Answer the activity (5) x (-2) = - 10 Five Groups of Two only
  • 157.
    ( Note: Pleasesee attached copy) I. Additional activities for application or remediation  Draw a tiles with the following integers. ( Note: Please see attached copy)  Answer the activity at home. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION O. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment P. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation Q. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught
  • 158.
    up with the lesson R.No. of learners who continue to require remediation S. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? T. What difficulties did I encounter which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? U. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 159.
    Activity Cards onReviewing previous lessons. https://www.google.com/search?q=sample+activity+cards+on+subtracting+integers&tbm=isch& source=iu&ictx=1&fir=n4x1jOqho0ui6M%253A%252CpRWpMJ- fIpSwLM%252C_&vet=1&usg=AI4_- kRf25DchkyGljuUlg8XT11nrJRoDA&sa=X&ved=2ahUKEwiEx-fE-sXjAhXac94KHT6yD- AQ9QEwA3oECAkQDw&biw=1242&bih=597#imgrc=n4x1jOqho0ui6M:&vet=1
  • 160.
    Activity Card onMultiplying Integers https://www.k5learning.com/free-math-worksheets/sixth-grade-6/integers/integer-multiplication Activity Sheet for Evaluating Learning Outcome https://www.sopexamples.com/multiplying-integers-worksheet/
  • 162.
  • 163.
    School Grade LevelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 9, Day 1 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies / Objectives Performs the basic operations on integers. (M6NS-IIi-156) 1. Perform addition on integers. 2. Use algebra tiles in adding integers. II. CONTENT Performing Addition on Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References 1. Teacher’s Guide pages Mathematics CG for Grade 6, p.196 2. Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp 152-157 3. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp 152-157 4. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) Portal none B. Other Learning Resources Mathletes 6 textbook, power point presentation, flash cards, answer sheets, algebra tiles, number line IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson Drill: Flash some cards having pair of integers. Ask: Which of the two integers in each pair has a greater distance from zero? 1. +5 & -4 2. -2 & -9 3. -10 & -6 4. +7 & -3 5. -12 & + 1 6. +6 & -4 7. -8 & +5 8. -2 & +3 Pupils will give the answer orally. Possible answers: 1. +5 2. -9 3. -10 4. +7 5. -12 6. +6 7. -8 8. +3
  • 164.
    B. Establishing a purposefor the lesson Present the problem. Aling Maria bought fruits which cost ₱500 from a wholesaler and sold them in her fruit stand. On Monday, her sales was ₱600; and on Tuesday, ₱300. But on Wednesday, she lost ₱200 because some of the fruits were already rotten. Considering the sales from Monday to Wednesday, did Aling Maria gain or lose? Pupils will read and analyze the problem carefully. C. Presenting Examples/ Instances of the new lesson Discuss the answer to the problem by asking comprehension questions: Ask: 1. How much was her total sales from Monday to Wednesday? (ask a volunteer to solve on the board) 2. How much was her capital? To know whether Aling Maria gained or lost, we have to compare her total sales from Monday to Wednesday with her capital. Ask: Did Aling Maria gain or lose? Pupils will listen attentively to the discussion and answer the given questions. 1. (600)+(300)+(-200)=700 2. Her capital was ₱500. Answer: She gained ₱200. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Say: Addition is the same as “combining”. How do we combine integers? Use a number line to help visualize the addition of integers.  Add a positive integer by moving to the right on the number line.  Add a negative integer by moving to the left on the number line. Example: 1. 4+3= Start from 4 and move 3 units to the right. Pupils will observe and practice adding integers using the number line.
  • 165.
    Therefore, 4+3=7 2. (-4)+2= Startfrom -4 and move 2 units to the right. Thus, (-4)+2=-2 3. (-5)+(-2)= Start from -5 and move 2 units to the left. So, (-5)+(-2)=-7 4. 5+(-7)= 5. (-2)+(-3) Answer: 4. 5+(-7)= -2 5. (-2)+8= 6 E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Demonstrate adding positive and negative integers using counters. Say: We can use positive and negative counters to model the addition of integers. positive negative What will happen if we put together 1 black tile and another black tile? Now, how about if we put together 1 white tile and another white tile? This will produce two black tiles. =2 This will produce two white tiles = -2
  • 166.
    What will happenif we put together 1 black tile and 1 white tile? A positive integer paired with a negative integer form a “zero pair”. They cancel each other. A zero pair has a sum of “0”. Example: 1. Show the sum of +2 and +4 using tiles. (Let the pupils manipulate the tiles to show the answer.) 2. Show the sum of +5 and -2 using tiles. 3. Show the sum of -1 and -3 using tiles. 4. Show the sum of -4 and +2 using tiles. Do you notice a pattern or rule? - When the signs are the same, add the numbers together and keep the sign. - When the signs are different, subtract the integers and keep the sign of the larger digit. = 0 1. . = +6 2. = +3 3 . = -4 4. = -2 F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Group Activity Divide the class into three groups and have them add the following integers: Members of the group will help each other in doing the activity. Group 1 will answer using algebra tiles.
  • 167.
    1) -8 +8 = 2) -9 + -11 = 3) 13 + (-9) = 4) 7 + 5 = 5) -12 + 10 = 6) -22 + (-16) = 7) 18 + (-5) = 8) -1 + 6 = 9) 0 + (-8) = 10) 4 + 5 = Group 2 will use the number line in adding the integers. Group 3 will add the integers using the rules. G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Fish bowl Activity. The teacher will play a music. As the music starts, the teacher will pass a ball to a pupil who will then pass the ball to the pupil next to him/her. When the music stops, the one holding the ball will pick a paper inside the fish bowl and give the sum of the integers written on it. Pupils will pass the ball to the pupil next to him. When the music stops, the one holding the ball will pick a paper inside the fish bowl and give the sum of the integers written in it. H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Ask: How do we add integers with like sign? Unlike sign? To add integers with like signs, add the numbers together and keep the sign. To add integers with different signs, subtract the integers and keep the sign of the larger integer. I. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give a test. Add the following integers. 1) 8 + 7 = 2) 9 + (-10) = 3) (-3) + (-19) = 4) -2 + 29 = 5) -8 + 3 = 6) -12 + (-30) = 7) -54 + 20 = 8) 6 + (-2) + (-10) = 9) 18 + (-18) = 10) 4 + (-15) = Pupils will answer individually. Answers: 1) 8 + 7 = 15 2) 9 + (-10) = -1 3) (-3) + (-19) = -22 4) -2 + 29 = 27 5) -8 + 3 = -5 6) -12 + (-30) = -42 7) 54 + -20 = 34 8) 6+(-2)+(-10) = -6 9) 18 + (-18) = 0 10) 4 + (-15) = -11 J. Additional activities for application or remediation If the temperature was -7 degrees (Fahrenheit) at 6 AM, rose 4 degrees by 7 AM and then rose another 8 degrees by 8 AM, what was the temperature at 8 AM? Answer: 5O F
  • 168.
    V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A.No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encountered which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 169.
    DETAILED LESSON PLAN SchoolGrade Level VI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 9, Day 2 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES D. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. E. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. F. Learning Competencies / Objectives Performs the basic operations on integers. (M6NS-IIi-156) 3. Perform subtraction on integers. 4. Use algebra tiles as aid in subtracting integers. 5. Show cooperation in group activity. II. CONTENT Performing Subtraction on Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES C. References 5. Teacher’s Guide pages Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196 6. Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp158-165 7. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp158-165 8. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) Portal none D. Other Learning Resources Mathletes 6 textbook, video clip, power point presentation, answer sheet IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity K. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson Drill: Give the opposite of each given integers. 1. +50 2. +12 3. +42 4. -120 5. -29 Review: How do we add integers with like signs? Unlike signs? Pupils will give the answer orally. 1. -50 2. -12 3. -42 4. +120 5. +29 To add integers with like signs, add the numbers together and keep the sign.
  • 170.
    To add integerswith different signs, subtract the integers and keep the sign of the larger integer. L. Establishing a purpose for the lesson The teacher will tell a situation. The temperature in Malaybalay City is 24O C in the morning. It dropped to 19O C in the evening. What is the difference between these temperatures? Pupils will listen attentively and will answer the question raised by the teacher. M. Presenting Examples/Instances of the new lesson Discuss the answer to the problem using the 3 Steps to subtract integers: 1.Keep Keep the 1st number 2.Change Subtraction sign to Addition 3.Opposite Write down the opposite of the 2nd number -Then add the way you normally do. Subtracting integers is adding the opposite of subtrahend to the minuend. In this case, the opposite of +19 is -19. We add -19 to +24, giving us +5. Therefore, Malaybalay City’s temperatures between morning and evening differ by 5O C. Give other examples for pupils to solve following the above steps. Pupils will listen attentively to the teacher’s discussion. N. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Show a video clip on how to subtract integers. Pupils will watch the video. O. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Demonstrate another example of subtraction of integers using algebra tiles. Example: Pupils will perform the steps in subtracting integers using algebra tiles.
  • 171.
    1. (+5) –(+2) = ____ Place 5 black tiles on the table. Take away 2 black tiles. = +3 Since there are 3 black tiles, the difference is +3. Thus, (+5) - (+2) = 3. 2. (-4) – (-3) = ____ Place 4 white tiles on the table. Take away 3 white tiles. = -1 Since there is 1 white tile left, the difference is -1. Thus, (-4) - (-3) = -1. 3. (-4) – (+1) = ____ Place 4 white tiles on the table. Take away 1 black tile. Since we cannot take away 1 black tile from 4 white tiles, then we must add 1 zero pair. + Remove 1 black tile, there remains 5 white tiles. Therefore, the difference is -5. 4. +3 – (-5) = ____ Place 3 black tiles on the table. Take away 5 white tiles. Since we cannot take away 5 white tiles from 3 black tiles, we have to add 5 zero pairs without changing the value of = 3 = -1 + = -5
  • 172.
    the set. Then,remove 5 white tiles. + The difference is +8. +3 – (-5) = 8 P. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Group Activity: The teacher will divide the class into groups of 5 members. Each group will be given an activity card to answer. After five minutes, they are going to exchange their activity cards for checking. The group with the most number of correct answers will be the winner. Pupils will answer the activity by group. 1. (-17)-(-19)-21= -19 2. -13-15-(-18)= -10 3. 45 – (-10) = 55 4. -15 – 6= -21 5. 38 – 9 = 29 Q. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Practice by Pair: Subtract the following integers. 1. -7 – 15 = 2. 23 – 98 = 3. 48 - 13 = 4. 5 – (- 6) = 5. 17 – 8 = Each pair will answer the given activity. 1. -7 – 15 = -22 2. 23 – 98 = -75 3. 48 - 13 = 35 4. 5 – (-6) = 11 5. 17 – 8 = 11 R. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson How do we subtract integers? (Subtraction of integers means adding the minuend and the opposite of the subtrahend.) or Subtract Integers 1.Keep Keep the 1st number 2.Change Subtraction sign to Addition 3.Opposite Write down the opposite of the 2nd number -Then add the way we normally do. S. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give a test. Subtract the following integers. 1) 13 - 4 = Pupils will answer the test individually. Answers:
  • 173.
    2) -7 -4 = 3) 12 - (-17) = 4) 12 - 17 = 5) -9 – (-1) = 6) 6 - 9 = 7) -14 - 5 = 8) 6 - 5 – 2 = 9) (-18) - 0 = 10) 13 - 3 = 1) 13 - 4 = 9 2) -7 - 4 = -11 3) 12 - (-17) = 29 4) 12 - 17 = -5 5) -9 – (-1) = -8 6) 6 - 9 = -3 7) -14 - 5 = -19 8) 6 - 5 – 2 = -1 9) (-18) - 0 = -18 10) 13 - 3 = 10 T. Additional activities for application or remediation Answer the following. 1. Subtract 6 from -15. 2. 8 + (-2) – 9 – (-7) = ___. Answers: 1. -22 2. 4 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION H. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment I. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation J. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson K. No. of learners who continue to require remediation L. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? M. What difficulties did I encountered which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? N. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 174.
    DETAILED LESSON PLAN SchoolGrade Level VI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 9, Day 3 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES G. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. H. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. I. Learning Competencies / Objectives Performs the basic operations on integers. (M6NS-IIi-156) 1. Perform multiplication on integers. 2. Use algebra tiles in multiplying integers. 3. Show awareness of the importance of reducing waste in the community. II. CONTENT Performing Multiplication on Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES E. References 9. Teacher’s Guide pages Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196 10. Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp. 166-168 11. Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp. 166-168 12. Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) Portal none F. Other Learning Resources Mathletes 6 textbook, video clip, power point presentation, activity sheets, algebra tiles IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity U. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson Review: (Board work) The teacher will call pupils to write the answer of the following. 1. 18- 7 = ___ 2. -26-12 = ____ 3. 35- (-8) = ____ 4. 20- (-20) = ____ 5. -25-(-25) = ____ Pupils will write the answer in each number. 1. 18- 7 = 11 2. -26-12 = -38 3. 35- (-8) = 43 4. 20- (-20) = 40 5. -25-(-25) = 0
  • 175.
    V. Establishing a purposefor the lesson Present the situation below. After a campaign on reducing waste, the amount of garbage on Jane’s household decreased by 2 kilograms per day. By how much will their garbage decrease after 6 days? Since Jane’s household had a decrease of 2 kg in their garbage, we can represent it with -2. Such decrease happened for 6 days, so we can have: -2 x 6 = n Multiplying integers is like multiplying whole numbers. We just need to be careful of the sign we use in the product. The product of two integers with different signs is negative. So, -2 x 6 = -12. Why is it important to reduce waste in our community? How can you help in reducing waste at home? Pupils will read and answer the problem. Answer: Jane’s garbage will have a decrease of 12 kilograms. Pupils answer may vary. W. Presenting Examples/Instan ces of the new lesson Present the rules in multiplying integers using power point presentation. Say: There are rules that we need to remember in multiplying integers: Rule 1: Positive x Positive = POSITIVE Example: 1. 3 x 6 = 18 2. 5 x 2 = 10 Rule 2: Negative x Negative = POSITIVE Example: 1. -2 x -3 = 6 2. -1 x -25 = 25 Rule 3: Negative x Positive = NEGATIVE Pupils will listen carefully to the discussion.
  • 176.
    Example: 1. -2 x6 = -12 2. 3 x -5 = -15 Rule 4: Any Number x 0 = ZERO Example: 1. -5 x 0 = 0 2. 0 x 7 = 0 X. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Say: To further understand our lesson, let us watch a video on how to multiply integers. Pupils will watch the video. Y. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 We can also multiply integers using algebra tiles. Black tiles represent positive integers while white tiles represent the negative integers. Example: 1. Find the product of (+3) and (+4) Place 4 rows of 3 black tiles on the table. Since there are 12 black tiles, the product is 12. Thus, (+3) x (+4) = 12. 2. Multiply (+4) by (-3). Place 3 rows of 4 black tiles on the table. Going back to the given, the other factor is negative, which means all the tiles in 3 rows should be flipped over. Pupils will listen to the teacher and multiply integers using algebra tiles. = 12 = -12
  • 177.
    Since there are12 white tiles, the product is -12. Thus, (+4) x (-3) = -12 Z. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Group Activity: Quiz bee The teacher will divide the class into 5 groups. Each group will be given a show-me- board. Then, they will choose a leader. Mechanics: a. The teacher will flash integers through power point slides. b. Pupils will be given 10 seconds to solve for the product of the given integers. c. The leader will write the product on the show-me- board. d. When the time is over, the teacher will ring the bell and each group will raise their show-me-board. e. The teacher will check the answers. f. The group having the most number of correct answers will be the winner. Pupils will go with their group and choose their leader. Answers: 1) 6 x 7 = 42 2) -8 x - 3 = 24 3) 5 x (-3) = -15 4) -12 x 4 = -48 5) -9 x (-2) x (-3) = -54 AA. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Pair-share: Say: Find a pair most preferably your seatmate. Then, share your ideas in finding the product of the integers. -2x3=___ -2 x -3 = ___ 6x8=___ -7x4=____ 7x (-4)=____ 2x(-6)=____ Pupils will look for a pair. They will share their ideas regarding the activity given by the teacher. -2x3= -6 -2 x -3 = 6 6x8= 48 -7x4= -28 7x (-4)= -28 2x(-6)= -12 BB. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson How do we multiply integers?  We multiply integers just like whole numbers.
  • 178.
     If twointegers have like signs, their product is positive.  If two integers have unlike signs, their product is negative. CC. Evaluating Learning Multiply the following. 1) (-3) x 8 = 2) -5 x (- 2) = 3) 0 x (-17) = 4) 10 x (-5) = 5) 8 x (-5) x (-2) = 6) (-42) x (-2) = 7) (-9) x (-2) x (-1) = 8) 6 x 2 = 9) (-18) x 1 = 10) -13 x 0 = Answer: 1) (-3) x 8 = -24 2) -5 x (- 2) = 10 3) 0 x (-17) = 0 4) 10 x (-5) = -50 5) 8 x (-5) x (-2) = 80 6) (-42) x (-2) = 84 7) (-9) x (-2) x (-1) = -18 8) 6 x 2 = 12 9) (-18) x 1 = -18 10) -13 x 0 = 0 DD. Additional activities for application or remediation Mother went to the market to buy some fruits and vegetables. She bought 5 apples at ₱30.00 each and 3 cabbages at ₱10.00 each. She gave the vendor a 500-peso bill. How much change did she get? Answer: ₱320.00 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION O. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment P. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation Q. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson R. No. of learners who continue to require remediation S. Which of my teaching strategies worked well?
  • 179.
    Why did these work? T.What difficulties did I encountered which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? U. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 180.
    DETAILED LESSON PLAN School Grade Level VI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS TeachingDates and Time Week 9, Day 4 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Competencies / Objectives Performs the basic operations on integers. (M6NS-IIi-156) 1. Perform division on integers. 2. Use algebra tiles as aid in division of integers. II. CONTENT Performing Division on Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES References Teacher’s Guide pages Learning Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196 Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp 169-170 Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp 169-170 Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) Portal none Other Learning Resources Mathletes 6 textbook, power point presentation, algebra tiles, answer sheets IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson Have a quick review on multiplying integers through flash cards. 1. 5 x (-6) 2. -10 x 9 3. -7 x (-5) 4. -4 x 0 5. -6 x (-6) Pupils will give the answers orally. 1. 5 x (-6) = -30 2. -10 x 9 = -90 3. -7 x (-5) = 35 4. -4 x 0 = 0 5. -6 x (-6) = 36 B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Present the problem below. During summer vacation, Alfred works as janitor in a restaurant. He earns ₱450 per week. If he works for 5 days every Answer: Alfred earns ₱90 per day. 450 5 = 90
  • 181.
    week, how muchdoes he earn daily? C. Presenting Examples/Instances of the new lesson Present the rules in dividing integers. Say: Dividing integers is the same as dividing whole numbers. We just need to be careful of the sign we use in the quotient. When dividing integers, we need to remember that the quotient of two integers with like sign is always POSITIVE. Example: 1. (+10) ÷ (+2) = (+5) 2. (-6) ÷ (-3) = (+2) On the other hand, if the signs are different the quotient is a NEGATIVE integer. Example: 1. (+10) ÷ (-5) = -2 2. -20 ÷ 4 = -5 Pupils will listen attentively to the teacher’s discussion. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Board work: Give more examples on dividing integers using the rules. Call on pupil volunteers to solve on the board and explain their answer to the class. Pupils will solve on the board and explain their answer. 1. 28 ÷ 2 = 14 The answer is +14 since 28 and 2 have the same sign. 2. -75 ÷ 5 = -15 The quotient is -15 sine 75 and 5 have different signs. 3. 36 ÷ (-3) = -12 The answer is -12 since 36 and 3 have unlike signs. E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Discuss another method of dividing integers using algebra tiles. Example:
  • 182.
    1. Divide: (+6)÷ (+2) From the 6 black tiles, make 2 groups with equal number of tiles. There are 3 black tiles in each group. Therefore, (+6) ÷ (+2) = (+3) or simply 3. 2. Divide: (-6) ÷ (+2) From the 6 white tiles, make 2 groups with equal number of tiles. There are 3 white tiles in each group. Therefore, (-6) ÷ (+2) = -3. 3. Divide: (+6) ÷ (-2) Note: Negative divisor means take the opposite of or flip over. Therefore, from the 6 black tiles, make 2 groups with equal number of WHITE tiles. There are 3 white tiles in each group. Therefore, (+6) ÷ (-2) = (-3). 4. Divide: (-6) ÷ (-2) Note: Negative divisor means take the opposite of or flip over. Therefore, from the 6 white tiles, make 2 groups with equal number of BLACK tiles. There are 3 black tiles in each group. Therefore, (-6) ÷ (-2) = (+3) or simply 3. Flip over Flip over Answer: 1. (-36) ÷ 9 = -4 2. 56 ÷ (-4) = -14
  • 183.
    Additional examples: 1. (-36)÷ 9 = 2. 56 ÷ (-4) = F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Group Activity: The class will be divided into 5 groups. The teacher will give each group an activity card. Find the quotient of the following. 1. (-56) ÷ 8 = 2. 120 ÷ (-8) = 3. 144 ÷ 6 = 4. -124÷ 4 = 5. (-48) ÷ (-4) = Each member of the group will help each other in answering the activity. Answer: 1. -7 2. -15 3. 24 4. -31 5. 12 G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Try this with your seatmate: 54  6 = -54  6 = 54  -6 = -54  -6 = -12  -4 = Pupil will answer. 54  6 = 9 -54  6 = -9 54  -6 = -9 -54  -6 = 9 -12  -4 = 3 H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson How do we divide integers?  Dividing integers is the same as dividing whole numbers.  The quotient of two integers with like sign is a positive integer.  The quotient of two integers with different signs is a negative integer. I. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give a test. Divide the following. 1. (-28) ÷ (-7) = 2. 45 ÷ (-5) = 3. (-75) ÷ (-5) = 4. -30 ÷ 5 = 5. 250 ÷ (-50) = Pupils will answer individually. Answers: 1. (-28) ÷ (-7) = 4 2. 45 ÷ (-5) = -9 3. 75 ÷ 5 = 15 4. -30 ÷ 5 = -6 5. 250 ÷ (-50) = -5 J. Additional activities for application or remediation Find the quotient. 1. (-144) ÷ 2 = 2. 56 ÷ (-2) = Answer: 1. -72 2. -28 V. REMARKS
  • 184.
    VI. REFLECTION A. No.of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encountered which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 185.
    School Grade LevelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 9, Day 5 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES H. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. I. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. J. Learning Competencies / Objectives Performs the basic operations on integers. (M6NS-IIi-156) 1. Answer the summative test. II. CONTENT Answering the Summative Test III. LEARNING RESOURCES G. References 451 Teacher’s Guide pages Mathematics CG for Grade 6, p.196 452 Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp 152-157 453 Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp 152-157 H. Other Learning Resources Test paper IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity K. Reviewing previous lesson Have a quick review on the rules in adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing integers. Pupils will participate actively in the review. L. Setting of Standards Ask: What are the things that you need to do in answering a test. Possible answers: 1. Follow the directions. 2. Answer silently. 3. Cover your test paper. 4. Don’t talk with seatmates. 5. Don’t cheat. 6. If you’re done, review your answers. M. Giving of Instructions and Distribution of Test Papers Read the instructions in answering the test. Distribute the test papers. N. Test Proper Supervise the pupils in answering the summative test. Perform the indicated operation. Pupils will answer the given test.
  • 186.
    1) 9 +(-17) = 2) -2 + 29 + (-16) = 3) (-3) + (-15) = 4) -8 - 5 = 5) 54 - (-20) = 6) -12 x 5 = 7) 6 x (-2) x (-10) = 8) 25 x 12 = 9) 48 ÷ (-3) = 10) -24 ÷ (-2) = O. Checking of Test Papers and Recording of Scores The teacher will post the answers on the board and record the scores of pupils. Pupils will check the test papers. P. Additional activities for remediation Answer the following: 1) 29 + (-7) = 2) -2 - (-16) = 3) (-3) x (-15) = 4) -48 ÷ 2 = Answer: 1) 22 2) 14 3) 45 4) -24 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation
  • 187.
    School Grade LevelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 10, Day 1 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies / Objectives Solves routine and non-routine problems involving addition of integers using appropriate strategies and tools. (M6NS-IIj-157) II. CONTENT Solving Routine and Non-routine Problems Involving Addition of Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References Teacher’s Guide pages Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196 Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp156-157 Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp156-157 Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) Portal none B. Other Learning Resources Mathletes 6 textbook, power point presentation, activity cards IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson Drill: Integers Word Clue! Teacher will flash cards with a word which represents either a positive or negative integer. When the teacher flashes the word, pupils will raise the happy face if the word represents a positive integer or sad face if it represents a negative integer. Answer: (+) Integers 1. earned 2. saved 3. deposit 4. gained 5. rose 6. increase 7. above 8. ascend 9. profit 10. up (-) Integers 1. spent 2. cost 3. withdraw 4. lost 5. fell 6. decrease 7. below 8. descend 9. loss 10. down
  • 188.
    Review: (Board work) Calla pupil to perform the indicated operation. (+10) + (-9) (-25) + (+5) (-80) + (+6) (-120) + (+20) (35) + (-20) (+10) + (-9) = 1 (-25) + (+5) = -20 (-80) + (+6) = -74 (-120)+(+20)= -100 (35) + (-20) = 15 B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Present the problem to the class. Problem: A messenger forgot on what floor in a building he would deliver his package. With no one to ask for directions, he rode the elevator up to the 10th floor. Then he went down 5 floors and went up again 4 floors. Still, he could not find the right floor. So he went up again 3 floors and decided to stop for a while. On what floor did the messenger stop? Pupils will read the given problem. C. Presenting Examples/Instanc es of the new lesson Use the 4-step plan to solve the problem. 1. Understand -What is asked? -What are given? 2. Plan -What strategy will you use to solve the problem? 3. Solve -Solve the problem using the strategy. 4. Check -Check if the answer is correct. Pupils will analyze and answer the problem following the steps. 1. a. It asked for the floor where the messenger stopped. b. First stop: 10th floor down 5 floors up 4 floors up 3 floors 2. Use a number line 3. Using the number line, start at 0 as the starting point. On the first ride, the elevator went up to 10th floor. So from 10, he went down 5 floors, up again 4 floors, and went up again 3 floors. Therefore, the messenger stopped at 12th floor 4.Check 10-5+4+3=12 12=12 Thus, the answer is correct. D. Discussing new concepts and Present another problem and guide the pupils in answering it using the 4- step plan. Pupils will answer the problem using the 4-step plan.
  • 189.
    practicing new skills #1Problem: A car is located 40 km north of Malaybalay City. If it travelled 35km north then 45 km south, how far from Malaybalay City was the car at the end of its travel? Answer: 40+35-45=30 Thus, the car is located 30 km north of Malaybalay City. E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Pair-share: Answer the problem by pair. Mrs. Santos lost 3 kg when she was ill. After recovering, she gained 7 kg. She went to a fitness center and lost 2 kg. How much did she finally lose or gain? Solution: She lost 3 kg means -3. She gained 7 kg means +7. She lost again 2 kg means -2. Equation: (-3)+(7)+(-2)=2 Therefore, she gained 2 kg. F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Group Activity: Use the 4-step plan to solve the problem. 1. Divide the class into 4 groups. 2. Give each group an activity card, marker, and manila paper where they will write their solution. 3. Pupils are given 10 minutes to do the activity. 4. When the time is up, each group will post their output on the board for checking. Group 1 and 3 Problem: In the first half of a trivia game, Kenneth scored 500 points. Then, during the second half, he lost 200 points. What was his total score? Solution: 500 + (-200) = 300 Group 2 and 4 Problem: Simon spent Php1,000 on a fancy watch and deposited a Php3,000 paycheck. How much is the change that Simon had? Solution: - 1,000 + 3,000 = 2,000 Simon had Php2,000 more. G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Use the 4-step plan to solve the problem. 1. On the first play, the football team lost 6 yards. On the second play, the team lost 5 yards. What was their total change in yards? Answer: (-6)+(-5)=(-11) The team lost 11 yards. H. Making generalizations How do you solve routine and non- routine problems involving addition of To solve routine and non-routine problems involving addition of integers, we use the 4-step plan:
  • 190.
    and abstractions about thelesson integers using appropriate strategies and tools? 1. Understand-Know what is asked and given. 2. Plan what strategy to use. 3. Solve using the strategy. 4. Check if the answer is correct. I. Evaluating Learning Solve each problem: 1. Gio walked 5 steps forward, 8 steps backward, 9 steps forward and 3 steps backward. How many steps is Gio from where he started? 2. A submarine was situated 800 feet below sea level. If it ascends 250 feet, what is its new position? Answer: 1.(5)+(-8)+(9)+(-3)=3 Gio is 3 steps from where he started. 2. (-800)+(250)=-550 The submarine is situated 550 feet below sea level. J. Additional activities for application or remediation Give 10 pairs of integers whose product is greater than zero and whose sum is less than 50. Answers may vary. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encountered
  • 191.
    which my principal or supervisorcan help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 192.
    School Grade LevelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 10, Day 2 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies / Objectives Solves routine and non-routine problems involving subtraction of integers using appropriate strategies and tools. M6NS-IIj-157 II. CONTENT Solving Routine and Non-routine Problems Involving Subtraction of Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References Teacher’s Guide pages Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196 Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp164-165 Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp164-165 Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) Portal none B. Other Learning Resources Mathletes 6 textbook, power point presentation IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson Drill: Give the opposite of each integer. +25 -57 -100 -82 75 Review: (Board work) Perform the indicated operation. (+20) - (-19) (-35) - (+5) (-60) - (-29) (-45) - (+30) (55) - (-26) Answers: -25 +57 +100 +82 -75 Answer: +39 -40 -31 -75 +81 B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Present the problem. Pupils will read and analyze the problem.
  • 193.
    The temperature in BaguioCity was 12° Celsius in the morning. It dropped to 8° Celsius in the evening. What is the difference between these temperatures? C. Presenting Examples/Instances of the new lesson Ask the following questions. 1. What is asked? 2. What is the equation representing this situation? 3. What is the difference between the temperature of Baguio in the morning and evening? To get the difference between the two temperatures, we need to subtract 8° from 12°. Answer: 12°- 8° = 4° D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Present another problem. During summer, James weighed 65 kg. When he came back to school, he realized that he lost 3 kg. He lost another 2 kg in December. What was his weight in December? 1. What is asked? 2. What are given? 3. What is the equation representing the situation? 4. What is the final answer? Answer: 1. What was his weight in December? 2. 65 kg, 3kg, 2kg 3. 65-3-2=n 4. 65-3-2=n =65+(-3)+(-2) [rule in subtracting integer] =60kg E. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #2 Pair-share: Answer the problem by pair. At sunrise, the outside temperature was 1° below zero. By lunch time, the temperature rose by 17° and then fell by 4° by night. What Pupils will find a partner and answer the given problem together. Solution: The starting temperature is 1° below zero, or -1°. Later, the temperature rose, or went up, by 17°. Then, the temperature fell, or went down, by 4°.
  • 194.
    was the temperatureat the end of the day? Equation: -1° + 17° - 4°= -12° F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Group Activity: The teacher will divide the class into 5 groups and give the activity card. Solve the problem. 1. The highest point in Asia is Mount Everest at 8850 meters. The shore of the Dead Sea, the lowest point in Asia, is about 410 meters below sea level. What is the difference between these elevations? 2. In Fairfield, Montana, on December 24, 1924, the air temperature dropped a record amount. At noon, the temperature was 63°F. Twelve hours later, the temperature was 21°F. What was the change in temperature? Pupils will answer the problem by group and report their answer to the class. Solution: Use integers to represent the two elevations. Mount Everest: +8850m Dead Sea: -410 m Find the difference of 8850 and 410 meters. 8850 -(- 410) =8850 + 410 [Rule for subtracting integers] =9260 ANSWER: The difference between the elevations is 9260 meters. 2. Solution: Change in temperature = end temperature - start temperature =21 - 63 (Substitute values.) = 21 + (-63) [Rule for subtracting integers] = -42 ANSWER: The change in temperature was -42, so the temperature dropped 42°F. G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Individual Activity Solve the problem. 1. In the Sahara Desert one day it was 136°F. In the Gobi Desert a temperature of -50°F was recorded. What is the difference between these two temperatures? Answer: 136° - (-50°)=n 136° + (50°) = 186° The difference between the two temperature is 186°F. H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Ask: How do you solve routine and non-routine problems involving subtraction of integers using appropriate strategies and tools? To solve routine and non-routine problems involving subtraction of integers, know what is asked and given, formulate the equation to represent the problem, solve the equation and check your answer.
  • 195.
    I. Evaluating LearningThe teacher will give a test. Solve each problem: 1. RJ was able to save ₱895 from his weekly allowance. If he wants to buy a second hand mobile phone for ₱1,050, how much more money does he still need? 2. What is the distance of an airplane that is 890 m above the sea level and a submarine that is 102 m below sea level? Answers: 1. ₱155 2. 992m J. Additional activities for application or remediation If the temperature was - 7 degrees (Fahrenheit) at 6 AM, rose 4 degrees by 7 AM and then rose another 8 degrees by 8 AM, what was the temperature at 8 AM? Answer: -7 + 4 + 8 = 5 degrees (Fahrenheit) V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION K. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment L. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation M. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson N. No. of learners who continue to require remediation O. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? P. What difficulties did I encountered which my principal or supervisor can help me solve?
  • 196.
    Q. What innovationor localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 197.
    School Grade LevelVI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS Teaching Dates and Time Week 10, Day 3 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies / Objectives The learner solves routine and non-routine problems involving multiplication and division of integers using appropriate strategies and tools. M6NS-IIj-157 II. CONTENT Solving Routine and Non-routine Problems Involving Multiplication and Division of Integers III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References Teacher’s Guide pages Curriculum Guide in Mathematics 6, p.196 Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp170-173 Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp170-173 Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) Portal none B. Other Learning Resources Mathletes 6 textbook, video clip, power point presentation IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Reviewing previous lesson or presenting the new lesson Drill: Perform multiplication on each pair of numbers. 12 & 4 7 & 3 15 & 9 Write positive or negative: (+) ÷ (+) = (+) ÷ (−) = (−) ÷ (+) = (−) ÷ (−) = (+) x (+) = (+) x (−) = (−) x (+) = (−) x (−) = Perform division on each pair of numbers. Answers: 48 21 135 (+) ÷ (+) = (+) (+) ÷ (−) = (−) (−) ÷ (+) = (−) (−) ÷ (−) = (+) (+) x (+) = (+) (+) x (−) = (−) (−) x (+) = (−) (−) x (−) = (+) 9
  • 198.
    135 & 15 84& 6 28 & 7 Review: Determine if the following pairs of integers have like signs or unlike signs. (+7) & (-12) (-4) & (-9) (-5) & (-30) (+2) & (-11) (+56) & (-18) 14 4 B. Establishing a purpose for the lesson Present the problem. After a community campaign on reducing waste, the amount of garbage in Rita’s household decreased by 2 kg. per day. By how much will their garbage decrease after 6 days? What is the average reduced waste by each person in Rita’s household if there are four of them in the family? Pupils will read and analyze the problem. C. Presenting Examples/Instances of the new lesson Ask the following questions. 1. What integer will represent the decrease in garbage in a day? 2.If such decrease happens for 6 days, then what equation will describe the total decrease of garbage in 6 days? -Multiplying integers is the same as multiplying whole numbers. The product of two integers with different signs is negative. On the other hand, the product of two integers with same sign is positive. Solution: Multiplying 2 and 6 is 12, but since the signs of the factors are different, then the product is -12. Therefore, after 6 days, Rita’s household will have a Answers: 1. -2 2. -2 x 6 = n 3. Divide the total decrease of garbage by four since they are four in the family. 4. -12 ÷ 4= n 5. -3kg Each member of Rita’s household reduced 3kg in their garbage.
  • 199.
    decrease of 12kgin their garbage. 3. How are we going to know the average reduced waste of each member of Rita’s household? -Dividing integers is the same as dividing whole numbers. The quotient of two integers with different signs is negative. On the other hand, the quotient of two integers with the same sign is positive. 4. What will be the equation representing the average reduced waste of each member of Rita’s household? 5. What is the quotient of the two integers in your equation? Solution: 12 ÷ 4 is 3. Since 12 & 4 have different signs, then the final answer will be -3. Thus, each of the 4 members of Rita’s household reduced 3kg in their garbage. D. Discussing new concepts and practicing new skills #1 Present another problem and discuss the answer using the 4-step plan. There were 15 rows of 50 chairs arranged in an auditorium. Each chair was rented ₱40. How much was paid for the rental? 1.Understand What is asked? Given? 2. Plan What equation represents the problem? 3. Solve 4. Check Pupils will read the problem, listen to the discussion and answer some questions raised by the teacher. Answers: 1. How much was paid for the rental? Given: 15 rows of 50 chairs, ₱40 each chair 2. 15x50x40=n 3. 15x50x40=₱30, 000
  • 200.
    E. Discussing new conceptsand practicing new skills #2 Present another problem. Guide the pupils in answering the problem. Alicia owes Php200 to each of her 4 friends. How much money does she owe? Solution: The problem above can be solved using integers. Owing Php200 can be represented by -200. Thus the problem becomes: (-200) (+4) The parentheses indicate that these integers are being multiplied. In order to solve this problem, we need to know the rules for multiplication of integers. We can now use Rule 1 to solve the problem arithmetically:(- 200) (+ 4) = - 800. So Alicia owes -Php800. The pupils will read and analyze the problem. Rule 1: The product of a positive integer and a negative integer is a negative integer. Rule 2: The product of two negative integers or two positive integers is a positive integer. F. Developing mastery (Leads to Formative Assessment 3) Group Activity: Divide the class into 5 groups. Give each group an activity card. Answer the following problems. Use the 4-step plan to solve the problem. 1. A person has a debt of Php500. Five friends offer to pay off all of the debt. How much does each person need to pay in order to pay off the debt? 2. Ms. Reyes needed Php250. She withdrew five times that amount. How much money did she withdraw? 3. A sprinkler was -20 feet below ground level. Mr. Cruz has a machine that digs -4 Pupils will answer the problem by group. Answers: 1. Php100. 2. Php1,250 3. 5 digs
  • 201.
    feet at atime. How many digs does he need to make in order to reach the sprinkler? G. Finding practical applications of concepts and skills in daily living Present the problem and have pupils answer it individually. Use the 4-step plan to solve the problem. 1. Four roommates share an apartment. The balance for their bills for the month of July is -Php1600. How much do they each owe? 2. Yesterday's low temperature was -2.5. Today's low temperature is 5 times as low as yesterday's low temperature. What is the temperature today? Answers: 1. Each of them owes Php400. 2. -12.5 H. Making generalizations and abstractions about the lesson Ask: How do you solve routine and non-routine problems involving multiplication & division of integers using appropriate strategies and tools? To solve routine and non-routine problems involving multiplication & division of integers, use the 4-step plan: 1. Understand-what is asked/given 2. Plan-what equation represents the problem 3.Solve equation 4. Check answer I. Evaluating Learning The teacher will give a test. Solve each problem: 1. Mr. Cruz went to market to buy some fruits and vegetables. He bought 5 apples at Php30 each and 3 cabbages at Php10 each. He gave the vendor a 500-peso bill. How much change did he get? 2. Mrs. Tan has ₱500 to buy some groceries. Can she buy 10 can goods that cost ₱40 each? Show your solution. Answers: 1. Php320 2. Yes ₱500÷₱40=12.5 ₱40x10=₱400 Thus, she can buy 10 can goods worth ₱10 each.
  • 202.
    J. Additional activities forapplication or remediation Math Challenge 1. The sum of two numbers is 96 and one of them is five times the other. What are the two numbers? Answer: Let x=1st number 5x=2nd number To show the sum: x + 5x = 96 6x = 96 x = 96 ÷6 x = 16 is the 1st number. 5x=5(16)=80 is the 2nd number Check: 16+80=96 96=96 V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation C. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson D. No. of learners who continue to require remediation E. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? F. What difficulties did I encountered which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? G. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?
  • 203.
    DETAILED LESSON PLANIN MATHEMATICS 6 School Grade Level VI Teacher Learning Area MATHEMATICS
  • 204.
    Teaching Dates and Time Week10, Day 4-5 Quarter 2ND I. OBJECTIVES A. Content Standards The learner demonstrates understanding of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers. B. Performance Standards The learner is able to apply knowledge of order of operations, ratio and proportion, percent, exponents, and integers in mathematical problems and real-life situations. C. Learning Competencies / Objectives Answer the second quarterly test. II. CONTENT Answering the Second Quarterly Test III. LEARNING RESOURCES A. References Teacher’s Guide pages Mathematics CG for Grade 6, pp.190-196 Learner’s Materials pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp. 82-180 Textbook pages 21st Century Mathletes 6, pp. 82-180 Additional Materials from Learning Resource (LR) Portal none B. Other Learning Resources Test paper IV. PROCEDURES Teacher’s Activity Pupils’ Activity A. Setting of Standards Ask: What are the things that you need to do in answering a test. Possible answers: 1. Follow the directions. 2. Answer silently. 3. Cover your test paper. 4. Don’t talk with seatmates. 5. Don’t cheat. 6. If you’re done, review your answers. B. Giving of Instructions and Distribution of Test Papers Read the instructions in answering the test. Distribute the test papers. C. Test Proper Supervise the pupils in answering the second periodic test. Pupils will answer the test.
  • 205.
    D. Checking ofTest Papers and Recording of Scores The teacher will post the answers on the board and record the scores of pupils. Pupils will check the test papers. V. REMARKS VI. REFLECTION A. No. of learners who earned 80% on the formative assessment B. No. of learners who require additional activities for remediation A. Did the remedial lessons work? No. of learners who have caught up with the lesson B. No. of learners who continue to require remediation C. Which of my teaching strategies worked well? Why did these work? D. What difficulties did I encountered which my principal or supervisor can help me solve? E. What innovation or localized materials did I use/discover which I wish to share with other teachers?